Honda Passport 2022 Owner'sManual PDF
en
Summary of Content for Honda Passport 2022 Owner'sManual PDF
2022 PASSPORT
Owners Manual
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 0
Event Data Recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: How various systems in your vehicle were operating; Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened; How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and, How fast the vehicle was traveling.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 1
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential. Some diagnostic and maintenance information is uploaded to Honda upon vehicle start up.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
NOTICE
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 2
Software End User License Agreement Your vehicle comes equipped with software, which is governed by the End User License Agreement in this Owners Manual, and which contains a binding arbitration clause. Please refer to the End User License Agreement for the terms and conditions governing your use of the installed software, as well as the applications, services, functions, and content provided through the software. Your use of the installed software will serve as your consent to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement. You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Service Mail Stop CHI-5, 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746.
Privacy Notice This vehicle may share location and usage information. To manage this setting, visit www.hondalink.com/vehicle-data-choices.
To learn more about how we collect and use Personal Information, please read our Privacy Policy, accessible at www.honda.com.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 3
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgment.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:
Safety Labels - on the vehicle. Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. These signal words mean:
Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions. Safety Section - such as Safe Driving. Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please read it carefully.
3DANGER You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions.
3WARNING You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions.
3CAUTION You CAN be HURT if you don't follow instructions.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 4
Contents
This owners manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
The Navigation Manual is available online at owners.honda.com (U.S.) or honda.ca (Canada). If you are the first registered owner of your vehicle, you may request a complimentary printed copy of the Navigation Manual within the first six months of vehicle purchase. To request a copy, visit owners.honda.com. In Canada, please request a copy from your Honda dealer.
This owners manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model.
Images throughout this owners manual (including the front cover) represent features and equipment that are available on some, but not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these features.
This owners manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and Canada.
The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation.
2 Safe Driving P. 31 For Safe Driving P. 32 Seat Belts P. 37 Airbags P. 47
2 Instrument Panel P. 79 Indicators P. 80 Gauges and Displays P. 107
2 Controls P. 123 Clock P. 124 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 126 Opening and Closing the Windows P. 154 Moonroof* P. 157 Adjusting the Seats P. 181
2 Features P. 221 Audio System P. 222 General Information on the Audio System P. 305 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 349
2 Driving P. 375 Before Driving P. 376 Towing a Trailer P. 382 Parking Your Vehicle P. 480 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 491
2 Maintenance P. 497 Before Performing Maintenance P. 498 Maintenance MinderTM P. 501 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 524 Remote Transmitter Care P. 539 Accessories and Modifications P. 547
2 Handling the Unexpected P. 549 Tools P. 550 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 551 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 567 Fuses P. 572 Refueling P. 579 If You Cannot Open the Tailgate P. 580
2 Information P. 581 Specifications P. 582 Identification Numbers P. 584 Emissions Testing P. 587 Warranty Coverages P. 589
Contents
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 5
Child Safety P. 62 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 77 Safety Labels P. 78
Opening and Closing the Tailgate P. 141 Security System P. 151 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 158 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 179 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 192 Climate Control System P. 213
Audio System Basic Operation P. 228 Audio Error Messages P. 302 Customized Features P. 327 HomeLink Universal Transceiver* P. 346
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 392 When Driving P. 394 Honda Sensing P. 431 Braking P. 476 Refueling P. 493 Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions P. 496
Maintenance Under the Hood P. 507 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 519 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 528 Battery P. 537 Climate Control System Maintenance P. 540 Cleaning P. 542
Engine Does Not Start P. 559 If the Battery Is Dead P. 562 Overheating P. 565 Emergency Towing P. 577 If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door P. 578
Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 585 Reporting Safety Defects P. 586 Authorized Manuals P. 592 Customer Service Information P. 593
Quick Reference Guide P. 6
Safe Driving P. 31
Instrument Panel P. 79
Controls P. 123
Features P. 221
Driving P. 375
Maintenance P. 497
Handling the Unexpected P. 549
Information P. 581
Index P. 595
6
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 6
Quick Reference Guide
Visual Index
Gauges (P107)Driver Information Interface (P108)
System Indicators (P80)
ECON Button (P417)
Audio System (P228)Navigation System* () See the Navigation System Manual
(Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) System OFF) Button (P421)
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) OFF Button (P437)
Heated Windshield Button* (P174)Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Button (P470)
Parking Sensor System Button* (P483)
Steering Wheel Adjustments (P178)
ENGINE START/STOP Button (P158)
Front Seat Heater Buttons* (P207)Front Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilator Buttons* (P208)
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button (P173)
Audio/Information Screen (P229)Hazard Warning Button
Climate Control System (P213)
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 7
Headlights/Turn Signals (P161, 162)
Fog Lights* (P165)
Paddle Shifter (Shift down) (P410)
Audio Remote Control Buttons (P226)
Wipers/Washers (P170)
Paddle Shifter (Shift up) (P410)
Brightness Control (P175)
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Button (P461)
Horn (Press an area around .)
Navigation System Voice Control Buttons* () See the Navigation System ManualBluetooth HandsFreeLink System Voice Control Buttons (P349)
Heated Steering Wheel Button* (P210)
ENTER Button (P110, 226)
Interval Button (P454)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Buttons (P446)
(home) Button (P110, 226)
/ Button (P110, 226)3 4
MAIN Button (P447)
* Not available on all models
Visual Index
8
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 8
Power Window Switches (P154)
Memory Buttons* (P177)SET Button* (P177)
Master Door Lock Switch (P139)
Power Tailgate Button* (P145)
Fuel Fill Door Release Button (P494)
Door Mirror Controls (P180)
Drivers Front Airbag (P50)
Hood Release Handle (P508)
Glove Box (P195)
Interior Fuse Box (P575)Parking Brake (P476) Interior Fuse Box (P574)
Accessory Power Socket (P199)
USB Port (P223)
Rearview Mirror (P179)
HomeLink Buttons* (P347)
Passengers Front Airbag (P50)
Accessory Power Socket (P199)
Auxiliary Input Jack (P224)
USB Port (P223)
Snow Button* (P418)
Mode Button* (P418)
Auto Idle Stop OFF Button (P412)
Shift Button (P403)
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 9
Accessory Power Socket* (P200)
LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P67)
Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P70)
Rear Seat (P185)
Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P73)
Cargo Area Light (P194)
Side Curtain Airbags (P57)
Rear Seat Heater Buttons* (P209)
AC Power Outlet* (P200)USB Ports* (P224)
Sun VisorsVanity MirrorsMoonroof Switch* (P157)
Map Lights (P193)Sunglasses Holder (P205)
Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor (P44)
Coat Hook (P204)
Side Airbags (P55)
Seat Belts (P42)
Grab Handle
Front Seat (P181)
* Not available on all models
Visual Index
10
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 10
Maintenance Under the Hood (P507)Windshield Wipers (P170, 524)
Tires (P528, 551)
Power Door Mirrors (P180)
Headlights (P162, 519)
Front Side Marker Lights (P162, 520)
Side Turn Signal Lights* (P161, 522)
Daytime Running Lights /Parking Lights (P162, 166, 520)
How to Refuel (P494)
High-Mount Brake Light (P523)
Rear Wiper (P172, 526)
Rear Side Marker Lights (P522)
Rear Turn Signal Lights (P522)
Brake/Taillights (P522)
Opening/Closing the Tailgate (P141)
Door Lock/Unlock Control (P129)
Fog Lights* (P165, 521)
Front Turn Signal Lights (P161, 521)
Back-Up Lights (P523)
Tailgate Outer Handle (P146)
Multi-View Rear Camera (P491)
Rear License Plate Lights (P523)
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 11
Auto Idle Stop Function To improve fuel economy, the engine stops and then restarts as detailed below. When Auto Idle Stop is on, the Auto Idle Stop indicator (green) comes on. (P411)
At Automatic transmission Engine status
Deceleration Stop the vehicle and depress the brake pedal.
Stop Keep the brake pedal depressed.
Start-up Release the brake pedal.
On
Off
Restarting
* Not available on all models
12
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 12
Eco Assist System Ambient Meter The color of the ambient meter changes
to green to indicate that the vehicle is being driven in a fuel efficient manner.
ECON Button (P417 ) Helps maximize fuel economy.
ECON Mode Indicator (P88 ) Comes on when the ECON button is pressed.
The message is displayed for a few seconds when the ECON button is pressed.
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 13
Safe Driving (P31)
Airbags (P47)
Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety (P62)
All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat. Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat. Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard (P77)
Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon monoxide gas can accumulate.
Before Driving Checklist (P376)
Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints, steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Seat Belts (P37)
Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well back in the seat.
Check that your passengers are wearing their seat belts correctly.
Fasten your lap belt as low as possible.
13
14
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 14
Instrument Panel (P79)
System Indicators Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Charging System Indicator
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator
Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) System Indicator
VSA OFF Indicator
Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator
Immobilizer System Indicator/Security System Alarm Indicator
Lights Indicators Lights On Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Fog Light Indicator*Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Green/ Amber)
Seat Belt Reminder Indicator
System Indicators
Econ Mode Indicator
System Message Indicator
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)
Supplemental Restraint System Indicator
Driver Information Interface
Tachometer
M (Sequential mode) Indicator/ Sequential Mode Gear Selection Indicator
Speedometer
Fuel Gauge
Gear Position Indicator/Transmission System Indicator
Auto Idle Stop System Indicator (Amber)/ Auto Idle Stop Indicator (Green)
Gauges (P107)/Driver Information Interface (P108)/System Indicators (P80)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (Green/Amber)
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator
Blind spot information System Indicator*
Temperature Gauge
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber)
U.S.
Canada
System Indicators
U.S.
Canada
Low Fuel Indicator
Auto High-Beam Indicator
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Indicator Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Indicator
All-wheel drive system (AWD) Indicator*
Intelligent Traction Management Indicator
Auto Idle Stop OFF Indicator
Auto Idle Stop Suspend Indicator
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 15
Controls (P123)
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
Clock (P124)
To adjust time
To adjust date
a Select , then select Settings.
b Select System, then Date & Time.
c Select Set Date & Time.
d Select Automatic Date & Time, then select OFF.
e Select Set Date or Set Time.
f Adjust the dates, hours, and minutes by selecting / .
g Select Save to set the time.
The navigation system receives signals from GPS satellites, updating the clock automatically.
ENGINE START/STOP Button (P158)
Press the button to change the vehicles power mode.
3 4
Models with navigation system
Turn Signals (P161)
Lights (P162)
Turn Signal Control Lever
Right
Left
Light Control Switches
Low Beam
High Beam
Flashing
* Not available on all models
16
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 16
Wipers and Washers (P170)
*1:Models with automatic intermittent operation
*2:Models with manual intermittent operation
Wiper/Washer Control Lever MIST OFF AUTO*1: Wiper speed varies automatically INT*2: Low speed with intermittent LO: Low speed wipe HI: High speed wipe
Pull toward you to spray washer fluid.
Adjustment Ring Low Sensitivity*1
Lower speed, fewer sweeps*2
High Sensitivity*1
Higher speed, more sweeps*2(+ : (+:
(- : (-:
AUTO should always be turned OFF before the following situations in order to prevent severe damage to the wiper system: Cleaning the windshield Driving through a car wash No rain present
Steering Wheel (P178)
To adjust, push the adjustment lever down, adjust to the desired position, then pull up the lever back in place.
Models with automatic intermittent wipers
Pull either front door inner handle to unlock and open it at the same time.
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 17
Tailgate (P141)
Use a forward and back kicking motion under the center of the rear bumper to open or close the power tailgate while carrying the keyless remote.
Models with Hands Free Access
1 sec.
Press the tailgate outer handle to unlock and open the tailgate when you carry the keyless remote.
Press the power tailgate button on the drivers door or the remote transmitter to open and close the power tailgate.
Outer Handle
Models with power tailgate
Power Door Mirrors (P180)
With the power mode in ON, move the selector switch to L or R.
Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Press the folding button* to fold in and out the door mirrors.
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
Folding Button*
* Not available on all models
18
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 18
Power Windows (P154)
With the power mode in ON, open and close the power windows.
If the power window lock button is in the off position, each passengers window can be opened and closed with its own switch.
If the power window lock button is in the on position (indicator is on), each passengers window switch is disabled.
Power Window Lock Button Indicator
Window Switch
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 19
Climate Control System (P213)
Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system. Press the button to turn the system on or off. Press the button to defrost the windshield.
Fan Control Button
(Windshield Defroster) Button
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Air flows from floor and windshield defroster vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and dashboard vents.
Air flows from dashboard vents.
(Recirculation) Button
Passengers Side Temperature Control Switch
AUTO Button
Drivers Side Temperature Control Switch
Mode Control Button
SYNC (Synchronization) Button
(On/Off) Button
Rear Climate Control* (P218) Press the AUTO button to activate the rear climate control system.
Press the button to turn the system on or off.
Rear Temperature Control Buttons
/ (Rear Fan Control) Buttons
Rear AUTO Button
(Rear On/ Off) Button
Mode Control Button
Air flows from the rear floor vents.
Air flow from the rear console vents and floor vents.
Air flows from the rear console vents.
* Not available on all models
20
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 20
Features (P221)
Audio system (P222)
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob
(Home) Icon
(Back) Icon (Day/Night) Icon
Audio/Information Screen
For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 21
Audio Remote Controls (P226)
(+ / (- Bar Press to adjust the volume up/down.
/ / / /ENTER Buttons Press or to select Now Playing on the home screen of the driver information interface, and then press the ENTER button.
Press or to cycle through the audio mode as follows: Android Auto/Apple CarPlay/SiriusXM
*/ AUX Input/AM/Bluetooth Audio/Social Playlist/FM/My Honda Music/USB/iPod
ENTER Button
/ / / Buttons3 4
(+ / (- Bar
3 4
3 4
3 4
Radio: Press / to change the preset station.
USB device/My Honda Music/Bluetooth Audio:
Press / to skip to the beginning of the next song or return to the beginning of the current song.
* Not available on all models
22
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 22
Driving (P375)
Automatic Transmission (P403)
Select (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.
Park Press the (P button. Used when parking or before turning off or starting the engine. Transmission is locked.
Reverse Pull back the (R button. Used when reversing.
Neutral Press the (N button. Transmission is not locked.
Gear Position Indicator The gear position indicator and the shift button indicator indicate the current gear selection.
Gear Position Indicator
Shift Button Indicator
Gear selection
Intelligent Traction Management Button
Drive/S Position Each time you press the button, the mode switches between Drive and S position mode. Used for:
Normal driving (gears change between 1st and 9th automatically)
Temporarily driving in the sequential mode
Automatically changing gears between 1st and 8th (8th gear is used only at high speed)
Driving in the sequential mode
D/S
Drive
S Position
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 23
Paddle Shifters (P410) Paddle shifters allow you to shift gears much like a manual transmission (1st through 9th). This is useful for engine braking.
The transmission will shift back to automatic mode once the system detects that the vehicle is cruising.
Gear Position Indicator
Shift Down (- Paddle Shifter
Shift Up (+ Paddle Shifter
Sequential Mode Gear Selection Indicator
M (sequential mode) Indicator
When the transmission is in (D
Holds the selected gear, and the M (sequential mode) indicator comes on.
The sequential mode gear selection is shown in the instrument panel.
When the transmission is in (S
23
24
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 24
VSA On and Off (P421)
The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) system helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering and helps maintain traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces.
VSA comes on automatically every time you start the engine.
To partially disable or fully restore VSA function, press and hold the button until you hear a beep.
CMBSTM On and Off (P437)
When a possible frontal collision is likely unavoidable, the CMBSTM can help you to reduce the vehicle speed and the severity of the collision.
The CMBSTM is turned on every time you start the engine.
To turn the CMBSTM on or off, press and hold the button until you hear a beep.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire Fill Assist (P427, 570)
The TPMS monitors tire pressure. TPMS is turned on automatically every time you start the engine. TPMS fill assist provides audible and visual guidance during tire pressure adjustment.
Refueling (P493)
a Press the fuel fill door release button.
b After refueling, wait for about five seconds before removing the filler nozzle.
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
Fuel tank capacity: 19.5 US gal (73.8 L)
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 25
Honda Sensing(P431)
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
Honda Sensing is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors, a radar sensor located behind the emblem and a front sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.
The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.
Front Sensor Camera
Radar Sensor
The radar sensor is behind the emblem.
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) (P434)
The system can assist you when it determines there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of your vehicle. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when the potential for a collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (P446)
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (P459)
Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System (P468)
Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the roadway altogether.
25
26
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 26
Maintenance (P497)
Under the Hood (P507)
Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer fluid. Add when necessary.
Check brake fluid. Check the battery condition monthly.a Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the
dashboard.
b Locate the hood latch lever, pull it up, and then raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever.
c When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly locked in place.
Lights (P519)
Inspect all lights regularly.
Wiper Blades (P524)
Replace blades if they leave streaks across the windshield or become noisy.
Tires (P528)
Inspect tires and wheels regularly. Check tire pressures regularly. Install snow tires for winter
driving.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 27
Handling the Unexpected (P549)
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
Flat Tire (P551)
Park in a safe location and replace the flat tire with the compact spare tire located in the cargo area.
Indicators Come On (P567)
Identify the indicator and consult the owners manual.
Engine Wont Start (P559)
If the battery is dead, jump start using a booster battery.
Blown Fuse (P572)
Check for a blown fuse if an electrical device does not operate.
Overheating (P565)
Park in a safe location. If you do not see steam under the hood, open the hood, and let the engine cool down.
Emergency Towing (P577)
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
27
28
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 28
What to Do If
The power mode does not change from VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to ACCESSORY. Why?
The steering wheel may be locked. Move the steering wheel left and right
after pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Why does the brake pedal pulsate slightly when applying the brakes?
This can occur when the ABS activates and does not indicate a problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never pump the brake pedal. uAnti-lock Brake System (ABS) (P478)
The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. Why?
Check if the childproof lock is in the lock position. If so, open the rear door with the outside door handle. To cancel this function, slide the lever up to the unlock position.
Canadian models
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 29
Why do the doors lock after I unlocked the doors?
If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are relocked automatically for security.
Why does the beeper sound when I open the drivers door?
The beeper sounds when: The power mode is in ACCESSORY. The exterior lights are left on. The Auto Idle Stop is in operation.
Why does a beeper sound when I walk away from the vehicle after I close the door?
The beeper sounds if you move outside the walk away auto lock operating range before the door completely closes. uLocking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock)
(P132)
Why does the beeper sound when I start driving?
The beeper sounds when: Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts. The parking brake pedal is not fully released.
Why do I hear a screeching sound when I apply the brake pedal?
The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
29
30
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 30
Why does the gear position automatically change to (P when I open the drivers door to check for parking space lines when reversing?
Fasten the drivers seat belt. Close the drivers door and manually change the gear
position. uWhen opening the drivers door (P406)
I'm seeing an amber indicator of a tire with an exclamation point. What is that?
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) needs attention. Check tire pressure. u If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Indicator Comes On or Blinks (P570)
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 31
Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.
For Safe Driving Important Safety Precautions.............. 32 Important Handling Information......... 34 Your Vehicles Safety Features............ 35 Safety Checklist ................................. 36
Seat Belts About Your Seat Belts ........................ 37 Fastening a Seat Belt .......................... 42 Seat Belt Inspection............................ 46
Airbags Airbag System Components............... 47 Types of Airbags ................................ 50 Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 50 Side Airbags....................................... 55 Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 57 Airbag System Indicators.................... 58 Airbag Care ....................................... 61
Child Safety Protecting Child Passengers ............... 62 Safety of Infants and Small Children .. 64 Safety of Larger Children ................... 75
Exhaust Gas Hazard Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 77
Safety Labels Label Locations .................................. 78
31
32
Safe D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 32
For Safe Driving
1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the driver while driving.
The following pages explain your vehicles safety features and how to use them properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the most important.
Important Safety Precautions Always wear your seat belt A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly.
Restrain all children Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat.
Be aware of airbag hazards While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.
Dont drink and drive Alcohol and driving dont mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink. So dont drink and drive, and dont let your friends drink and drive, either.
uuFor Safe Drivingu Important Safety Precautions Safe D
rivin g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 33
Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash. Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to divert some attention away from driving.
Control your speed Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.
Keep your vehicle in safe condition Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle Children, pets, and people needing assistance left unattended in the vehicle may be injured if they activate one or more of the vehicle controls. They may also cause the vehicle to move, resulting in a crash in which they and/or another person(s) can be injured or killed. Also, depending on the ambient temperature, the temperature of the interior may reach extreme levels, which can result in harm or death. Even if the climate control system is on, never leave them in the vehicle unattended as the climate control system can shut off at any time.
33
34
uuFor Safe Drivingu Important Handling Information
Safe D rivin
g
1Important Handling Information
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read:
2 Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle P. 401
2 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 392 Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 34
Important Handling Information Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a higher center gravity making it more susceptible to tipping or rollover if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicles Safety Features Safe D
rivin g
1Your Vehicles Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to help protect you and your passengers during a crash.
Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a sufficient crash.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full advantage of these features unless you remain seated in the correct position and always wear your seat belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 35
Your Vehicles Safety Features
The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers.
Safety Cage Crush Zones Seats and Seat-Backs Head Restraints Collapsible Steering Column Seat Belts Front Airbags
Door Locks Seat Belt Tensioners
Side Curtain Airbags Side Airbags
35
36
uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist
Safe D rivin
g
1Safety Checklist
If the door and/or tailgate open message appears on the driver information interface, a door and/or the tailgate is not completely closed. Close all doors and the tailgate tightly until the message disappears.
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 96
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 36
Safety Checklist For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items each time before you drive. After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors and the tailgate are
closed and locked. Locking the doors and the tailgate helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the tailgate.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 137
Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 181
Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer Seat Head Restraint Positions P. 188
Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 42
Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a childs age, height, and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 62
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 37
Seat Belts
rivin g
1About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories require you to wear seat belts.
If you extend the seat belt too quickly, it will lock in place. If this happens, slightly retract the seat belt, then extend it slowly.
3WARNING Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly.
About Your Seat Belts Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including: - frontal impacts - side impacts - rear impacts - rollovers
Lap/shoulder seat belts All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency locking retractors. In normal driving, the retractor lets you move freely while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop, the retractor locks to restrain your body.
The front passengers and rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with child seats.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 70
37Continued
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
38
Safe D rivin
g
1About Your Seat Belts
If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely. Then, refasten the belt.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 38
Proper use of seat belts Follow these guidelines for proper use: All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.
Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts Safe D
rivin g
1Seat Belt Reminder
The indicator will also come on if a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after the power mode is set to ON.
When no one is sitting in the front passengers seat, the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not sound.
The indicator also may not come on and the beeper may not sound when the occupant is not heavy enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants (e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will injure or kill them.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 62
The driver information interface uses colors to aid the driver in checking the status of the passengers. For the front seating positions: Green indicates the seat belt is fastened. An unfastened gray graphic indicates the seat belt
is not fastened and an occupant has not been detected.
An unfastened red graphic indicates the seat belt is unfastened and an occupant has been detected.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 39
Front seats The seat belt system includes an indicator on the instrument panel to remind the driver or a front passenger or both to fasten their seat belts. If you set the power mode to ON and a seat belt is not fastened, a beeper will sound, and the indicator will blink. After a few seconds, the beeper will stop and the indicator will come on and remain illuminated until the seat belt is fastened. The beeper will periodically sound and the indicator will blink while the vehicle is moving until the seat belt is fastened.
Seat Belt Reminder
: Fastened
: Unfastened
Continued 39
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
40
Safe D rivin
g
1Seat Belt Reminder
The system will not detect a passenger in the rear seats who has not fastened the seat belt. The driver should check the status of the rear passengers' seat belts at the start of each trip and each time a passenger is seated in the rear seats, using the driver information interface as an aid. An alert will sound if a passenger in the rear seats unfastens the seat belt while the vehicle is in motion or if motion resumes while the graphic is red.
The driver information interface uses colors to aid the driver in checking the status of the passengers. For the rear seating positions: Green indicates the seat belt is fastened. An unfastened gray graphic indicates the seat belt
has not been fastened recently. An unfastened red graphic indicates the seat belt
was unfastened recently.
The system does not monitor harnesses that are part of a child seat, the anchors of the LATCH system, or the anchor buckle of the second row center seat belt. While the system can inform you that a seat belt buckle is fastened, it cannot determine whether the second row center seat belt anchor buckle is in use or if a child seat is properly installed or used.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 62
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 40
Rear seats Your vehicle monitors rear seat belt use. A driver information interface notifies you if any of the rear seat belts are unfastened after they were previously fastened.
In order to encourage the driver to evaluate rear seat belt usage, the display appears when: Any of the rear passengers' seat belts are
unfastened when the power mode is turned to ON.
A rear door is opened and then closed. Any of the rear passengers fastens or
unfastens their seat belt. The seat belt reminder indicator blinks and beeper sounds if any rear passengers seat belt is unfastened while driving.
To see the display: 2 Accessing Content P. 110
: Fastened
: Unfastened
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts Safe D
rivin g
1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The seat belt tensioners can only operate once. If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 41
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.
The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to-severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to inflate the front airbags.
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
41
42
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe D rivin
g
1Fastening a Seat Belt
No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt or one that does not appear to be working correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working properly may not protect the occupant in a crash. Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or retractor mechanism.
If the seat belt appears to be locked in a fully retracted position, firmly pull out on the shoulder belt once, then push it back in. Then, smoothly pull it out of the retractor and fasten. If you are unable to release the seat belt from a fully retracted position, do not allow anyone to sit in the seat, and take your vehicle to a dealer for repair.
2 About Your Seat Belts P. 37 2 Seat Belt Inspection P. 46
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 42
Fastening a Seat Belt After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well back in the seat:
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 181
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is secure. u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.
Pull out slowly.
Correct Seated Posture.
Latch Plate
Buckle
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt Safe D
rivin g
1Fastening a Seat Belt
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button and then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted completely. When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is properly stowed so that it will not get caught in the closing door.
3WARNING Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving.
1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height one level at a time.
After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder anchor position is secure.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 43
3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as possible across your hips, then pull up on the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to remove any slack, then check that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. This spreads the forces of a crash over the strongest bones in your upper body.
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter occupants.
1. Move the anchor up and down while holding the release button.
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder.
Lap belt as low as possible
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
Push Push
Continued 43
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
44
Safe D rivin
g
1Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor
To unlatch the detachable anchor, insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle.
3WARNING Using the seat belt with the detachable anchor unlatched increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash.
Before using the seat belt, make sure the detachable anchor is correctly latched.
Small Latch Plate
Latch Plate
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 44
1. Pull out the seat belts small latch plate and the latch plate from each holding slot in the ceiling.
2. Line up the triangle marks on the small latch plate and anchor buckle. Make sure the seat belt is not twisted. Attach the belt to the anchor buckle.
3. Insert the latch plate into the buckle. Properly fasten the seat belt the same way you fasten the lap/shoulder seat belt.
Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor
Small Latch Plate
Latch Plate
Small Latch Plate
Anchor Buckle
Latch Plate
Buckle
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt Safe D
rivin g
1Advice for Pregnant Women
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front airbag: When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle.
When sitting in the front passengers seat, adjust the seat as far back as possible.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 45
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.
Advice for Pregnant Women
Wear the shoulder belt across the chest avoiding the abdomen.
Wear the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.
45
46
uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
Safe D rivin
g
1Seat Belt Inspection
3WARNING Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 46
Seat Belt Inspection Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:
Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly, and the belts retract
easily. u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper protection and should be replaced as soon as possible. A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after any collision.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 47
Airbags
rivin g
Airbag System Components
47Continued
48
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 48
The front, side, and side curtain airbags are deployed according to the direction and severity of impact. Both side curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover. The airbag system includes:
aTwo SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags. The drivers airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passengers airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.
bTwo side airbags, one for the driver and one for a front passenger. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seat- backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
cTwo side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.
dAn electronic control unit that, when the power mode is in ON, continually monitors information about the various impact sensors, seat and buckle sensors, rollover sensor, airbag activators, seat belt tensioners and other vehicle information. During a crash event the unit can record such information.
eAutomatic front seat belt tensioners. In addition, the driver's and front passenger's seat belt buckles incorporate sensors that detect whether or not the belts are fastened.
fDriver's seat position sensor. This sensor detects the driver's seat slide position to help determine the optimal deployment of the driver's airbag.
gWeight sensors in the front passenger's seat. The sensors are used for occupant classification to activate or deactivate the front passenger's airbag.
h Impact sensors that can detect a moderate-to-severe front or side impact.
iAn indicator on the dashboard that alerts you that the front passengers front airbag has been turned off.
jAn indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
kSafing Sensor
lA rollover sensor that can detect if your vehicle is about to roll over and signal the control unit to deploy both side curtain airbags.
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components Safe D
rivin g
1Important Facts About Your Airbags
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the deployment path of the front airbag by holding each side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over the airbag cover.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 49
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises, and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible.
Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag. Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Important Facts About Your Airbags
49
50
uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags
Safe D rivin
g
1Types of Airbags
The airbags can inflate whenever the power mode is in ON.
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion process of the inflator material and is not harmful. People with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
1Front Airbags (SRS)
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate at different rates, depending on the severity of the crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/ or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to supplement the seat belts to help reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal crashes.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 50
Types of Airbags Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags: Front airbags: Airbags in front of the drivers and front passengers seats. Side airbags: Airbags in the drivers and front passengers seat-backs. Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows. Each is discussed in the following pages.
Front Airbags (SRS) The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupants primary restraint system.
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.
Housing Locations
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) Safe D
rivin g
1How the Front Airbags Work
Although the drivers and front passengers airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 51
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions. When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the front airbag provides supplemental protection for your head and chest. The front airbags deflate immediately so that they wont interfere with the drivers visibility or the ability to steer or operate other controls.
The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.
Operation
How the Front Airbags Work
Continued 51
52
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 52
When front airbags should not deploy Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash. Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration causes a driver or front passenger to move toward the front of the vehicle. Side airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which can cause the driver or passenger to move toward the side of the vehicle. Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed to deploy in such collisions. Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seat belt or, if your vehicle is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seat belt and a side curtain airbag. Front airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide little if any protection. When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy. Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent. When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed.
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) Safe D
rivin g
1Advanced Airbags
If there is a problem with the driver's seat position sensor or the passenger's seat weight sensors, the SRS indicator will come on, and in the event of a crash, the airbag will deploy (regardless of the driver's seating position or passenger's occupant classification) with a force corresponding to the severity of the impact.
2 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator P. 58
For the advanced front airbags to work properly, confirm that: The occupant is sitting in an upright position,
wearing the seat belt properly and the seat-back is not excessively reclined.
The occupant is not leaning against the door or center console.
The occupant's feet are placed on the floor in front of them.
There are no objects hanging from the front passenger's seat.
Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat-back pocket.
The steering wheel and passenger's side dashboard are not obstructed by any object.
No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat. There is no child seat or other object pressing
against the rear of the seat or seat-back. There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger's seat.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 53
The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related injuries to smaller occupants.
The drivers advanced airbag system includes a seat position sensor.
Based on information from this sensor and the severity of the impact, the advanced airbag system determines the optimal deployment of the driver's airbag.
Advanced Airbags
Drivers Seat Position Sensor
Continued 53
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
54
Safe D rivin
g
1Advanced Airbags
There are no objects placed under or beside the front passenger's seat. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
The head restraint is not contacting the roof. 2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 59
The floor mat behind the front passenger's seat is hooked to the floor mat anchor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
2 Floor Mats P. 543
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 54
The front passenger's advanced airbag system has weight sensors. The sensors are used for occupant classification to activate or deactivate the front passenger's airbag.
For adult size occupants, the system will automatically activate the front passenger's airbag. If a small adult sits in the front passenger seat and the system does not recognize him/her as an adult, see
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 59
We advise against allowing a child age 12 or under to ride in the front passenger's seat. However, if you do allow a small child or infant to ride in the front passenger's seat, the system is designed to automatically deactivate the front passenger's airbag. Do not let a small child or infant ride in the front passengers seat if the airbag does not automatically deactivate.
Passengers Seat Weight Sensors
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags Safe D
rivin g
1Side Airbags
Make sure you and your front seat passenger always sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can prevent the airbag from deploying properly and increases your risk of serious injury.
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags. They can interfere with the proper operation of the airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers without consulting a dealer. Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from properly deploying during a side impact.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 55
Side Airbags The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger during a moderate-to-severe side impact.
The side airbags are housed in the outside edge of the drivers and passengers seat- backs.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
When the sensors detect a moderate-to- severe side impact, the control unit signals the side airbag on the impact side to immediately inflate.
Housing Locations
Housing Location
Operation
When inflated
Side Airbag
55Continued
56
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 56
When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side of the vehicles framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough impact to deploy the airbag.
When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears severe
It is possible for a side airbag not to deploy during an impact that results in apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicles crushable body parts absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.
uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags Safe D
rivin g
1Side Curtain Airbags
To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags.
If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt tensioners.
If the impact is on the passenger's side, the passenger's side curtain airbag deploys even if there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 57
Side Curtain Airbags The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in the outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly rollover crashes.
The side curtain airbags are located in the ceiling above the side windows on both sides of the vehicle.
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side impact.
Housing Locations
Side Curtain Airbag Storage
Operation
Deployed Side Curtain Airbag
57Continued
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
58
Safe D rivin
g
1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
3WARNING Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 58
When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal collision.
Airbag System Indicators If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a message appears on the driver information interface.
When the power mode is set to ON The indicator comes on for a few seconds, then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly.
If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you dont, your airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators Safe D
rivin g
1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
To ensure the passenger is detected properly, confirm that: The occupant is sitting in an upright position,
wearing the seat belt properly and the seat-back is not excessively reclined.
The occupant is not leaning against the door or center console.
The occupant's feet are placed on the floor in front of them.
There are no objects hanging from the front passenger's seat.
Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat-back pocket.
No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat. There is no child seat or other object pressing
against the rear of the seat or seat-back. There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger's seat. There are no objects placed under or beside the
front passenger's seat. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
The floor mat behind the front passenger's seat is hooked to the floor mat anchor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
The head restraint is not contacting the roof.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 59
When the passenger airbag off indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the passenger's airbag has been turned off. This occurs when the weight sensors determine that a small child or infant is on the passenger seat.
Children age 12 or under should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2 Child Safety P. 62
Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on. If the indicator is on in the event of a crash, the passenger's airbag will not deploy.
If the front passenger's seat is empty, the passenger's airbag will not deploy and the indicator will not come on.
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
U.S. Canada
Continued 59
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
60
Safe D rivin
g
1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and go off periodically if the total weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold. For a small adult, depending on physique and posture, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult and thus deactivate the passenger's airbag. If this occurs, please confirm that the conditions set forth in the above bullet points on the previous page are met.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if: All of the above conditions are met, and the
indicator comes on with an adult seated in the front passenger seat.
The seat is empty and the indicator is on.
Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front seat when the indicator is on.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 60
uuAirbagsuAirbag Care Safe D
rivin g
1Airbag Care
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag system components, including the airbag, tensioners, sensors, and control unit.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 61
Airbag Care You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
When the airbags have deployed If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced. Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be replaced.
When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the drivers seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passengers seat, front seat belt tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.
Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the drivers seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the passengers seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 1-800- 999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda Canada Customer Relations at 1-888- 9-HONDA-9.
61
62
Safe D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 62
Child Safety
1Protecting Child Passengers
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws restricting where children may ride.
3WARNING Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
Protecting Child Passengers Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because: An inflating front airbag can injure or kill a
child sitting in the front seat.
A child in the front seat is more likely to interfere with the drivers ability to safely control the vehicle.
Statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when they are properly restrained in a rear seat.
uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers Safe D
rivin g
1Protecting Child Passengers
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
To remind you of the passengers front airbag hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 78
3WARNING Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or wrap one around their neck can result in serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat belt and make sure any unused seat belt a child can reach is buckled, fully retracted, and locked.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 63
Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the event of a collision.
Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very seriously injured in a crash.
Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the seat belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows, or seat adjustments.
Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
63
64
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe D rivin
g
1Protecting Infants
Experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a child so long as the childs height and weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.
Infants should never be seated in a forward-facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturers instructions before installation.
Do not allow a front seat to rest against a child seat installed in a rear seating position. The weight sensor in the front seat may not correctly detect the actual weight of the occupant.
3WARNING Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, not the front.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 64
Safety of Infants and Small Children
An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat until the infant reaches the seat manufacturers weight or height limit for the seat.
Positioning a rear-facing child seat Child seats must be placed and secured in a rear seating position.
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position. Make sure that there is no contact between the child seat and the seat in front of it.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passengers advanced front airbag system.
2 Airbags P. 47
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passengers seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.
Protecting Infants
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D
rivin g
1Protecting Smaller Children
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations regarding child seat use where you are driving, and follow the child seat manufacturers instructions.
3WARNING Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 65
If a child has exceeded the weight and height limitations of a rearward-facing child seat, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward-facing child seat until they exceed the weight and height limitations for the forward-facing child seat.
Forward-facing child seat placement We strongly recommend placing a forward- facing child seat in a rear seating position.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passengers front airbag off. A rear seat is the safest place for a child.
Protecting Smaller Children
Continued 65
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
66
Safe D rivin
g
1Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed to simplify the installation process and reduce the likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 66
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children). Some have a rigid-type connector while others have a flexible-type connector. Both are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat manufacturers use and care instructions including recommended expiration dates as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing your childs safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security. This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owners manual for proper installation instructions.
Important consideration when selecting a child seat Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements: The child seat is the correct type and size for the child. The child seat is the correct type for the seating position. The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
Selecting a Child Seat
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D
rivin g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 67
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in the rear seats. A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.
Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Marks
67Continued
68
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 68
2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then attach the child seat to the lower anchors according to the instructions that came with the child seat. u When installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not obstructed by the seat belt or any other object.Rigid Type
Lower Anchors
Flexible Type
Lower Anchors
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D
rivin g
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
For your childs safety, when using a child seat installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the child seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
3WARNING Never attach two child seats to the same anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 69
3. Slide the seat forward. 4. Put the outer head restraint to its
uppermost position, then route the tether strap between the head restraint legs, and secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
3. Slide the seat forward. 4. Put the center head restraint to its lowest
position, then route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint and secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
6. Slide the seat backward. 7. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt.
8. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 62
Tether Strap Hook
Anchor
Outer positions
Center position
All positions
Continued 69
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
70
Safe D rivin
g
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 70
A child seat can be installed with a lap/shoulder belt in any rear seat or, if absolutely necessary, the front passenger seat.
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
2. Slide the seat forward. 3. Put the outer head restraint to its
uppermost position, then route the tether strap between the head restraint legs, and secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
2. Slide the seat forward. 3. Put the center head restraint to its lowest
position, then route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint and secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
Outer positions
Center position
Tether Strap Hook
Anchor
All positions
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D
rivin g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 71
5. Slide the seat backward. 6. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat manufacturers instructions, and insert the latch plate into the buckle. u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.
7. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out until it stops. This activates the lockable retractor.
8. Let the seat belt retract a few inches and check that the retractor has switched modes by pulling on the webbing. It should not pull out again until it is reset by removing the latch plate from the buckle. u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not activated. Slowly pull the seat belt all the way out, and repeat steps 7-8.
71Continued
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
72
Safe D rivin
g
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 72
9. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt. u When doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle seat.
10. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; less than one inch of movement should occur near the seat belt.
11. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 62
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D
rivin g
1Adding Security with a Tether
Always use a tether for forward facing child seats whether using the seat belt or lower anchors.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 73
A tether anchor point is provided behind each rear seating position. If you have a child seat that comes with a tether but can be installed with a seat belt, the tether may be used for additional security.
Adding Security with a Tether
Tether Anchor Points
Continued 73
74
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 74
Using an outer anchor 1. Slide the seat forward. 2. Put the head restraint to it's upper-most
position, then route the tether strap through the head restraint legs. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
3. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor. 4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer. 5. Slide the seat backward, then confirm that
the tether strap is not loose.
Using the center anchor 1. Slide the seat forward. 2. Lower the head restraint to its lowest
position. 3. Route the tether strap over the head
restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted. 4. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor. 5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer. 6. Slide the seat backward, then confirm that
the tether strap is not loose.
Anchor
Tether Strap Hook
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children Safe D
rivin g
1Safety of Larger Children
3WARNING Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passengers front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly, using a booster seat if needed.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 75
Safety of Larger Children
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front.
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/ shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the following questions.
Checklist Do the childs knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat? Does the shoulder belt cross between the
childs neck and arm? Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the childs thighs? Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip? If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.
Protecting Larger Children
Checking Seat Belt Fit
75Continued
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
76
Safe D rivin
g
1Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the instructions that came with it, and install the seat accordingly. There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat belt correctly.
Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and territories require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or province, or territory where you intend to drive.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 76
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used properly, position the child in a booster seat in the rear seat. For the childs safety, check that the child meets the booster seat manufacturers recommendations.
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front: Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual. Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible. Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat. Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.
Monitoring child passengers We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up properly.
Booster Seats
Protecting Larger Children - Final Checks
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 77
Exhaust Gas Hazard
rivin g
1Carbon Monoxide Gas
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up with carbon monoxide gas. Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the garage immediately after starting the engine.
3WARNING Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide.
Carbon Monoxide Gas The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever The exhaust system is making an unusual noise. The exhaust system may have been damaged. The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the tailgate open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the tailgate open, open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the mode. 3. Set the fan speed to high. 4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.
77
78
Safe D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 78
Safety Labels
Label Locations These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer for a replacement.
Sun Visor U.S. models
Canadian models
Radiator Cap
U.S. models
U.S. models only Dashboard
Canadian models
Air Conditioner System
Sun Visor
U.S. models only
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 79
Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.
Indicators ............................................ 80 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages...................... 96
Gauges and Displays Gauges............................................ 107 Driver Information Interface ............. 108
79
80
In stru
m en
t Pan el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 80
Indicators
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off if the parking brake has been released.
Comes on when the parking brake is applied, and goes off when it is released.
Comes on when the brake fluid level is low.
Comes on if there is a problem with the brake system.
The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if you drive with the parking brake not fully released.
Comes on while driving - Make sure the parking brake is released. Check the brake fluid level.
2 What to do when the indicator comes on while driving P. 569
Comes on along with the ABS indicator - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On P. 569
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber)
Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with a system related to braking other than the conventional brake system.
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability.
U.S.
Canada
(Red)
U.S.
Canada
(Amber)
U.S.
Canada
uuIndicatorsu In
stru m
en t Pan
el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 81
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Comes on when you set the power mode to ON, and goes off when the engine starts, or after several seconds if the engine did not start. If readiness codes have not been set, it blinks five times before it goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the emissions control system.
Blinks when a misfire in the engines cylinders is detected.
Readiness codes are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions control systems.
2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 587 Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer. Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe
place where there are no flammable objects. Stop the engine for 10 minutes or more, and wait for it to cool down. Then, take your vehicle to a dealer.
2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks P. 568
Charging System Indicator
Comes on when you set the power mode to ON, and goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on when the battery is not charging.
Comes on while driving - Turn off the climate control system and rear defogger in order to reduce electricity consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On P. 568
Gear Position Indicator
Indicates the current gear selection. 2 Shifting P. 403
M (sequential mode) Indicator/ Sequential Mode Gear Selection Indicator
Comes on when the manual sequential shift mode is applied.
2 Sequential Mode P. 409
81Continued
82
uu Indicatorsu
In stru
m en
t Pan el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 82
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Transmission System Indicator
The indicated current gear selection blinks if there is a problem with the transmission system.
Avoid sudden starts and acceleration, and stop in a safe place immediately. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
All the gear positions may light for several seconds, and go off.
When all the gear positions light, immediately stop your vehicle in a safe place.
Indicators go off if there is no problem. However, even if they go off, take your vehicle to a dealer for inspection.
The indicated current gear selection or all the gear positions blink if there is a problem with the transmission system, and the vehicle no longer moves.
Immediately stop in a safe place. 2 Emergency Towing P. 577
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
The indicated current gear selection or all the gear positions blink if you cannot select (P due to the transmission system failure.
The engine can be activated as a temporary measure.
2 If the Transmission Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message P. 571
Set the parking brake when parking. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
uuIndicatorsu In
stru m
en t Pan
el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 83
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Seat Belt Reminder Indicator
Blinks and the beeper sounds for a few seconds if you are not wearing a seat belt when you set the power mode to ON, then the indicator comes on.
If the front passenger is not wearing a seat belt, the indicator comes on a few seconds later.
Comes on for a while when the rear seat belt is unfastened while the power mode in ON.
Blinks while driving if you and/or any passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at regular intervals.
The beeper stops and the indicator goes off when you and the passengers fasten their seat belts.
Stays on after you and/or the passengers have fastened the seat belt(s) - A detection error may have occurred in the sensor. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 39
Low Fuel Indicator
Comes on when the fuel reserve is running low (approximately 2.5 U.S. gal./9.5 Liter left).
Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel gauge.
Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon as possible.
Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off.
If it comes on at any other time, there is a problem with the ABS.
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability but no anti-lock function.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 478
83Continued
84
uu Indicatorsu
In stru
m en
t Pan el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 84
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Supplemental Restraint System Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off.
Comes on if a problem with any of the following is detected: - Supplemental restraint system - Side airbag system - Side curtain airbag system - Seat belt tensioner
Stays on constantly or does not come on at all - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Auto High-Beam Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off.
Comes on when all the operating conditions of the Auto high-beam are met.
2 Auto High-Beam P. 167
Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) System Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off.
Blinks when VSA, or trailer stability assist is active.
Comes on if there is a problem with the VSA, hill start assist, trailer stability assist or brake lighting system.
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System P. 420
2 Trailer Stability Assist P. 389 2 Hill start assist system P. 400
When Trailer Stability Assist Problem is displayed on the Driver Information Interface, the VSA does not activate.
uuIndicatorsu In
stru m
en t Pan
el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 85
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) OFF Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off.
Comes on when VSA OFF switch is pressed.
Appears when Normal or Snow mode is selected.
2 VSA On and Off P. 421
Comes on when Mud/Sand mode is selected by pressing Intelligent Traction Management System switch.
Appears when Mud mode is selected. 2 Intelligent Traction Management
P. 418
Appears when Sand mode is selected. 2 Intelligent Traction Management
P. 418
Comes on when VSA OFF switch is pressed.
Appears when Mud or Sand mode is selected.
2 VSA On and Off P. 421
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator
Comes on when you set the power mode to ON, and goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS system.
Stays on constantly or does not come on at all - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On P. 569
AWD models
AWD models
85Continued
86
uu Indicatorsu
In stru
m en
t Pan el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 86
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off.
Comes on if the tire pressure of any of the tires becomes significantly low.
Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe place, check tire pressures, and inflate the tire(s) if necessary.
Blinks for about one minute, and then stays on if there is a problem with the TPMS with Tire Fill Assist, or when a compact spare tire is temporarily installed.
Blinks and remains on - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is fitted with a compact spare, get your regular tire repaired or replaced and put back on your vehicle as soon as you can.
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators
Blinks when you operate the turn signal lever.
Blink along with all turn signals when you press the hazard warning button.
Does not blink or blinks rapidly 2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 521, 522
High Beam Indicator
Comes on when the high beam headlights are on.
Lights On Indicator
Comes on whenever the light switch is on, or in AUTO when the exterior lights are on.
If you set the power mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF while the exterior lights are on, a chime sounds when the drivers door is opened.
uuIndicatorsu In
stru m
en t Pan
el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 87
*1:Canadian models only: Apply and hold the brake pedal before selecting the ON mode.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Fog Light Indicator*
Comes on when the fog lights are on.
Immobilizer System Indicator
Comes on briefly when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off.
Blinks if the immobilizer system cannot recognize the key information.
Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF*1, then select the ON mode again.
Repeatedly blinks - The system may be malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems can occur.
Security System Alarm Indicator
Comes on briefly when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off.
Blinks when the security system alarm has been set.
2 Security System Alarm P. 151
Indicator
Indicator
87Continued* Not available on all models
88
uu Indicatorsu
In stru
m en
t Pan el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 88
*1:AWD models
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
System Message Indicator
Comes on along with a beep when a problem is detected. A system message on the driver information interface appears at the same time.
While the indicator is on, press the (home) button, select Warnings, then press the ENTER button to see the message again.
Refer to the Indicators information in this chapter when a system message appears on the driver information interface. Take the appropriate action for the message.
The driver information interface does not return to the normal screen unless the warning is canceled, or the ENTER button is pressed repeatedly.
Econ Mode Indicator
Comes on when the Econ mode is on. 2 ECON Mode P. 417
Intelligent Traction Management Indicator
Comes on when pressing the Intelligent Traction Management button.
2 Intelligent Traction Management P. 418*1
*1
2WD models
AWD models
uuIndicatorsu In
stru m
en t Pan
el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 89
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Auto Idle Stop Indicator (Green)
Comes on when Auto Idle Stop is in operation. The engine automatically shuts off.
2 Auto Idle Stop P. 411
Auto Idle Stop OFF Indicator
Comes on when the Auto Idle Stop system has been turned off by the Auto Idle Stop system OFF button.
2 Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF P. 412
Auto Idle Stop System Indicator (Amber)
Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off.
Blinks if there is a problem with the Auto Idle Stop system.
Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Auto Idle Stop Suspend Indicator
Comes on while Auto Idle Stop is temporarily suspended in the following situations.
- Brake pedal is not fully pressed. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
89Continued
90
uu Indicatorsu
In stru
m en
t Pan el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 90
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Auto Idle Stop Suspend Indicator
- The transmission is in a position other than (D.
2 Auto Idle Stop P. 411
- System charging is prioritized.
- Climate control system is prioritized.
- Engine coolant temperature is not in operating range.
- The Intelligent Traction Management is set to Snow, Mud*, or Sand*.
- The battery temperature is too low.
- Auto Idle Stop does not activate for some reason.
If you press and hold the Auto Idle Stop
OFF button, you can select whether to display the status messages or not.
* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu In
stru m
en t Pan
el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 91
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
All-wheel drive (AWD) Indicator*
Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the AWD system.
Blinks when the differential temperature is too high.
Stays on constantly - The engine drives the front wheels only in this state. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe place, change to (P, and idle the engine until the indicator goes off. If the indicator does not stop blinking, take your vehicle to a dealer.
2 Intelligent Variable Torque Management (i-VTM4TM) AWD System* P. 426
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Amber)
Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the LKAS.
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Green)
Comes on when you press the MAIN button. 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
P. 459
91Continued* Not available on all models
92
uu Indicatorsu
In stru
m en
t Pan el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 92
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you change the power mode to ON, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the RDM system.
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Comes on when the RDM system shuts itself off.
Stays on - The temperature inside the camera is too high. Use the climate control system to cool down the camera. The system activates when the temperature inside the camera cools down.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 473
Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the indicator and message come back on after you cleaned the area around the camera.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 473
uuIndicatorsu In
stru m
en t Pan
el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 93
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (Amber)
Comes on for a few seconds when you set the power mode to ON, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with ACC.
Comes on while driving - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (Green)
Comes on when you press the MAIN button. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
P. 446
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you change the power mode to ON, then goes off.
Comes on when you deactivate the CMBSTM. A driver information interface message appears for five seconds.
Comes on if there is a problem with the CMBSTM.
Stays on constantly without the CMBSTM off - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 434
93Continued
94
uu Indicatorsu
In stru
m en
t Pan el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 94
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Indicator
Comes on when the CMBSTM shuts itself off.
Stays on - The temperature inside the camera is too high. Use the climate control system to cool down the camera. The system activates when the temperature inside the camera cools down.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 473
Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 473 Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if
the indicator does not go off even after you cleaned the camera.
When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt using a soft cloth. Indicator may take some time to go off after the radar sensor is cleaned.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the indicator does not go off even after you clean the sensor cover.
2 Radar Sensor P. 475
uuIndicatorsu In
stru m
en t Pan
el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 95
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Blind spot information System Indicator
Stays on while blind spot information system is turned off.
Comes on when mud, snow, or ice accumulates in the vicinity of sensor.
Comes on while driving - Remove the obstacle in the vicinity of the sensor.
2 Blind spot information System* P. 423
Comes on if there is a problem with the system.
Comes on while driving - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Models with Blind spot information System
95* Not available on all models
96
uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
In stru
m en
t Pan el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 96
Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages The following messages appear only on the driver information interface. Press the (home) button, select Warnings, then press the
Message Condition Explanation
Appears if any door or the tailgate is not completely closed.
Goes off when all doors and the tailgate are closed.
Appears when the hood is opened. Close the hood.
Appears when the engine oil pressure is low. Appears while driving - Immediately stop in a safe place.
2 If the Engine Oil Low Warning Appears P. 567
Appears when the washer fluid is low*. Refill the washer fluid. 2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 518
Appears when the temperature of the transmission is starting to get too hot.
The performance of the vehicle may be reduced.
Until the message disappears, reduce your speed and allow the system to cool down.
Appears if the battery charge becomes low. Charge the battery.
* Not available on all models
uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages In
stru m
en t Pan
el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 97
Message Condition Explanation
Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on the battery.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 2 Checking the Battery P. 537
Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due soon.
Consequently, Maintenance Due Now and Maintenance Past Due follow.
2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver Information Interface P. 503
Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets abnormally high. 2 Overheating P. 565
Appears when there is a problem with the power tailgate system.
Manually open or close the power tailgate. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Appears when the starter system has a problem. As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for up to 15 seconds while pressing the brake pedal and manually start the engine.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
U.S.
Canada
Models with power tailgate
U.S.
Canada
97Continued
98
uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
In stru
m en
t Pan el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 98
Message Condition Explanation
Appears when the steering wheel is locked. Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.
Appears after the drivers door is opened when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.
Change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. 2 ENGINE START/STOP Button P. 158
Appears when you close the door with the power mode in ON without the remote inside the vehicle.
Disappears when you bring the remote back inside the vehicle and close the door.
2 Keyless Remote Reminder P. 160
Appears when the remote battery becomes weak. Replace the battery as soon as possible. 2 Replacing the Remote Battery P. 539
Appears if the remote battery is too weak to start the engine or the key is not within operating range to start the engine. A beeper sounds six times.
Bring the remote in front of the ENGINE START/STOP button to be touched with.
2 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak P. 560
Appears three seconds after the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button, then To Start Engine messages appeared sequentially.
Unless you bring the keyless remote in front of the ENGINE START/STOP button, this message does not appear.
2 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak P. 560
Canada
uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages In
stru m
en t Pan
el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 99
Message Condition Explanation
Appears if there is a problem with the cooling system.
Drive slowly to prevent overheating and have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
Appears if there is a problem with the headlights. Appears while driving - The headlights may not be on. When conditions allow you to drive safety, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
Appears if there is a problem with the parking sensor system.
Check if the area around the sensor(s) is covered with mud, ice, snow, etc. If the indicator(s) stays on or the beeper does not stop even after you clean the area, have the system checked by a dealer.
Appears if there are obstacles around the sensors. Check for obstacles near your vehicle to make sure it is
safe to park.
Appears as soon as a problem is detected in the keyless access system.
Appears constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Appears as soon as a problem is detected in the push button starting system.
Appears constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Appears if you press the ENGINE START/STOP button while the vehicle is moving. 2 Emergency Engine Stop P. 561
Models with parking sensor system
Models with parking sensor system
99Continued
100
uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
In stru
m en
t Pan el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 100
Message Condition Explanation
Appears if there is a problem with the Auto high- beam.
Manually operate the headlight switch. If you are driving with the high-beam headlights when
this happens, the headlights are changed to low beams.
Appears when the area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
May appear when driving in bad weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.)
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message comes back on after you cleaned the area around the camera.
Flashes when the system senses a likely collision with a vehicle in front of you.
Take the appropriate means to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.)
2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 434
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 446
Appears when ACC has been automatically canceled.
You can resume the set speed after the condition that caused ACC to cancel improves. Press the RES/+ button.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 446
Appears when pressing the /SET button while the vehicle is moving, and the brake pedal is depressed.
ACC cannot be set. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 446
Appears if the VSA or traction control function operates while ACC is in operation.
ACC has been automatically canceled. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 446
uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages In
stru m
en t Pan
el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 101
Message Condition Explanation
Appears when the speed of the vehicle is too high for you to set ACC.
Reduce the speed, then set ACC. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 446
Appears when ACC is canceled due to excessive vehicle speed.
Reduce the speed, then reset ACC. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 446
Appears when the speed of the vehicle is too low for you to set ACC.
Raise the speed, then set ACC. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 446
Appears when ACC is canceled due to excessive low vehicle speed.
Raise the speed, then reset ACC. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 446
101Continued
102
uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
In stru
m en
t Pan el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 102
Message Condition Explanation
Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected lane. The steering wheel vibrates rapidly.
Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving. 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 459
Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected lane.
- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.
- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the vehicle is drifting out of a detected line. The system also steers the vehicle to help you remain within your driving lane.
Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving. 2 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System P. 468
You can change the setting for the road departure mitigation system. Normal, Wide, and Warning Only can be selected.
2 Customized Features P. 327
Blinks when you fail to steer the vehicle. The beeper sounds simultaneously.
Operate the steering wheel to resume the LKAS.
Appears when the LKAS is in operation, or the LKAS button is pressed, but there is a problem with a system related to the LKAS. The LKAS cancels automatically. The beeper sounds simultaneously if selected by customization.
If any other system indicators come on, such as the VSA, ABS and brake system, take appropriate action.
2 Indicators P. 80
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
When you selected Warning Only
When you selected Normal or Wide
uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages In
stru m
en t Pan
el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 103
Message Condition Explanation
Appears if the temperature inside the camera is too high and some driver assist systems cannot be activated.
Use the climate control system to cool down the camera.
Disappears - The camera has been cooled down and the systems are activated normally.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 473
Appears if the area around the front sensor camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. and be prevented from detecting a vehicle in front.
May appear when driving in bad weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.)
When the front window gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message does not disappear even after you cleaned the area around the camera.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 473
Appears if anything covers the radar sensor cover and prevents the sensor from detecting a vehicle in front.
May appear when driving in bad weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.)
When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt using a soft cloth. The message may take some time to go off.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message does not disappear even after you clean the sensor cover.
2 Radar Sensor P. 475
Appears when the transmission system temperature is too high. The vehicle does not operate properly.
Stop in a safe place in (P . Let the engine idle until the message disappears.
103Continued
104
uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
In stru
m en
t Pan el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 104
Message Condition Explanation
Appears when you set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON.
2 Starting the Engine P. 394
Appears when the engine does not restart automatically due to the following reason:
The hood is open. There is a problem in the system that disables Auto
Idle Stop.
Follow the normal procedure to start the engine. 2 Starting the Engine P. 394
Appears when you attempt to change to another gear position with the transmission in (P and the engine OFF.
To select another gear position while in (P , the engine must be ON.
Appears when you set the power mode to OFF while driving.
Immediately stop in a safe place, set the parking brake, then restart the engine. If the message disappears, continue driving.
Appears when you try to change the gear position after the position has automatically been changed to (P with the drivers door open and the drivers seat belt unfastened.
Press the park button if you leave the vehicle.
uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages In
stru m
en t Pan
el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 105
Message Condition Explanation
Appears if the vehicle is stationary and the transmission is put into (N, the driver's seatbelt is unfastened, and the brake pedal is released, as there is a risk that the vehicle might roll unexpectedly.
Press the (P button before releasing the brake pedal when idling, parking or exiting the vehicle.
2 Shift Operation P. 405
Appears when the engine stops without the transmission in (P , and does not restart automatically.
Appears if you open the hood while Auto Idle Stop activates.
If you want to set the power mode to ON, change the gear position to (P.
If you want to start the engine, follow the normal procedure.
2 Starting the Engine P. 394
Appears when you change to (N , then release the (N button.
2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode] P. 407
Appears when you press and hold (N button for more than two seconds.
Disappears when you set the gear position to other than (N.
2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode] P. 407
Appears when car wash mode is not available due to hot transmission.
When transmission is too hot, car wash mode may not be available. Let the engine idle and cool down transmission.
2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode] P. 407
Appears when you try to change the gear position without depressing the brake pedal.
Depress the brake pedal, then select a shift button.
105Continued
106
uu IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
In stru
m en
t Pan el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 106
Message Condition Explanation
Appears when you try to change the gear position without releasing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Release your foot off the accelerator pedal, then select a shift button.
Appears when the (P button is pressed while the vehicle is moving.
Appears if you change the gear position to (R while the vehicle is moving forward, or to (D while the vehicle is reversing.
Make sure that the vehicle comes to a stop before operating the select button.
Appears when you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF, if the rear doors were opened shortly before or after the vehicle was powered on.
Check the rear seat for passengers or items before exiting the vehicle.
2 Rear Seat Reminder P. 187
Appears when you press the (P button but it is not engaged due to low ATF temperature.
Depress the brake pedal until this message disappear.
Appears when depressing the accelerator pedal while the gear position is in (N .
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. When driving, depress the brake pedal and change the gear position.
Appears when you unlock and open the drivers door while the engine is running by remote engine start.
2 Remote Engine Start* P. 396
* Not available on all models
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 107
Gauges and Displays
stru m
en t Pan
el
1Fuel Gauge
NOTICE You should refuel when the reading approaches . Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from the fuel gauge reading.
E
1Temperature Gauge
NOTICE Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull safely to the side of the road and allow engine temperature to return to normal.
2 Overheating P. 565
Gauges Gauges include the fuel gauge, temperature gauge, and related indicators. They are displayed when the power mode is set to ON.
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.
Fuel Gauge
Temperature Gauge
107
108
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
In stru
m en
t Pan el
1Speedometer
You can set the speedometer and the displayed measurements to read in either mph or km/h.
2 Units P. 117
1Tachometer
You can turn on or off the tachometer display. 2 Show Tachometer P. 121
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 108
Driver Information Interface The driver information interface displays the speedometer, tachometer, odometer, trip computer, outside temperature, and other gauges. It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information.
Displays your driving speed in mph or km/h.
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.
Speedometer
Tachometer
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface In
stru m
en t Pan
el
1Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 109
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
Adjusting the outside temperature display Adjust the temperature reading by up to 5F or 3C if the temperature reading seems incorrect. Use the audio/information screen to correct the temperature.
2 Customized Features P. 327
Odometer
Odometer
Outside Temperature
Outside Temperature
Continued 109
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
110
In stru
m en
t Pan el
1Accessing Content
To go back to the previous screen, press the (back) button.
You can edit, add, or delete the meter contents using the driver information interface.
2 Arrange Apps P. 120 2 Show/Hide Apps P. 119
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 110
Press the (home) button, then press the / button to scroll to the content you want to see. Press the ENTER button to see detailed information.
Accessing Content 3 4
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface In
stru m
en t Pan
el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 111
(Home) Button
/ Button3 4
Press or .3 4
P. 114
P. 119
P. 112
P. 116
P. 114
P. 117
P. 120
P. 115
P. 117
P. 118
P. 116
*
P. 118
111Continued* Not available on all models
112
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
In stru
m en
t Pan el
Distance
Range
Average Fuel Economy
Instant Fuel Economy
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 112
Press the ENTER button to switch between trip computer A and trip computer B.
Trip Computer
ENTER Button
ENTER
Trip Computer A
Trip Computer B
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface In
stru m
en t Pan
el
1Distance
Switch between Distance A and Distance B by pressing the ENTER button.
1Average fuel economy (Avg. Fuel)
You can change when the average fuel economy is reset.
2 Customized Features P. 327
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 113
Distance Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
Resetting distance To reset the Distance, display it and then press and hold the ENTER button until the Distance is reset to 0.0.
Average fuel economy (Avg. Fuel) Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each Distance in mpg or l/100 km. The display is updated at set intervals. When a Distance is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset.
Instant fuel economy Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.
Range Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This estimated distance is based on the vehicles current fuel economy.
Continued 113
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
114
In stru
m en
t Pan el
1Navigation
Turn-by-turn directions will be shown on the driver information interface only when your android phone is connected to Android AutoTM.
You can select whether to have the turn-by-turn display come on or not during the route guidance.
2 Customized Features P. 327
1Warnings
The Warnings app is dynamic and will only appear when there are active warnings. If there are no Warnings, this app will not be shown.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 114
Display Audio shows you turn-by-turn directions to your destination.
When the navigation system is not providing driving guidance, an image of a compass appears in the driver information interface.
2 Refer to the navigation system
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 96
Navigation
Compass
Turn-By-Turn Driving Directions
Models with navigation system
Warnings
(Example)
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface In
stru m
en t Pan
el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 115
Shows the current condition of the tire pressure and the remaining oil life.
Tire Pressure Shows the tire pressure of each tire.
2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire Fill Assist P. 427
Oil Life Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 501
Maintenance
115Continued
116
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
In stru
m en
t Pan el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 116
The indicators on the display show the amount of torque being transferred to the right front, left front, right rear, and left rear wheels.
2 Intelligent Variable Torque Management (i-VTM4TM) AWD System* P. 426
Shows the current phone information. 2 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 349
AWD Torque*
Phone
* Not available on all models
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface In
stru m
en t Pan
el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 117
Enables you to set the speedometer and the displayed measurements to read in either mph or km/h.
Press and hold the ENTER button. Each time you do this, the unit will change from mph to km/h or vice versa. After this, a confirmation screen will appear for a few seconds.
Shows the current audio information. 2 Audio System Basic Operation P. 228
Units
Now Playing
117Continued
118
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
In stru
m en
t Pan el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 118
Shows the current audio source. 2 Audio System Basic Operation P. 228
Appears when any of the seat belts are latched or unlatched.
Audio Source
(Example)
Seat Belts
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface In
stru m
en t Pan
el
1Show/Hide Apps
You cannot hide apps with the icon on the right side.
You can also add the Android Auto, Apple CarPlay, Sirius XM*, My Honda Music, USB, AM, FM, Bluetooth Audio, Social Playlist and AUX Input apps.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 119
You can show or hide the meter contents. Select the content you wish to show or hide, then press the ENTER button. u Repeat it if you want to show or hide
more than one app.
Show/Hide Apps
Shown
Press ENTER
Hidden
Continued 119* Not available on all models
120
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface
In stru
m en
t Pan el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 120
Change the settings to your liking.
Arrange Apps You can change the order of the apps on the home screen.
1. Press the / button to select Arrange Apps, then press the ENTER button.
2. Press the / button to select the icon you want to move, then press the ENTER button.
3. Press the / button repeatedly to move the icon to your desired position, then press the ENTER button.
Settings
3 4
3 4
3 4
uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface In
stru m
en t Pan
el
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 121
Show Tachometer You can show or hide the tachometer.
Press the / button to select Show Tachometer, then press the ENTER button. u The tachometer appears when the check
box is checked.
3 4
121
122
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 122
t blank.
* Not available on all m
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 123
Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.
Clock .................................................. 124 Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions .................. 126 Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength .... 128 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside .......................................... 129
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ............................................. 137
Childproof Door Locks ..................... 139 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 140
Opening and Closing the Tailgate... 141 Security System ................................ 151 Opening and Closing the Windows..... 154
odels
Moonroof* ........................................ 157 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel ENGINE START/STOP Button............. 158 Turn Signals ..................................... 161 Light Switches.................................. 162 Fog Lights* ...................................... 165 Daytime Running Lights ................... 166 Auto High-Beam.............................. 167 Wipers and Washers ........................ 170 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button ........................................... 173
Brightness Control ........................... 175 Driving Position Memory System* .... 176
Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 178 Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 179 Power Door Mirrors ......................... 180
Adjusting the Seats Front Seats ...................................... 181 Rear Seats........................................ 185 Armrest ........................................... 191
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items Interior Lights .................................. 192 Interior Convenience Items .............. 195
Climate Control System ................... 213
123
124
C o
n tro
ls
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 124
Clock
1Clock
The clock is automatically updated through the navigation system, so the time does not need to be adjusted.
Models with navigation system
1Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen
You can also adjust the clock by touching the clock displayed on the upper right corner of the display or the Clock icon on the home screen. 1. Touch the clock on the display.
The clock screen of the select face-type appears. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Date & Time Settings. 4. Select Set Date & Time. 5. Select Automatic Date & Time, then select OFF. 6. Select Set Date or Set Time. 7. Adjusting the dates, hours and minutes by
selecting / . 8. Select Save to set the time.
You can customize the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Customized Features P. 327
3 4
Adjusting the Clock
You can adjust the time manually in the audio/information screen, with the power mode in ON.
Using the Settings menu on the audio/ information screen
1. Select , then select Settings. 2. Select System. 3. Select Date & Time. 4. Select Set Date & Time. 5. Select Automatic Date & Time, then
select OFF.
To adjust time: 6. Select Set Time. 7. Selecting / . u AM/PM icon can be switched to each
other either by selecting / , or by directly touching the icon.
u When you customize the clock display to 24 hour clock, AM/PM icon is not displayed.
2 Customized Features P. 327
8. Select Save to set the time.
Adjusting the Time
Models without navigation system
3 4
3 4
uuClockuAdjusting the Clock C
o n
tro ls
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 125
To adjust date: 6. Select Set Date. 7. Selecting / . 8. Select Save to set the date.
3 4
125
126
C o
n tro
ls
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 126
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
1Key Types and Functions
All the keys have an immobilizer system. The immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 151
Follow the advice below to prevent damage to the keys: Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity. Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them. Keep the keys away from liquids, dust and sand. Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine may not start, and the remote transmitter may not work. If the keys do not work properly, have them inspected by a dealer.
You can remotely start the engine using the keyless remote.
2 Remote Engine Start* P. 396
Models with remote engine start
Key Types and Functions This vehicle comes with the following keys:
Use the keys to start and stop the engine, and to lock and unlock all the doors and tailgate.
The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the doors when the keyless remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/ unlock operation is disabled.
To remove the built-in key, slide the release knob and then pull out the key. To reinstall the built-in key, push the built-in key into the keyless remote until it clicks.
Keyless Remote
Built-in Key
Release Knob
Built-in Key
* Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions C
o n
tro ls
1Key Number Tag
Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a safe place outside of your vehicle. If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine, contact a dealer.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 127
Contains a number that you will need if you purchase a replacement key.
Key Number Tag
127
128
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Keyless Remote Signal Strength
C o
n tro
ls
1Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength
Communication between the keyless remote and the vehicle consumes the keyless remotes battery. Battery life is about two years, but this varies depending on regularity of use. The battery is consumed whenever the keyless remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing it near electrical appliances such as televisions and personal computers.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 128
Low Keyless Remote Signal Strength The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the keyless remote when locking/ unlocking the doors and tailgate, or to start the engine.
In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors and tailgate, or starting the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable: Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment. You are carrying the keyless remote together with telecommunications
equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices. A metallic object is touching or covering the keyless remote.
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside C
o n
tro ls
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
If the interior light switch is in the door activated position, the interior lights come on when you unlock the doors and tailgate. No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30 seconds. Doors and tailgate relocked: The lights go off immediately.
2 Interior Lights P. 192
1Using the Keyless Access System
If you do not open a door or the tailgate within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the keyless access system, the doors and tailgate will automatically relock.
You can lock or unlock doors using the keyless access system only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 129
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
When you carry the keyless remote, you can lock/unlock the doors and the tailgate.
You can lock/unlock the doors and the tailgate within a radius of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door handle or tailgate outer handle.
Using the Keyless Access System
129Continued
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
130
C o
n tro
ls
1Using the Keyless Access System
Do not leave the keyless remote in the vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you.
Even if you are not carrying the keyless remote, you can lock/unlock the doors and tailgate while someone else with the remote is within range.
The door may be unlocked if the door handle is covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if the keyless remote is within range.
If you grip a door handle wearing gloves, the door sensor may be slow to respond or may not respond by unlocking the doors.
After locking the door, you have up to 2 seconds during which you can pull the door handle to confirm whether the door is locked. If you need to unlock the door immediately after locking it, wait at least 2 seconds before gripping the handle, otherwise the door will not unlock.
The door might not open if you pull it immediately after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle again and confirm that the door is unlocked before pulling the handle.
Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the keyless remote if it is above or below the outside handle.
The keyless remote may not operate if it is too close to the door and door glass.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 130
Locking the doors and tailgate Press the door lock button on a front door or the tailgate. u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all the doors and tailgate lock; and the security system sets.
Door Lock Button
Door Lock Button
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside C
o n
tro ls
1Using the Keyless Access System
The light flash, beeper, and unlock settings can be customized using the audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 327
You can also unlock and open with the power tailgate*.
2 Using the Tailgate Outer Handle P. 146
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 131
Unlocking the doors and tailgate Grab the drivers door handle: u The drivers door unlocks. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice. Grab the front passengers door handle: u All doors and the tailgate unlock. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Press the tailgate outer handle: u The tailgate unlocks and opens. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice. 2 Using the Tailgate Outer Handle P. 146
Outer Handle
Continued 131* Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
132
C o
n tro
ls
1Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock)
The auto lock function is set to OFF as the factory default setting. The auto lock function can be set to ON using the audio/information screen. Turning ON auto lock function using the audio/ information screen, shall only activate the function in remote transmitter that was used to unlock the driver's door.
2 Customized Features P. 327
After the auto lock function has been activated, when you stay within the locking/unlocking operation range, the indicator on the keyless remote will continue to flash until the doors are locked.
When you stay beside the vehicle within the operation range, the doors will automatically lock approximately 30 seconds after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds.
When you open a door after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds, the auto lock function will be delayed until all doors and tailgate are closed.
Under the following circumstances, the auto-lock function will not activate: The remote is inside the vehicle. uThe buzzer will not sound. The remote is taken out of its operational range
before all the doors are closed. uThe buzzer will sound.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 132
Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock) When you walk away from the vehicle with all doors and tailgate closed while carrying the keyless remote, the doors will automatically lock. The auto lock function activates when all doors and tailgate are closed, and the keyless remote is within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of the outside door handle or tailgate outer handle. Exit vehicle while carrying keyless remote and close door(s) and tailgate. 1. While within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of
the vehicle. u The beeper sounds; the auto lock
function will be activated. 2. Carry the keyless remote beyond about 5
feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle and remain outside this range for 2 or more seconds. u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all doors and tailgate will then lock.
The activation range of the auto lock function is about 5 feet (1.5 m)
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside C
o n
tro ls
1Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock)
If equipped, the user must wait until the power tailgate fully closes before the auto lock function will be activated.
The auto lock function does not operate when any of the following conditions are met. The keyless remote is inside the vehicle. A door or the hood is not closed. The power mode is set to any mode other than
OFF. The keyless remote is not located within a radius of
about 5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle when you get out of the vehicle and close the doors.
Auto lock function operation stop beeper After the auto lock function has been activated, the auto lock operation stop beeper sounds for approximately two seconds in the following cases. The keyless remote is put inside the vehicle through
a window. You are located too close to the vehicle. The keyless remote is put inside the tailgate.
If the warning beeper sounds, check that you are carrying the keyless remote. Then, open/close a door and confirm the auto lock activation beeper sounds once.
Models with power tailgate
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 133
To temporarily deactivate the function: 1. Set the power mode to OFF. 2. Open the driver's door. 3. Using the master door lock switch, operate
the lock as follows: Lock Unlock Lock Unlock. u The beeper sounds, and the function is
deactivated.
To restore the function: Set the power mode to ON. Lock the vehicle without using the auto lock
function. With the keyless remote on you, move out
of the auto lock function operation range. Open any door.
Continued 133
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
134
C o
n tro
ls
1Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock)
In the case that the keyless remote is out of operating range when you close a door or the boot, a beeper will sound to indicate that the auto lock function has been canceled.
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If you do not open a door or the tailgate within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter, the doors and tailgate will automatically relock. You can change the relock timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 327
You can lock or unlock doors using the remote transmitter only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so the operating range may vary depending on the surroundings.
The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is open.
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works varies, the battery is probably low. If the LED does not come on when you press a button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Remote Battery P. 539
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 134
Locking the doors and tailgate Press the lock button. Once: u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors
and tailgate lock, and the security system sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first push): u The beeper sounds and verifies the
security system is set.
Unlocking the doors and tailgate Press the unlock button. Once: u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the
drivers door unlocks. Twice: u The remaining doors and tailgate unlock.
Using the Remote Transmitter
LED
Unlock Button
Lock Button
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside C
o n
tro ls
1Using the Remote Transmitter
You can customize the door unlock mode setting. 2 Customized Features P. 327
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
When you lock the drivers door with a key, all the other doors and tailgate lock at the same time. When unlocking, the drivers door unlocks first. Turn the key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining doors and the tailgate.
You can customize the door unlock mode setting. 2 Customized Features P. 327
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 135
If the lock or unlock button of the keyless remote does not work, use the key instead.
Fully insert the key and turn it.
Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
Lock
Unlock
Continued 135
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
136
C o
n tro
ls
1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the drivers door, all the other doors and tailgate lock at the same time.
Before locking a door, make sure that the key is not inside the vehicle.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 136
If you do not have the key on you, or if for some reason you cannot lock a door using the key, you can lock the door without it.
Locking the front doors Push the lock tab forward a or push the master door lock switch in the lock direction b, and close the door.
Locking the rear doors Push the lock tab forward and close the door.
Lockout prevention system The doors and tailgate cannot be locked when the keyless remote is inside the vehicle.
Locking a Door Without Using a Key
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside C
o n
tro ls
1Using the Lock Tab
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the drivers door, all of the other doors and the tailgate lock at the same time. When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the drivers door, only the drivers door will unlock.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 137
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Locking a door Push the lock tab forward.
Unlocking a door Pull the lock tab rearward.
Using the Lock Tab
To Unlock
Lock Tab To Lock
137Continued
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
138
C o
n tro
ls
1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
The front door inner handles are designed to allow front seat occupants to open the door in one motion. However this feature requires that front seat occupants never pull a front door inner handle while the vehicle is in motion.
Children should always ride in a rear seat where childproof door locks are provided.
2 Childproof Door Locks P. 139
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 138
Pull the front door inner handle. u The door unlocks and opens in one
motion.
Unlocking and opening the drivers door from the inner handle unlocks all the other doors.
To avoid all the doors unlocking, use the lock tab on the drivers door to unlock, then lock again before opening the door. u This setting works for one time only. If you do not want all the doors to be
unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to OFF using the audio/information screen. 2 Customized Features P. 327
Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
Inner Handle
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks C
o n
tro ls
1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock either of the front doors using the master door lock switch, all the other doors and the tailgate lock/unlock at the same time.
1Childproof Door Locks
To open the door from the inside when the childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the unlock position, lower the rear window, put your hand out of the window, and pull the outside door handle.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 139
Press the master door lock switch in as shown to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate.
Childproof Door Locks The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside regardless of the position of the lock tab.
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock position, and close the door.
When opening the door Open the door using the outside door handle.
Using the Master Door Lock Switch
To Unlock
Master Door Lock Switch
To Lock
Setting the Childproof Door Locks
Lock
Unlock
139
140
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking
C o
n tro
ls
1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the audio/ information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 327
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 140
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Your vehicle locks or unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is met.
Drive lock mode All doors and tailgate lock when the vehicles speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
Drivers door open mode All doors and tailgate unlock when the drivers door is opened.
Auto Door Locking
Auto Door Unlocking
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 141
Opening and Closing the Tailgate
o n
tro ls
1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
Be careful not to hit your head on the tailgate or to put your hands between the tailgate and the cargo area when closing the tailgate.
When you are storing or picking up cargo from the cargo area, or by using a forward and back kicking motion under the center of the rear bumper for hands free access*, while the engine is idling, do not stand in front of the exhaust pipe. You may get burned.
Do not allow any passenger in the cargo space. They may get hurt during hard braking, a sudden acceleration, or a crash.
3WARNING Anyone caught in the path of a tailgate that is being opened or closed can be seriously injured.
Make sure that all people are clear of the tailgate before opening or closing it.
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate Always make sure individuals and objects are clear of the tailgate before opening or closing it.
Open the tailgate all the way. u If it is not fully opened, the tailgate may begin to close under its own weight.
Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the tailgate to close.
Keep the tailgate closed while driving to: u Avoid possible damage. u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle. 2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 77
Models without power tailgate
All models
141Continued* Not available on all models
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuPrecautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
142
C o
n tro
ls
1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
NOTICE Do not push or pull on the power tailgate when it is being automatically opened or closed. Forcibly opening or closing the power tailgate while in operation can deform the tailgate frame.
When operating the power tailgate, make sure there is enough space around your vehicle. People near the tailgate may be seriously hurt if the tailgate hits or closes on their heads. Be especially cautious if children are around.
The power tailgate may not open or close under the following conditions: You start the engine while the tailgate is
automatically opening or closing. The vehicle is parked on a steep hill. The vehicle is swayed in a strong wind. The tailgate or the roof is covered with snow or ice.
3WARNING Closing a power tailgate while anyone is in the path of the tailgate can cause serious injury.
Make sure everyone is clear before closing the power tailgate.
Models with power tailgate
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 142
The power tailgate can be operated by pressing the power tailgate button on the remote transmitter, pressing the power tailgate button in the driver side control panel, pressing the button on the tailgate, or by raising and lowering your foot under the center of the rear bumper for hands free access*. The power tailgate can be opened/closed when the transmission is in (P .
Models with power tailgate
* Not available on all models
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate* C
o n
tro ls
1Using the Hands Free Access*
During rain or in other instances when the vehicle becomes wet, the sensor may not properly detect your foot motion.
When performing work on or around the rear section of the vehicle, you may inadvertently open or close the tailgate. To prevent this from happening, select Customized Features on the audio/information screen and then select OFF for the feature.
2 Customized Features P. 327
If you hold your foot under the bumper for too long or sweep your foot from side to side, the power tailgate does not open or close.
This function will not operate if you don't have the keyless remote on you. Please make sure you have the keyless remote on you.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 143
Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
Use a forward and back kicking motion for about 1 second under the center of the rear bumper to open or close the power tailgate while carrying the keyless remote. u Some exterior lights flash twice and a
beeper sounds once, then the tailgate begins to move.
Using the Hands Free Access*
1 sec.
143Continued* Not available on all models
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
144
C o
n tro
ls
1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
If you close the power tailgate when all the doors are locked, the power tailgate locks automatically.
If you replace the battery or the power tailgate fuse while the tailgate is open, the power tailgate may be disabled. The power tailgate resumes once you manually close the tailgate.
Installing aftermarket components other than genuine Honda accessories on the power tailgate may prevent it from fully opening or closing.
Make sure the power tailgate is fully open before you get your cargo in and out.
Make sure the power tailgate is fully closed before you start the vehicle.
The beeper sounds when you start driving while the power tailgate is still open, or closing.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 144
Press the power tailgate button for more than one second to operate when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF. u Some exterior lights flash and the beeper
sounds.
If you press the button again while the power tailgate is moving, it will reverse direction.
Customizing when to open the tailgate Anytime: The power tailgate unlocks and opens at the same time. This is the default setting. When Unlocked: The tailgate opens when all doors are unlocked.
2 Customized Features P. 327
Using the Remote Transmitter
Power Tailgate Button
* Not available on all models
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate* C
o n
tro ls
1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
If the power tailgate meets resistance while opening or closing, the auto reverse feature reverses the direction. The beeper sounds three times.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the tailgate is almost closed to make sure that it fully closes.
Do not touch the sensors located on both sides of the tailgate. The power tailgate does not close if you touch either sensor when you are trying to close the tailgate.
Be careful not to scratch the sensors with a sharp object. If scratched, they can be damaged, and the power tailgate closing feature malfunctions.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 145
To open or close the power tailgate, press the power tailgate button for about one second. u Some exterior lights flash and the beeper
sounds.
If you press the button again while the power tailgate is moving, it will reverse direction.
Using the Power Tailgate Button
Power Tailgate Button
Continued 145* Not available on all models
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
146
C o
n tro
ls
1Opening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
Do not leave the key, remote transmitter, or keyless remote in the cargo area before closing the tailgate.
Even if you are not carrying the keyless remote, you can lock/unlock the tailgate while someone else with the remote is within range.
You can change the power tailgate operation setting on and off.
2 Customized Features P. 327
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 146
If you press the outer handle of the tailgate for no longer than one second, the tailgate opens automatically. u The beeper sounds. u If you want to open the tailgate
manually, press the button for more than one second. 2 Opening and Closing the Tailgate
P. 141
If you are carrying the keyless remote, you do not have to unlock the tailgate before opening it.
If you press the outer handle again while the power tailgate is moving, it will reverse direction.
Using the Tailgate Outer Handle
Outer Handle
* Not available on all models
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate* C
o n
tro ls
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 147
Press the button on the tailgate to close the power tailgate. u The beeper sounds.
If you press the button again while the power tailgate is moving, it will reverse direction.
Using the Tailgate Inner Button
147Continued
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Power Tailgate*
148
C o
n tro
ls
1Auto-Closer
The auto-closer feature does not activate if you press the tailgate outer handle while the power tailgate is closing.
Do not put any force on the tailgate while the power tailgate is latching.
Keep your hands away from the tailgate when you manually close the tailgate and let it latch automatically. It is dangerous to put your hands around the tailgate as it starts to latch itself.
1Power Tailgate Fall Detection
If you try to manually close the power tailgate immediately after it fully opens, the power tailgate fall detection may be activated.
Once the power tailgate fall detection activates, wait until the power tailgate fully closes. Keep away from the power tailgate when it is in motion.
If the power tailgate fall detection constantly activates, consult at a dealer.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 148
If you manually close the power tailgate, it latches automatically.
Automatically lowers the power tailgate when there is a possibility that the fully opened power tailgate can fall down by its own weight (for example, by snow on the tailgate). The beeper sounds while the power tailgate lowers.
Auto-Closer
Power Tailgate Fall Detection
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate C
o n
tro ls
1Using the Tailgate Outer Handle
Do not leave the key, remote transmitter, or keyless remote in the cargo area before closing the tailgate.
Even if you are not carrying the keyless remote, you can lock/unlock the tailgate while someone else with the remote is within range.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 149
Opening/Closing the Tailgate
When all the doors are unlocked or you press the tailgate unlock button on the remote transmitter, the tailgate is unlocked. Press the tailgate outer handle and lift open the tailgate.
If you are carrying the keyless remote, you do not have to unlock the tailgate before opening it.
To close the tailgate, grab the inner handle, pull the tailgate down, and push it closed from outside.
Using the Tailgate Outer Handle
Outer Handle
Inner Handle
149Continued
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate
150
C o
n tro
ls
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If you have unlocked and opened the tailgate using the remote transmitter or keyless remote, when closing, the tailgate locks automatically.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 150
Press the tailgate unlock button to unlock the tailgate.
Using the Remote Transmitter
Tailgate Unlock Button
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 151
Security System
o n
tro ls
1Immobilizer System
NOTICE Leaving the key in the vehicle can result in theft or accidental movement of the vehicle. Always take the key with you whenever you leave the vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable.
1Security System Alarm
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable.
The security alarm continues for a maximum of two minutes until the security system alarm deactivates.
Immobilizer System The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic signals to verify the key.
Pay attention to the following when pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button: Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ENGINE START/
STOP button. Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object. Do not bring a key from another vehicles immobilizer system near the ENGINE
START/STOP button. Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic device, such as televisions and
audio systems emit strong magnetic fields. Note that even a key chain can become magnetic.
Security System Alarm The security system alarm activates when the tailgate, hood or doors are forcibly opened. The alarm does not activate if the tailgate or doors are opened with the key, remote transmitter or keyless access system.
However, the alarm activates if a door is opened with the key and then the hood is opened before the power mode is set to ON.
151Continued
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
152
C o
n tro
ls
1Security System Alarm
Do not set the security system alarm when someone is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can accidentally activate when: Unlocking the door with the lock tab. Opening the hood with the hood release.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the security system alarm, the security alarm may go off once the battery is recharged or replaced. If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by unlocking a door using the key, remote transmitter or keyless access system.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 152
When the security system alarm activates The horn sounds intermittently, and some exterior lights flash.
To deactivate the security system alarm Unlock the vehicle using the key, remote transmitter or keyless access system. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.
Setting the security system alarm The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have been met: The power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF. The hood is closed. All doors and the tailgate are locked from outside with the key, remote
transmitter, or keyless access system.
When the security system alarm sets The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks and the blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds.
To cancel the security system alarm The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote transmitter or keyless access system, or when the power mode is set to ON. The security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm C
o n
tro ls
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 153
The panic button on the remote transmitter
If you press the panic button for approximately one second, the following will occur for about 30 seconds: The horn sounds. Some exterior lights flash.
Canceling panic mode Press any button on the remote transmitter, or set the power mode to ON.
Panic Mode
Panic Button
153
154
C o
n tro
ls
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 154
Opening and Closing the Windows
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. Opening either front door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse If a power window senses resistance when closing automatically, it stops closing and reverses direction.
The drivers window auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
3WARNING Closing a power window on someones hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them.
Opening/Closing the Power Windows The power windows can be opened and closed when the power mode is in ON, using the switches on the doors.
The drivers side switches can be used to open and close all the windows. The power window lock button on the drivers side must be switched off (not pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the drivers seat.
When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you can only operate the drivers window. Turn the power window lock button on if a child is in the vehicle.
Manual operation To open: Push the switch down lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.
Automatic operation To open: Push the switch down firmly. To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
The window opens or closes completely. To stop the window at any time, push or pull the switch briefly.
Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
ON OFF
Power Window Lock Button
Front Passengers Window Switch
Drivers Window Switch
Indicator
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows C
o n
tro ls
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
While driving with any of the windows open, you may hear a booming, throbbing, or helicopter-type noise or pressure. This is called wind buffeting. This is a normal occurrence that can be minimized.
If you hear a wind buffeting noise with any of the windows open, lower all of the other windows slightly or open the moonroof*.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 155
To open: Push the switch down. To close: Pull the switch up.
Release the switch when the window reaches the desired position.
To open: Press the unlock button, and then within 10 seconds, press it again and hold it.
If the windows and moonroof* stop midway, repeat the procedure.
Opening/Closing the Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function
Close
Open
Opening the Windows and the Moonroof* with the Remote
Unlock Button
Continued 155* Not available on all models
156
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
C o
n tro
ls
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 156
To open: Unlock the drivers door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the unlock direction and hold it there.
To close: Lock the drivers door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the lock direction and hold it there.
Release the key to stop the windows/ moonroof* at the desired position. If you want further adjustment, repeat the same operation.
Opening/Closing the Windows and the Moonroof* with the Key
Close Open
* Not available on all models
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 157
Moonroof*
o n
tro ls
1Opening and Closing the Moonroof
NOTICE Opening the moonroof in below freezing temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The moonroof can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to OFF. Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse function causes the moonroof to change directions, then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
You can use the remote transmitter or the key to operate the moonroof.
2 Opening the Windows and the Moonroof* with the Remote P. 155
2 Opening/Closing the Windows and the Moonroof* with the Key P. 156
3WARNING Opening or closing the moonroof on someones hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it.
Opening and Closing the Moonroof You can operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
Automatic operation To open: Pull the switch back firmly. To close: Push the switch forward firmly.
The moonroof will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the moonroof midway, push the switch briefly.
Manual operation To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.
Tilting the moonroof up To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof switch. To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then release.
Using the Moonroof Switch
Open
Close Tilt
157* Not available on all models
158
C o
n tro
ls
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 158
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
1ENGINE START/STOP Button
ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range You can start the engine when the keyless remote is inside the vehicle.
If the battery of the keyless remote is getting low, the engine may not start when you push the ENGINE START/STOP button. If the engine does not start, refer to the following link.
2 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak P. 560
The engine may also run if the keyless remote is close to the door or window, even if it is outside the vehicle.
ON mode: The ENGINE START/STOP button is on (in red), if the engine is running.
If the power mode does not change from VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to ACCESSORY, press the ENGINE START/ STOP button while moving the steering wheel left and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the mode to change.
Operating Range
Canadian models
ENGINE START/STOP Button
*1: Canadian models
Changing the Power Mode
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) The button is off. The steering wheel is locked*1. The power to all electrical components is turned off.
ACCESSORY The button blinks (in red). Operate the audio system and other accessories in this position.
ON The button blinks (in red). All electrical components can be used.
Without pressing the brake pedal
Press the button.
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button C
o n
tro ls
1ENGINE START/STOP Button
Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON when you get out.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 159
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the transmission in (P and the power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid draining the battery.
When in this mode: The steering wheel does not lock. You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the keyless access system.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
If you open the drivers door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning beeper sounds.
Automatic Power Off
Power Mode Reminder
Canadian models
Continued 159
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
160
C o
n tro
ls
1Keyless Remote Reminder
When the keyless remote is within the systems operational range, and the drivers door is closed, the warning function cancels.
If the keyless remote is taken out of the vehicle after the engine has been started, you can no longer change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Removing the keyless remote from the vehicle through a window does not activate the warning buzzer.
Do not put the keyless remote on the dashboard or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer to go off. Under some other conditions that can prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is within the systems operational range.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 160
When the power mode is set to any mode other than OFF (LOCK) and you remove the keyless remote from the vehicle and shut the door, an alarm will sound. If the alarm continues to sound, place the keyless remote in another location.
When the power mode is in ACCESSORY
The alarm will sound from outside the vehicle.
When the power mode is in ON An alarm will sound both inside and outside the vehicle. In addition, a warning indicator will appear on the instrument panel.
Keyless Remote Reminder
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals C
o n
tro ls
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 161
Turn Signals The turn signals can be used when the power mode is in ON.
One-touch turn signal When you lightly push up or down and release the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals and turn signal indicator blink three times. This feature can be used when signaling for a lane change.
Right Turn
Left Turn
161
162
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
C o
n tro
ls
1Light Switches
If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the drivers door is opened.
When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the instrument panel will be on.
2 Lights On Indicator P. 86
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off because it will cause the battery to discharge.
If you sense that the level of the headlights is abnormal, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 162
Light Switches
Rotating the light switch turns the lights on and off, regardless of the power mode setting. High beams Push the lever forward until you hear a click. Low beams When in high beams, pull the lever back to return to low beams. Flashing the high beams Pull the lever back, and release it.
Lights off Turn the lever to OFF either when: The transmission is in (P. The parking brake is applied. To turn the lights on again, turn the lever to OFF to cancel the lights off mode. Even if you do not cancel the lights off mode, the lights come on automatically when: The transmission is taken out of (P and the
parking brake is released. The vehicle starts to move.
Manual Operation
High Beams
Flashing the high beams Low Beams
Turns on parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights
Turns on headlights, parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights
U.S. models
Canadian models
High Beams
Flashing the high beams Low Beams
Canadian models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches C
o n
tro ls
1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
We recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas such as long tunnels or parking facilities.
The light sensor is in the location shown below. Do not cover this light sensor with anything; otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not work properly.
Models without Automatic Intermittent Wipers
Models with automatic intermittent wipers
Light Sensor
Light Sensor
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 163
Automatic lighting control can be used when the power mode is in ON.
When the light switch is in AUTO, the headlights and other exterior lights will switch on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness.
The headlights come on when you unlock a door in dark areas with the headlight switch in AUTO. u Once you lock the door, the headlights
will go off.
Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control) U.S. models
Canadian models
Continued 163
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
164
C o
n tro
ls
1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
You can adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
2 Customized Features P. 327
Setting The exterior lights come on when the ambient light is at
Max High Mid Low Min
U.S. models
Bright
Dark
1Headlight Integration with Wipers
This feature activates while the headlights are off in AUTO. The instrument panel brightness does not change when the headlights come on.
At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of the number of wiper sweeps.
1Automatic Lighting Off Feature
You can change the headlight auto off timer setting. 2 Customized Features P. 327
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 164
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO. The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15 seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF, take the remote with you, and close the drivers door.
If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the switch is in the AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the drivers door. If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the drivers door, you will hear a reminder chime alerting you that the lights are on.
Headlight Integration with Wipers
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights* C
o n
tro ls
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 165
Fog Lights*
When the parking lights or the headlights are on, turn the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.
Fog Light Switch
165* Not available on all models
166
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights
C o
n tro
ls
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 166
Daytime Running Lights The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have been met:
The power mode is in ON. The headlight switch is AUTO or OFF. The parking brake is released.
The power mode is in ON. The headlight switch is AUTO. The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights.
The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when the head light switch is in AUTO and it is getting darker outside.
U.S. models
Canadian models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam C
o n
tro ls
1Auto High-Beam
The auto high-beam system does not always operate in every situation. This system is just for assisting the driver. Always observe your surroundings and switch the headlights between high beam and low beam manually if necessary.
If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient for driving, change the headlight beams manually.
The range and the distance at which the camera can recognize varies depending on conditions surrounding your vehicle.
Regarding the handling of the camera mounted to the inside of the windshield, refer to the following.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 473
For the auto high-beam to work properly: Do not place an object that reflects light on the
dashboard. Keep the windshield around the camera clean. When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to
apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens. Do not attach an object, sticker or film to the area
around the camera. Do not touch the camera lens.
If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 167
Auto High-Beam The front sensor camera detects the light sources ahead of the vehicle such as the lights of a preceding or oncoming vehicle, or street lights. When you are driving at night, the system automatically switches the headlights between low beam and high beam depending on the situation.
When all of the following conditions have been met, the auto high-beam indicator comes on and the auto high-beam is activated.
The power mode is in ON. The light switch is in AUTO. The lever is in the low beam position. The headlights have been automatically
activated. It is dark outside the vehicle.
If the auto high-beam indicator does not come on even when all the conditions have been met, carry out the following procedure and the indicator will come on. Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it while driving.
How to Use the Auto High-Beam
Front Sensor Camera
Auto High-Beam Indicator
Light Switch
167Continued
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
168
C o
n tro
ls
1How to Use the Auto High-Beam
In the following cases, the auto high-beam system may not switch the headlights properly or the switching timing may be changed. In case of the automatic switching operation does not fit for your driving habits, please switch the headlights manually.
The brightness of the lights from the preceding or oncoming vehicle is intense or poor.
Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow, fog, windshield frost, etc.).
Surrounding light sources, such as street lights, electric billboards and traffic lights are illuminating the road ahead.
The brightness level of the road ahead constantly changes.
The road is bumpy or has many curves. A vehicle suddenly appears in front of you, or a
vehicle in front of you is not in the preceding or oncoming direction.
Your vehicle is tilted with a heavy load in the rear. A traffic sign, mirror, or other reflective object
ahead is reflecting strong light toward the vehicle. The oncoming vehicle frequently disappears under
roadside trees or behind median barriers. The preceding or oncoming vehicle is a motorcycle,
bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle.
The auto high-beam system keeps the headlight low beam when: Windshield wipers are operating. The camera has detected a dense fog.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 168
Automatic switching between high-beam and low-beam When auto high-beam is active, the headlights switch between high beam and low beam based on the following conditions.
Manual switching between high-beam and low-beam If you want to manually switch the headlights between high beam and low beam, follow either of the procedures below. Note that when you do this, the auto high- beam indicator will turn off and the auto high-beam will be deactivated.
Using the lever: Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it within about one second while driving. u To reactivate the auto high-beam, pull the lever toward you for flashing the
high beams then release it while driving. The auto high-beam indicator will come on.
Using the light switch: Turn the light switch to . u To reactivate the auto high-beam, turn the light switch to AUTO when the
lever is in the low beam position, the auto high-beam indicator will come on.
Switching to high beam: Switching to low beam:
All of the following conditions must be met before the high beams turn on. Your vehicle speed is 45mph
(72 km/h) or more. There are no preceding or
oncoming vehicles with headlights or taillights turned on.
There are few street lights on the road ahead.
One of the following conditions must be met before the low beams turn on. Your vehicle speed is 30 mph
(48 km/h) or less. There is a preceding or oncoming
vehicles with headlights or taillights turned on.
There are many street lights on the road ahead.
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam C
o n
tro ls
1How to Use the Auto High-Beam
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message appears: Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed toward the camera.
Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area around the camera.
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Clean Front Windshield or Auto High- Beam Cannot Operate: Clean Windshield message appears: Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the
windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
1How to Turn Off the Auto High-Beam
If you turn the auto high-beam system off, the system does not operate until you turn the system on.
Park in a safe place before turning the system off or on.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 169
You can turn the auto high-beam system off. If you want to turn the system off or on, set the power mode to ON, then carry out the following procedures while the vehicle is stationary.
To turn the system off: With the light switch is in AUTO, pull the lever toward you and hold it for at least 40 seconds. After the auto high-beam indicator light blinks twice, release the lever.
To turn the system on: With the light switch is in AUTO, pull the lever toward you and hold it for at least 30 seconds. After the auto high-beam indicator light blinks once, release the lever.
How to Turn Off the Auto High-Beam
AUTO Position
169
170
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
C o
n tro
ls
1Wipers and Washers
NOTICE Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry. The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber blades will get damaged.
Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out. The pump may get damaged.
The wiper motor may stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal.
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are operating intermittently, the length of the wipe interval shortens. When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operations shortest delay setting (+) and the LO setting become the same.
NOTICE In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the windshield. Operating the wipers in this condition may damage the wipers. Use the defogger or heated windshield* to warm the windshield, then turn the wipers on.
Models with intermittent time adjustment ring
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 170
Wipers and Washers
The windshield wipers and washers can be used when the power mode is in ON.MIST The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever.
Wiper switch (OFF, INT*1/AUTO*2, LO, HI)
Move the lever up or down to change the wiper settings.
Adjusting wiper operation*
Turn the adjustment ring to adjust wiper operation.
Washer Sprays while you pull the lever toward you. When you release the lever for more than one second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two or three more times to clear the windshield, then stop.
*1: Models with manual intermittent operation *2: Models with automatic intermittent operation
Windshield Wipers/Washers
Intermittent Time Adjustment Ring*
MIST
INT*1/AUTO*2
OFF
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Pull to use washer.
Lower speed, fewer sweeps
Higher speed, more sweeps
* Not available on all models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers C
o n
tro ls
1Wipers and Washers
If the wipers stop operating due to an obstacle such as the buildup of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place. Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and set the power mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF, then remove the obstacle.
1Automatic Intermittent Wipers*
The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below.
NOTICE AUTO should always be turned OFF before the following situations in order to prevent severe damage to the wiper system: Cleaning the windshield Driving through a car wash No rain present
Rainfall Sensor
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 171
When you push the lever down to AUTO, the windshield wipers sweep once, and go into the automatic mode.
The wipers operate intermittently, at low speed, or at high speed and stop in accordance with the amount of rainfall the rainfall sensor detects.
Auto sensitivity adjustment When the wiper function is set to AUTO, you can adjust the sensitivity of the rainfall sensor (using the adjustment ring) so that wipers will operate in accordance with your preference.
Sensor sensitivity
Automatic Intermittent Wipers*
Low sensitivity
High sensitivity
Continued 171* Not available on all models
172
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
C o
n tro
ls
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 172
The rear wiper and washer can be used when the power mode is in ON.
Wiper switch (OFF, INT, ON) Change the wiper switch setting according to the amount of rain.
Washer ( ) Sprays on the rear window while you rotate the switch to this position. Hold it to activate the rear wiper and to spray the washer. Once released, the washer spray will stop and the rear wiper will return to its selected switch setting after a few more sweeps.
Operating in reverse When you shift the transmission to (R with the windshield wiper activated, the rear wiper operates automatically as follows even if its switch is off.
Rear Wiper/Washer
INT: Intermittent
OFF
ON
Washer
Front Wiper Operation Rear Wiper Operation
INT (Intermittent) Intermittent
LO (Low speed wipe) HI (High speed wipe)
Continuous
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button C
o n
tro ls
1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been defogged. Also, do not use the system for a long time while the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.
When the power mode is set to ON and the outside temperature is below 41F (5C), the heated door mirror may automatically activate for 10 minutes.
Models with heated door mirror
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 173
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window and mirrors when the power mode is in ON.
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes depending on the outside temperature.
The rear defogger automatically switches off after 10-30 minutes depending on the outside temperature.
Models with heated door mirror
Models without heated door mirror
173* Not available on all models
174
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluHeated Windshield Button
C o
n tro
ls
1Heated Windshield Button
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been deiced. Also, do not use the system for a long period when the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.
When the outside temperature is below 39F (4C), the heated windshield may automatically activate. The system deactivates itself once the outside temperature reaches 43F (6C).
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 174
Heated Windshield Button Press the heated windshield button to deice the windshield when the power mode is in ON.
Canadian models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control C
o n
tro ls
1Brightness Control
Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on whether the exterior lights are on or off. The instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are on.
When it is bright outside and the headlight integration with the wiper is activated, the instrument panel brightness does not change.
To cancel the reduced instrument panel brightness when the exterior lights are on, press the (+ button until the brightness display is up to max, the beeper sounds.
The brightness can be set differently for when the exterior lights are on, and when they are off.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 175
Brightness Control When the power mode is in ON, you can use the (+ or (- button to adjust instrument panel brightness. Brighten: Press the (+ button. Dim: Press the (- button.
You will hear a beeper when the brightness reaches minimum or maximum. Several seconds after you have adjusted the brightness, you will be returned to the previous screen.
Brightness level indicator The brightness level is shown on the display while you are adjusting it.
(+ Button
(- Button
175
176
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System*
C o
n tro
ls
1Driving Position Memory System*
Using the audio/information screen, you can disable the automatic seat and door mirrors adjustment function.
2 Customized Features P. 327
The drivers seat easy exit feature can be turned ON/ OFF.
2 Customized Features P. 327
System Operation The system will not operate if: The vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5 km/h). Either memory position button is pressed while the
seat is in motion. The seat position is adjusted while in operation. The memory 1 or 2 position is set fully to the rear.
The system may not recognize a key if: The key is in close proximity to a cell phone or other
wireless device. Both keys are in the vehicle at the same time. The driving position memory system is disabled in
customized features. Opening driver's door without fully grabbing door
handle.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 176
Driving Position Memory System*
You can store two driver's seat (except for power lumbar) and outside mirror positions with the driving position memory system. When you unlock and open the drivers door with a remote transmitter or keyless access system, door mirrors adjust to one of the two preset positions and the seat adjusts to the retracted position of one of the two preset positions automatically.
The seat will move to the stored position when you set the power mode to ACCESSORY.
When you enter the vehicle, the driver information interface briefly shows you which remote transmitter you used to unlock the vehicle. DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1. DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.
The drivers seat moves rearward depending on the set seating position once you Stop the vehicle. Put the transmission in (P . Turn the engine off. Open the drivers door. Once the power mode is in the ACCESSORY position, the drivers seat moves to the DRIVER 1 or 2 preset position.
DRIVER 1 DRIVER 2
* Not available on all models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System* C
o n
tro ls
1Storing a Position in Memory
After you press the SET button, the storing operation will be canceled when: You do not press the memory button within five
seconds. You readjust the seat position and door mirror
before the double-beep. You set the power mode to any position except
ON.
1Recalling the Stored Position
The seat and the door mirrors will stop moving if you: Press the SET button or memory button (1 or (2. Adjust the seat position or door mirrors. Put the transmission into a position other than (P.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 177
1. Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the drivers seat and the door mirrors to the desired position.
2. Press the SET button. u You will hear a beep, and the memory
button indicator light will blink. 3. Press and hold memory button (1 or (2
within five seconds of pressing the SET button. u You will hear two beeps, and the
indicator light on the button you pressed stays on once the seat and the outside mirror positions have been memorized.
1. Put the transmission into (P . 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Press a memory button ( (1 or (2). u You will hear a beep, and the indicator
light will blink.
The seat and the door mirrors will automatically move to the memorized positions. When it has finished moving, you will hear the beep, and the indicator light stays on.
Storing a Position in Memory
Memory Button 1
Memory Button 2SET Button
Recalling the Stored Position
Memory Buttons
177
178
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel
C o
n tro
ls
1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
3WARNING Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 178
Adjusting the Steering Wheel The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
1. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever down. u The steering wheel adjustment lever is
under the steering column. 2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out. u Make sure you can see the instrument
panel gauges and indicators. 3. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up
to lock the steering wheel in position. u After adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering wheel in place by trying to move it up, down, in, and out.
Lever
To lock
To adjust
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 179
Adjusting the Mirrors
o n
tro ls
1Adjusting the Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving. 2 Front Seats P. 181
1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror* and Power Door Mirrors*
The auto dimming function cancels when the transmission is in (R.
Interior Rearview Mirror Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving position.
Flip the tab to switch the position. The night position will help to reduce the glare from headlights behind you when driving after dark.
When you are driving after dark, the automatic dimming rearview mirror and power door mirror reduce the glare from headlights behind you. Press the AUTO button to turn this function on and off. When activated, the AUTO indicator comes on.
Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions*
Tab
Daytime Position
Night Position
Up
Down
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror* and Power Door Mirrors*
Sensor
Auto Button
Up
Down
179* Not available on all models
180
uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
C o
n tro
ls
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 180
Power Door Mirrors You can adjust the door mirrors when the power mode is in ON.
Mirror position adjustment L/R selector switch: Select the left or right mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the switch to the center position. Mirror position adjustment switch: Press the switch left, right, up, or down to move the mirror.
Folding door mirrors*
Press the folding button to fold in and out the door mirrors.
If activated, either side door mirror automatically tilts downward when you put the transmission into (R ; this improves close- in visibility on the selected side of the vehicle when backing up. The mirror automatically returns to its original position when you take the transmission out of (R .
To activate this feature, set the power mode to ON, and slide the selector switch to the left or right side.
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
Folding Button*
Reverse Tilt Door Mirror*
Selector Switch
* Not available on all models
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 181
Adjusting the Seats
o n
tro ls
1Adjusting the Seats
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest.
Always make seat adjustments before driving.
3WARNING Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible while maintaining control of the vehicle.
Front Seats Adjust the drivers seat as far back as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright, well back in the seat and be able to adequately press the pedals without leaning forward, and grip the steering wheel comfortably. The passengers seat should be adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far back from the front airbag in the dashboard as possible.
Adjusting the front power seats*
Move back.
Allow sufficient space.
Adjusting the Seat Positions
Horizontal Position Adjustment
Height Adjustment*
Seat-back Angle Adjustment
181Continued* Not available on all models
182
uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats
C o
n tro
ls
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 182
Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch*
Press the front: To increase the entire lumbar support. Press the rear: To decrease the entire lumbar support.
Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch
* Not available on all models
uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats C
o n
tro ls
1Adjusting the front manual seats*
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and forth to make sure it is locked in position.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 183
Adjusting the front manual seats*
Horizontal Position Adjustment Pull up on the bar to move the seat, then release the bar.
Height Adjustment (Driver side only) Pull up or push down the lever to raise or lower the seat.
Seat-back Angle Adjustment Pull up the lever to change the angle.
Continued 183* Not available on all models
uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats
184
C o
n tro
ls
1Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the seat-back and your back.
Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help.
3WARNING Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 184
Adjust the drivers seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel.
The front seat passenger should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, upright position.
Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupants chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.
Adjusting the Seat-Backs
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats C
o n
tro ls
1Adjusting the Seat Positions
3WARNING An unsecured seat or seat-back can move out of position or collapse without warning if there is sudden acceleration or stop or in a crash.
A seat or seat-back that suddenly moves or collapses can result in severe injury or death.
Always make sure all seats and seat-backs are securely locked into position before driving.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 185
Rear Seats
Adjusting the Seat Positions
Seat-back Angle Adjustment Pull up the lever to change the angle.
Horizontal Position Adjustment Pull up the bar to move the seat, then release the bar.
185Continued
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
186
C o
n tro
ls
1Folding Down the Rear Seat
Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work improperly.
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 59
The front seats must be far enough forward so they do not interfere with the rear seats as they fold down.
To lock the seat-back upright, push it backwards until it locks.
Make sure the seat-back, head restraints and seat cushion are securely latched back into place before driving. Before center occupant use, make sure the center shoulder belt is reinserted into the anchor buckle.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 186
Separately fold down the left and right halves of the rear seat to make room for cargo.
1. Store the center seat belt first. Insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle.
2. Retract the seat belt into the holder on the ceiling. 2 Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor P. 44
3. Lower the center head restraint to its lowest position. Put the armrest back into the seat-back.
4. Pull up on the seat-back angle adjustment lever.
To return the seat to the original position, pull up the seat-back in the upright position.
Folding Down the Rear Seat
Lever
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats C
o n
tro ls
1Rear Seat Reminder
When the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF, the reminder comes on briefly, then the function is deactivated.
The reminder will not work if the power mode has not been set to ON within 10 minutes of operating the rear doors.
The system does not detect passengers in the rear seats. Instead, it can detect when a rear door is opened and closed, indicating that there may be something in the rear seats.
You can turn off the notification setting. 2 Customized Features P. 327
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 187
This feature alerts you to the possible presence of passengers or items in the rear seats before you exit the vehicle. It activates when the vehicle is set to VEHICLE OFF if the rear doors were opened shortly before or after the vehicle was set to ON.
A reminder appears on the driver information interface and an alert will sound when the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF.
Rear Seat Reminder
187
188
uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints
C o
n tro
ls
1Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer Seat Head Restraint Positions
In order for the head restraint system to work properly: Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs. Do not place any objects between an occupant and
the seat-back. Install each restraint in its proper location.
3WARNING Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and increases the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 188
Head Restraints Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.
Head restraints are most effective for protection against whiplash and other rear- impact crash injuries when the center of the back of the occupants head rests against the center of the restraint. The tops of the occupants ears should be level with the center height of the restraint.
To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button.
Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer Seat Head Restraint Positions
Position head in the center of the head restraint.
uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints C
o n
tro ls
1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
3WARNING Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before driving.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 189
A passenger sitting in the rear center seating position should adjust the height of their head restraint to an appropriate position before the vehicle begins moving. To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button(s).
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove a head restraint:
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then, push the release button and pull the restraint up and out.
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then, push the release buttons which are located on the both legs at the same time, and pull the restraint up and out.
To reinstall a head restraint: Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height while pressing the release button(s). Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked in position.
Changing the Rear Center Seat Head Restraint Position
Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
Front and rear outer seat head restraint
Rear center seat head restraint
189
190
uuAdjusting the SeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position
C o
n tro
ls
1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
3WARNING Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 190
Maintain a Proper Sitting Position After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is off.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag.
uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest C
o n
tro ls
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 191
Armrest
Pull down the armrest.
pull the armrest all the way down, then pull it up to the desired angle.
Pull down the armrest of the center backrest.
Using the Front Seat Armrest
Models with adjustable armrest
Using the Rear Seat Armrest
191
192
C o
n tro
ls
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 192
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
1Interior Light Switches
In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed.
The lights go off after about 30 seconds in the following situations: When you unlock the drivers door but do not open
it. When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF but
do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time. 2 Customized Features P. 327
The interior lights go off immediately in the following situations: When you lock the drivers door. When you close the drivers door in ACCESSORY
mode. When you set the power mode to ON.
If you leave the tailgate or doors open in VEHICLE OFF mode, the interior lights go off after about 15 minutes.
To avoid draining the battery, do not leave the interior light on for an extended length of time when the engine or power system is off.
Interior Lights
ON The interior lights come on regardless of whether the tailgate and doors are open or closed. Door activated The interior lights come on in the following situations: When tailgate or any doors are opened. You unlock the drivers door. When the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF. OFF The interior lights remain off regardless of whether the tailgate or the doors are open or closed.
Interior Light Switches
Door Activated Position
Off
On
uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights C
o n
tro ls
1Map Lights
When the front interior light switch is in the door activated position and any door is open, the map light will not go off when you press the lens.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 193
Front The map lights can be turned on and off by pressing the lenses.
Rear The map lights can be turned on and off by pressing the lenses when the front interior light switch is in the door activated position.
Map Lights
Continued 193
194
uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Lights
C o
n tro
ls
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 194
ON The light comes on regardless of whether the tailgate is open or closed.
Tailgate activated The light comes on when you open the tailgate, and goes off when closed.
OFF The light stays off with or without opening the tailgate.
Cargo Area Light
Off
On
Tailgate Activated Position
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items C
o n
tro ls
1Glove Box
3WARNING An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while driving.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 195
Interior Convenience Items
Pull the lever to open the glove box. You can lock the glove box with the built-in key.
To open the console compartment, press the button to unlock the lid, and then slide it rearward.
Glove Box
Glove Box
To Lock
Console Compartment
Button
195Continued
196
uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items
C o
n tro
ls
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 196
Console Tray Slide the tray when you use the console compartment.
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items C
o n
tro ls
1Beverage Holders
NOTICE Spilled liquids damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders. Hot liquid can scald you.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 197
Front seat beverage holders Are located in the console between the front seats.
Door side beverage holders Are located on the both of front and rear door side pockets.
Beverage Holders
Front
Rear
Continued 197
198
uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items
C o
n tro
ls
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 198
Rear seat beverage holders Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat beverage holders.
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items C
o n
tro ls
1Accessory Power Sockets
Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter element. This can overheat the power socket.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180 watts (15 amps) or less.
To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket with the engine running.
When the accessory power socket is not in use, close the cover to prevent any small foreign objects from getting into the accessory power socket.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 199
The accessory power sockets can be used when the power mode is in ACCESSORY or ON.
Console panel Open the lid and the cover to use it.
Console compartment Pull the handle and open the cover to use it.
Accessory Power Sockets
Continued 199
uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items
200
C o
n tro
ls
1AC Power Outlet*
NOTICE Do not use the AC power outlet for electric appliances that require high initial peak wattage, such as cathode-ray tube type televisions, refrigerators, electric pumps, etc. It is not suitable for devices that process precise data, such as medical equipment, and that require an extremely stable power supply, such as microcomputer-controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.
The AC power outlet is designed to supply power for up to 115 volt appliances that are rated 150 watts or less.
Continued use of any electric appliance/device exceeding these ratings may result in damage to the appliance/device.
When the AC power outlet is not in use, close the cover to prevent any small foreign objects from getting into the AC power outlet.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 200
Cargo area*
Open the cover to use it.
The AC power outlet can be used when the engine is running. Open the cover to use it. Plug in the appliance slightly, turn it 90 clockwise, then push it all the way.
AC Power Outlet*
* Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items C
o n
tro ls
1Wireless Charger*
FCC statement This product complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards of FCC (Federal Communication Commission), described below: This device complies with Part 18 of the FCC rules.This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used per the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
In order to use safely: Remove any metal objects from the charge pad
before charging a device. Do not open the charger case. Do not use the charger if it malfunctions. Contact a
dealer.
If the charger interferes with radio communications, attempt to correct the interference: Press and hold the switch on the charger for a few
seconds to turn off the charger.
In order to use safely: Remove any metal objects from the charge pad
before charging a device. Do not open the charger case. Do not use the charger if it malfunctions. Contact a
dealer.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 201
To use the wireless charger, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON. Charge a compatible device on the area indicated by the mark as follows:
1. Place the device you want to charge on the charging area. u The system will automatically start
charging the device and the green indicator light will come on.
u Make sure that the device is compatible with the system and placed with the chargeable side in the center of the charging area.
2. When charging is completed, the green indicator light will go off. u If the device is not located on the charge
area correctly, the green indicator light will blink.
Wireless Charger*
Green Indicator
Charging Area
Continued 201* Not available on all models
uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items
202
C o
n tro
ls
1Wireless Charger*
Using the audio/information screen, you can disable the wireless charger function.
2 Customized Features P. 327
3CAUTION Metal objects between the charge pad and the device to be charged will get hot and can burn you. Always remove foreign objects from
the charge pad before charging the device.
Be sure the surface is clear of dust and other debris before charging.
Do not spill liquids (i. e. water, drinks, etc.) on the charger and the device.
Do not use oil, grease, alcohol, benzine or thinner for cleaning the charge pad.
Do not cover the system with towels, clothing, or other objects while charging etc.
Avoid spraying aerosols which may come in contact with the charge pad surface.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 202
When charging does not start Perform one of the solutions in the following table.
Indicator Cause Solution
Slow Blink
There is an obstacle(s) between the charging area and the device.
Remove the obstacle(s).
The device is not within the charging area.
Move the device to the center of the charging area where is located.
Fast Blink The wireless charger is faulty.
Turn the vehicle off and back on. If the indicator still blinks, contact a dealer.
* Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items C
o n
tro ls
1Wireless Charger*
This system consumes a lot of power. Do not use the system for a long time when the engine is not running. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.
When using the wireless charger, check the users manual that came with the compatible device you want to charge.
NOTICE Do not place any magnetic recording media or precision machines within the charging area while charging. The data on your cards such as credit cards can be lost because of the magnetic effect. Also precision machines such as watches can be affected.
Qi and marks are the registered trademarks owned by Wireless Power Consortium (WPC).
In the following cases, charging may stop or not start: The device is already fully charged. The temperature of the device is extremely high
while charging. You are at a place that emits strong
electromagnetic waves or noises, such as a TV station, electric power plant, or gas station.
A device may not charge if the size or shape of its chargeable side is not appropriate for use with the charging area.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 203
Continued 203* Not available on all models
uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items
204
C o
n tro
ls
1Wireless Charger*
Not all devices are compatible with the system.
During the charging phase, it is normal for the charging area and device to heat up.
Charging may be briefly interrupted when: All the doors and the tailgate are closed
- to avoid interference with the proper functioning of the keyless access system.
The position of the device is altered.
Do not charge more than one device at a time on a charging area.
1Coat Hooks
The coat hooks are not designed for large or heavy items.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 204
There is a coat hook on the rear grab handle of both sides. Pull it down to use it.
Coat Hooks
* Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items C
o n
tro ls
1Sunglasses Holder
Keep the holder closed while driving except when accessing stored items.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 205
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release the indent. To close, push it again until it latches.
You can store eyeglasses and other small items in this holder.
Conversation mirror*
The sunglasses holder comes with a mirror. Open the sunglasses holder fully, then push it back to the first detent.
You can use the mirror to view the rear seats.
Sunglasses Holder
Push
Continued 205* Not available on all models
uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items
206
C o
n tro
ls
1Integrated Sunshades*
Use the sunshades only when the windows are fully closed. Using the shade while a window is open can unhook and blow off the shade, hitting and hurting anyone sitting near the window.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 206
Pull the tab and roll up the sunshade all the way. Use the hooks to hang it.
Integrated Sunshades*
Tab
Hook
* Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items C
o n
tro ls
1Front Seat Heaters*
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
After a certain period of time, the strength setting for the seat heaters will automatically be reduced by one level at a time until the seat heater shuts off. The elapsed time varies according to the interior environment.
3WARNING Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 207
The seat heaters can be used when the power mode is in ON.
Press the seat heater button: Once - The HI setting (three indicators on) Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on) Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on) Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)
When the power mode is turned on after it is turned off, the previous setting is maintained.
Front Seat Heaters*
Continued 207* Not available on all models
uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items
208
C o
n tro
ls
1Front Seat Heaters/Ventilators*
Do not use the seat heaters and the seat ventilation even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
After a certain period of time, the strength setting for the seat heaters will automatically be reduced by one level at a time until the seat heater shuts off. The elapsed time varies according to the interior environment.
3WARNING Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 208
The seat heaters or ventilators can be used when the power mode is in ON. The seat heaters: Use them to warm up the seat. The seat ventilators: Use them when you want to ventilate the surface of the seats. The lower you set the air conditioning temperature, the more you will feel the effect of the seat ventilation. Press the seat heater or the seat ventilator button: Once - The HI setting (three indicators on) Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on) Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on) Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)
When the power mode is turned on after it is turned off, the previous setting is maintained.
Front Seat Heaters/Ventilators*
* Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items C
o n
tro ls
1Rear Outer Seat Heaters*
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
After a certain period of time, the strength setting for the rear seat heaters will automatically be reduced by one level at a time until the rear seat heater shuts off. The elapsed time varies according to the interior environment.
3WARNING Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 209
The power mode must be in ON to use the seat heaters.
There is no heater in the rear center seating position. Press the seat heater button: Once - The HI setting (three indicators on) Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on) Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on) Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)
When the power mode is turned on after it is turned off, the previous setting is maintained.
Rear Outer Seat Heaters*
Continued 209* Not available on all models
uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items
210
C o
n tro
ls
1Heated Steering Wheel*
Do not use the heated steering wheel continuously when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 210
The power mode must be in ON to use the heated steering wheel.
Press the button on the right side of the steering wheel.
When a comfortable temperature is reached, press the button again to turn it off.
The heated steering wheel is turned off every time you start the engine, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle.
Heated Steering Wheel*
Indicator
Heated Steering Wheel Button
* Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items C
o n
tro ls
1Cargo Hooks
Heavy objects may damage the hook. Make sure any items put on this hook weigh less than 6.6 lbs (3 kg).
Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the cargo area, placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far forward as possible.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 211
The tie-down anchors on the cargo area floor can be used to install a net for securing items.
The cargo hooks on both sides of the cargo area can be used to hang a light items.
Tie-down Anchors
Anchor
Anchor
Cargo Hooks
Continued 211
212
uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items
C o
n tro
ls
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 212
Pull the handle to open the cargo floor lid.
Under-floor Storage Area
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 213
Climate Control System
o n
tro ls
1Using Automatic Climate Control
If any buttons are pressed while using the climate control system in auto, the function of the button that was pressed will take priority. The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions unrelated to the button that was pressed will be controlled automatically.
During Auto Idle Stop, air-conditioning is suspended, and only the blower remains active. If you do not want air-conditioning suspended, press the Auto Idle Stop OFF button to cancel Auto Idle Stop.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the fan may operate at low speed for a while after the AUTO button has been pressed.
While ECON mode is active, the climate control system may have reduced cooling performance.
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows, turning the system on auto, and setting the temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
Using Automatic Climate Control The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select. The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that will as quickly as possible, raise or lower the interior temperature to your preference.
Use the system when the engine is running. 1. Press the AUTO button. 2. Adjust the interior temperature using the drivers side or passengers side
temperature control switch. 3. Press the ON/OFF button to cancel.
Floor and defroster vents
Floor ventsDashboard and floor, and back of the center console vents
Dashboard and back of the center console vents
AUTO Button
Drivers Side Temperature Control Switch
(Recirculation) Button
Fan Control Button
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Passengers Side Temperature Control Switch
(On/Off) Button
(Windshield Defroster) Button
SYNC (Synchronization) Button
213Continued
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
214
C o
n tro
ls
1Using Automatic Climate Control
Pressing the ON/OFF button switches the climate control system between on and off. When turned on, the system returns to your last selection.
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower limit. When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the windshield may fog up.
If you press the button during Auto Idle Stop, the engine restarts automatically.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that the air hits the side windows.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 214
Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes Press the button and switch the mode depending on environmental conditions. Recirculation Mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicles interior through the system. Fresh Air Mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in normal situations.
Pressing the button turns the air conditioner system on and automatically switches the system to fresh air mode.
Press the button again to turn off, the system returns to the previous settings.
Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control C
o n
tro ls
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting or defogging the windows, switch over to fresh air mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes visibility.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 215
To rapidly defrost the windows 1. Press the button. 2. Press the button.
215
216
uuClimate Control SystemuSynchronization Mode
C o
n tro
ls
1Synchronization Mode
When you press the button, the system changes to synchronization mode.
When the system is in synchronization mode off, the temperature for the driver, front passenger, and rear seats can be set separately.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 216
Synchronization Mode
You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side, front passenger side and rear seats in synchronization mode.
1. Press the SYNC button. u The system will switch to synchronization mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using drivers side temperature control switch.
Press the SYNC button to return to synchronization mode off.
uuClimate Control SystemuRear Climate Control System C
o n
tro ls
1Rear Climate Control System
LOCK appears on the rear control panel while the rear lock is on.
If the rear lock is on while in SYNC mode, the rear control panel is disabled. LOCK SYNC appears on the rear control panel.
Models with rear lock button
1Using the Rear Climate Control System From the Front Panel
Press the REAR LOCK button to turn the rear lock mode on and off. While the rear lock mode is on, the rear control panel is disabled. uREAR LOCK appears on the display.
When the rear fan is set to maximum speed, Auto Idle Stop does not activate. uAuto Idle Stop may not activate under other
conditions when the rear climate control system is in use.
Models with rear lock button
REAR LOCK Button
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 217
Rear Climate Control System
Use the system when the engine is running and the climate control system is operating. 1. Press the REAR (Rear On/Off) button. 2. Press the RR SETTINGS button. u The system switches to the rear control mode for 10 seconds. The REAR
indicator appears on the display.
Using the Rear Climate Control System From the Front Panel
(Rear On/Off) Button RR SETTINGS Button
217Continued
uuClimate Control SystemuRear Climate Control System
218
C o
n tro
ls
1Using the Rear Climate Control System From the Rear Panel*
When the REAR LOCK button on the front control panel is off, the temperature of the rear passenger compartment can be controlled independently.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 218
3. Press the AUTO button. u The rear system changes to AUTO mode. u The system automatically adjusts the fan speed and airflow levels to maintain
the set rear temperature. Change the temperature if necessary. 4. To turn off the rear climate control system, press the (Rear On/Off) button.
Use the system when the engine is running and the climate control system is operating. 1. Press the (Rear On/Off) button. 2. Press the Rear AUTO button. 3. Adjust the interior temperature using the rear temperature control button. 4. To turn off the rear climate control system, press the button.
Using the Rear Climate Control System From the Rear Panel*
Rear floor vents
Rear console vents and floor vents
Rear console vents
/ (Rear Fan Control) Buttons
(Rear On/Off) Button
Rear Temperature Control Buttons
Rear AUTO Button
* Not available on all models
uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors C
o n
tro ls
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 219
Automatic Climate Control Sensors The automatic climate control system is equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill any liquid on them.
Sensor
Sensor
219
220
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 220
t blank.
* Not available on all m
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 221
Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.
Audio System About Your Audio System................ 222 USB Ports ......................................... 223 Auxiliary Input Jack .......................... 224 Audio System Theft Protection ......... 225 Audio Remote Controls.................... 226
Audio System Basic Operation............. 228 Audio Error Messages
iPod/USB Flash Drive ........................ 302 Android/Apps .................................. 304
odels
General Information on the Audio System SiriusXM Radio Service* ................. 305 Compatible iPod, iPad, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives .................................... 306
Honda App License Agreement........ 307 Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/ Android Auto................................. 319
About Open Source Licenses............ 321 License Information.......................... 322
Customized Features ........................ 327 HomeLink Universal Transceiver*.. 346
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink............. 349
221
222
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 222
Audio System
1About Your Audio System
SiriusXM Radio is available on a subscription basis only. For more information on SiriusXM Radio, contact a dealer.*
2 General Information on the Audio System P. 305
SiriusXM Radio is available in the United States and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.*
SiriusXM is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio, Inc.*
iPod, iPad, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
After you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF, you can use the audio system for up to 30 minutes per driving cycle, or until opening the driver's door. However, whether you can continue using the audio system depends on the battery condition. Repeatedly using this feature may drain the battery.
About Your Audio System The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM Radio* service. It can also play USB flash drives, iPod, iPhone, iPad and Bluetooth devices.
You can operate the audio system from the knobs on the panel, the remote controls on the steering wheel, or the icons on the touchscreen interface.
Remote Controls iPod
USB Flash Drive
* Not available on all models
uuAudio SystemuUSB Ports Featu
res
1USB Ports
Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may damage it.
We recommend that you use a USB cable if you are attaching a USB flash drive to the USB port.
Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a hub. Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard disk
drive, as the device or your files may be damaged. We recommend backing up your data before using
the device in your vehicle. Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.
The USB port can supply up to 2.5A of power. It does not output 2.5A unless requested by the device. For amperage details, read the operating manual of the device that needs to be charged.
This port is for battery charge only. You cannot play music even if you have connected a music player to it.
USB charge
In the console compartment
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 223
USB Ports On the console panel The USB port (2.5A) is for charging devices, playing audio files and connecting compatible phones with Apple CarPlay or Android Auto. u To prevent any potential issues, be sure
to use an Apple MFi Certified Lightning Connector for Apple CarPlay, and for Android Auto, the USB cables should be certified by USB-IF to be compliant with USB 2.0 Standard.
In the console compartment The USB port (2.5A) is only for charging devices.
On the console panel
In the console compartment
223Continued
uuAudio SystemuAuxiliary Input Jack
224
Featu res
1USB Ports
These ports are for battery charge only. You cannot play music even if you have connected a music player to them.
Under certain conditions, a device connected to the port may generate noise in the radio you are listening to.
On the back of the console compartment
1Auxiliary Input Jack
To switch to another mode or return to the AUX mode, select the audio source icon.
You cannot use the auxiliary input jack if you replace the audio system.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 224
On the back of the console compartment*
The USB ports (2.5A) are only for charging devices.
Auxiliary Input Jack Use the jack to connect devices.
1. Open the cover. 2. Connect a device to the input jack using a
1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo miniplug. u The audio system automatically switches
to the AUX mode.
On the back of the console compartment
USB Ports
* Not available on all models
uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 225
Audio System Theft Protection The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.
Reactivating the audio system 1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Turn on the audio system. 3. Press and hold the audio system power button for more than two seconds. u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a
connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.
225
226
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Featu res
1Audio Remote Controls
Some modes appear only when an appropriate device or medium is used.
Depending on the Bluetooth device you connect, some functions may not be available.
Press the (back) button to go back to the previous screen or cancel a command.
Press the (home) button to go back to the home screen of the driver information interface.
You can show or hide the audio mode icons, or change the order of the icons.
2 Show/Hide Apps P. 119 2 Arrange Apps P. 120
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 226
Audio Remote Controls Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. The information is shown on the driver information interface.
(+ / (- (Volume) Bar Press (+ : To increase the volume. Press (- : To decrease the volume.
ENTER Button
(+/ (- Bar
/ / / Buttons 3 4
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 227
/ / / /ENTER Buttons When selecting the audio mode
Press or to select Now Playing on the home screen of the driver information interface, and then press the ENTER button.
Press or : To cycles through the audio modes as follows: Android Auto/Apple CarPlaySiriusXM
*AUX InputAM Bluetooth AudioSocial PlaylistFMMy Honda MusicUSB/iPod
When listening to the radio Press : To select the next preset radio station. Press : To select the previous preset radio station.
When listening to an iPod, USB flash drive, My Honda Music, or Bluetooth Audio Press : To skip to the next song. Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
3 4
3 4
3 4
227* Not available on all models
228
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 228
Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON. : Select to go to the home screen.
2 Switching the Display P. 229
: Select to go back to the previous display when it is displayed.
: Select to change the audio/information screen brightness. Select once and select or to make an adjustment. u Each time you select , the mode
switches among the daytime mode, nighttime mode and off mode.
(Day/Night) Icon
(Home) Icon
(Back) Icon
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu
res
1Audio/Information Screen
Touchscreen Operation Use simple gestures - including touching, swiping,
and scrolling - to operate certain audio functions. Some items may be grayed out during driving to
reduce the potential for distraction. You can select them when the vehicle is stopped or
use voice commands. Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen
response.
You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting. 2 Customized Features P. 327
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 229
Audio/Information Screen Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various setup options.
Using the audio/information screen
Select to go to the home screen. Select the following icons on the home screen or after selecting All Apps.
Switching the Display
Home Screen
Models without navigation system
Models with navigation system
(Home) Icon
All Apps
229Continued
230
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 230
Phone Displays the HFL information.
2 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 349
Trip Computer Displays the trip computer information. Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information. Trip A/Trip B tab: Displays information for the current and three previous drives.
The information is stored every time you reset Trip A/B. To reset Trip A/B, select Reset. To change the setting of how to reset Trip A/B, select Settings, then select Trip A Reset Method or Trip B Reset Method.
Clock Displays the clock.
System Updates Updates the software version of the audio system.
2 System Updates P. 242
FM/AM/Sirius XM*/USB/Bluetooth Audio/AUX Input/My Honda Music/ Social Playlist
Displays the audio information.
Settings Enters the customizing menu screen.
2 Customized Features P. 327
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 231
Navigation*
Displays the navigation screen. 2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
HondaLink Displays the HondaLink screen.
2 HondaLink P. 287
Apple CarPlay/Android Auto Displays the Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.
2 Apple CarPlay P. 295 2 Android Auto P. 298
Messages Displays the text message screen.
2 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 349
AT&T Hotspot*
Displays the AT&T Hotspot screen. 2 AT&T Hotspot* P. 293
File Manager Displays the file manager screen.
2 File Manager P. 248
231Continued* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
232
Featu res
1Wallpaper Setup
The wallpaper you set up on Clock Faces cannot be displayed on the driver information interface. The file name must be fewer than 255 characters. The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP, GIF, JPEG, PNG, or WebP. If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No Data message appears.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 232
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
Import wallpaper 1. Connect the USB flash drive to the front
USB port. 2 USB Ports P. 223
2. Select Clock. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Clock Faces. 5. Select Add More. u The File Manager screen is displayed.
6. Import a desired picture. 2 How to Transfer a File P. 248
u The display will return to the Clock Faces screen.
Wallpaper Setup
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 233
Select wallpaper 1. Select Clock. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Clock Faces. 4. Select a desired wallpaper. u The preview is displayed on the screen.
5. Select Save. u The display will return to the clock screen.
To view wallpaper once it is set 1. Select . 2. Select Clock.
Delete wallpaper 1. Select Clock. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Clock Faces. 4. Select Delete Photos. u The File Manager screen is displayed.
5. Delete a picture. 2 How to Delete a File P. 251
u The display will return to the Clock Faces screen.
233Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
234
Featu res
1Home Screen
The home screen has 5 pages. You cannot add any more pages.
Select to go directly back to the first page of the home screen from any page.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 234
To change to a next screen
Selecting or , or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.
Home Screen
Swipe
Icon> Icon< Current page position
< >
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu
res
1To add app icons on the home screen
Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this occurs, you need to reset the system.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 345
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 345
In case those apps still do not start up normally even after Factory Data Reset, contact your dealer.
If a browser shuts down mid-use, the screen will return to the screen viewed prior to the browser startup.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 235
To add app icons on the home screen App icons can be added on the home screen.
1. Select . 2. Select All Apps. 3. Check the box of the app you want to add. u The app icon will be added on the home
screen.
Check Box
All Apps Icon
Continued 235
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
236
Featu res
1To move icons on the home screen
Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 236
To move icons on the home screen You can change location on the home screen.
1. Select and hold an icon. u The screen switches to the customization
screen. 2. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be. 3. Select Done. u The screen will return to the home
screen.
Select and hold.
Drag and drop.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu
res
1To remove icons on the home screen
Apps will not be deleted by deleting the icon on the home screen.
Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 237
To remove icons on the home screen You can delete the icons on the home screen.
1. Select and hold an icon. u The screen switches to the customization
screen. 2. Drag and drop the icon you want to remove
to the Hide icon. u The icon is removed from the home
screen. 3. Select Done. u The screen will return to the home
screen.
Select and hold.
Drag and drop to Hide icon.
Continued 237
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
238
Featu res
1To create shortcuts for apps displayed on the home screen
Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 238
To create shortcuts for apps displayed on the home screen Three shortcut icons for accessing apps displayed on the home screen are displayed in the upper left area of the screen. You can replace any of these shortcut icons with an icon of your preference.
1. From the home screen, select and hold the icon that you want to store in the upper left of the screen. u The screen will switch to the
customization screen. 2. Drag the icon over to the upper left of the
screen and drop it over the icon that you want to replace. u The new icon will appear in place of the
old icon. 3. Select Done. u The screen will return to the home
screen.
Select and hold.
Drag and drop to preset icon.
Preset Icons
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 239
1. Select the system status icon. u The status area appears.
2. Select an item to see the details. 3. Select or the system status icon to close
the area.
Status Area
System Status Icon
Status Area
239Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
240
Featu res
1Updating Apps
The wireless updates are for the apps on the audio system only.
To update compatible apps on your iPhone or Android phone, please visit the App Store or Google Play Store, respectively.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 240
Some of the audio systems apps can be updated wirelessly when connected via Wi- Fi, or Bluetooth in conjunction with the HondaLink app installed on a compatible iOS or Android device. If an update is available, a notification is displayed at the top of the screen with the respective apps update icon.
To update an app: 1. A notification appears and notifies you of
an update message on the header area.
2. Select the system status icon, and then select the software update notification from the list.
Updating Apps
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 241
3. Select Download.
4. Select OK. u A notification appears on the screen if
the update is successful. Select OK. u Restart the engine for the update to be
applied.
241
242
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
Featu res
1Wireless connection mode setup
If your vehicle has a telematics control unit (TCU), you do not need the wireless connection mode setup.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 242
System Updates The audio systems firmware can be updated with a Wi-Fi connection or with a USB device.
Wireless connection mode setup 1. Select . 2. Select System Updates. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Connection Setup.
5. Select Change Mode. 6. Select Network, then Save. u The display returns to the network list.
7. Select an access point from the network list, then Connect. u If the audio system requires a password,
enter a password.
How to Update Wirelessly
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 243
How to update When the audio system update is available, the notification is shown on the audio/ information screen. Use the following procedure to update the system.
1. Select . 2. Select System Updates.
3. Select via Wireless. 4. Select Download Now. u A notification appears on the screen.
Notification
243Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
244
Featu res
1How to update
If Install while Vehicle OFF is selected and the user turns the vehicle back on after the update has been completed, for 3 to 5 minutes the system will rebuild the applications, during which time the Honda logo will be displayed.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 244
5. Select Install Now or Install while Vehicle OFF. u A notification appears on the screen if
the update is successful.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 245
Automatic download settings Use the following procedure to change to the automatic download setting.
1. Select . 2. Select System Updates. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Auto Download. 5. Select the access point, then Allow.
View an update result Use the following procedure to confirm the update result.
1. Select . 2. Select System Updates. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Update Result.
245Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
246
Featu res
1How to Update with a USB Device
A USB device with a minimum of 8 GB of free space or more is recommended.
Be sure to delete any previous inventory or update files from the USB before starting the USB update process.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 246
Download the update files from the server 1. Select . 2. Select System Updates. 3. Select via USB. u A notification appears on the screen.
4. Connect a USB device into the front USB port. u The inventory data is copied into the USB
device. 2 USB Ports P. 223
5. Remove the USB device from the USB port. 6. Connect the USB device into your
computer, and then download the update files. u Follow the link to download the required
software update files. Refer to https://usb.honda.com for instructions.
How to Update with a USB Device
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates Featu
res
1Update the audio system
If Install while Vehicle OFF is selected and the user turns the vehicle back on after the update has been completed, for 3 to 5 minutes the system will rebuild the applications, during which time the Honda logo will be displayed.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 247
Update the audio system 1. Select . 2. Select System Updates. 3. Select via USB. u A notification appears on the screen.
4. Connect the USB device with the update files into the USB port. u A notification appears on the screen.
2 USB Ports P. 223
5. Select Install Now or Install while Vehicle OFF. u A notification appears on the screen if
the update is successful.
247
248
uuAudio System Basic OperationuFile Manager
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 248
File Manager Allows you to transfer image or audio files to the audio system with a USB device.
1. Connect a USB device into the USB port. 2 USB Ports P. 223
2. Select , then select All Apps. 3. Select File Manager. 4. Select Transfer Content.
To transfer a selected file: 5. Select Select Files to Transfer.
How to Transfer a File
uuAudio System Basic OperationuFile Manager Featu
res
1How to Transfer a File
To switch the view method, select List or Thumbnail on the upper right of the screen.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 249
6. Select the file or folder you want to transfer.
7. Select OK.
8. Select Transfer. u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Continue. u A notification appears on the screen if
the transfer is successful. Then, the display will return to the File Manager screen.
Continued 249
uuAudio System Basic OperationuFile Manager
250
Featu res
1How to Transfer a File
To switch the view method, select List or Thumbnail on the upper right of the screen.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 250
To transfer all files: 5. Select Transfer All Content.
6. Select Transfer. u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Continue. u A notification appears on the screen if
the transfer is successful. Then, the display will return to the File Manager screen.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuFile Manager Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 251
1. Select , then select All Apps. 2. Select File Manager. 3. Select Delete Content.
To delete a selected file: 4. Select Select Files to Delete.
How to Delete a File
251Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuFile Manager
252
Featu res
1How to Transfer a File
To switch the view method, select List or Thumbnail on the upper right of the screen.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 252
5. Select the file or folder you want to delete. 6. Select OK.
7. Select Delete. u A notification appears on the screen if
the deletion is successful. Then, the display will return to the File Manager screen.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuFile Manager Featu
res
1How to Transfer a File
To switch the view method, select List or Thumbnail on the upper right of the screen.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 253
To delete all files: 4. Select Delete All Content.
5. Select Delete. u A notification appears on the screen if
the transfer is successful. Then, the display will return to the File Manager screen.
253
254
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Featu res
1Adjusting the Sound
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.
You can also adjust the sound the following procedure. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Sound.
To reset each setting for Bass / Treble, Center / Subwoofer Volume and Balance / Fader, select Reset.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 254
Adjusting the Sound 1. Select . 2. Select an audio source icon. 3. Select Sound.
Select an item from the following choices: Bass / Treble: Treble, Midrange, Bass Center / Subwoofer Volume: Center*,
Subwoofer Balance / Fader: Balance, Fader Audio Zones*: Driver Only, Front Only,
Rear Only, Full Vehicle Speed Volume Compensation: Speed
Volume Compensation (SVC) DTS Neural Surround*: DTS Neural
SurroundTM
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup Featu
res
1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner.
To reset the settings, select Reset.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 255
Display Setup You can change the brightness of the audio/information screen.
1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Display. 4. Select Day Mode or Night Mode. 5. Select the setting you want. 6. Select Save.
Changing the Screen Brightness
255Continued
256
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 256
Select the current source icon, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Selecting an Audio Source
Limitations for Manual Operation
Select the source icon Source Select Screen
Source List Icons
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation Featu
res
1Voice Control Operation
When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks what you would like to do. Press and release the button again to bypass this prompt and give a command.
1Voice Recognition
The voice control system can only be used from the drivers seat because the microphone unit removes noises from the front passengers side.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 257
Voice Control Operation Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation. The voice control system uses the (talk) and (back) buttons on the steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.
To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system: Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are
using. The system recognizes only certain commands. Available voice commands:
2 Voice Portal Screen P. 258
Close the windows and moonroof*. Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone
on the ceiling. Speak clearly in a clear, natural speaking voice without pausing between words. Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your
command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.
Voice Recognition
257Continued* Not available on all models
258
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 258
When the (talk) button is pressed, available voice commands appear on the screen. For a complete list of commands, say Voice Help after the beep.
The system only recognizes the commands on the following pages, at certain screens. Free-form voice commands are not recognized.
*1: Models with navigation system
Voice Portal Screen
* Not available on all models
Phone These commands can only be used when a phone is connected. When the system recognizes a phone command, the screen will change to the dedicated phone voice recognition screen. Call
Audio When the system recognizes an audio command, the screen will change to the dedicated audio voice recognition screen. FM AM USB Sirius XM*
My Honda Music
Navigation*1
The screen changes to the navigation screen.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Voice Help Readout voice guidance for Help on the current screen.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 259
The system will accept these commands when on the dedicated phone voice recognition screen. Call
Phone Commands
* Not available on all models
The system will accept these commands when on the dedicated audio voice recognition screen.
FM Commands Tune to <87.7-107.9> FM
AM Commands Tune to <530-1710> AM
Sirius XM Commands*
Channel <1-999> Channel
USB/My Honda Music Commands Play Artist Play Album Play Genre Play Playlist Play Music Play Song
Audio Commands
259
260
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Featu res
Audio/Information Screen
Preset Icons Tune the radio frequency for preset memory. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station. Select to display preset 5 onwards.>
Settings Icon Select whether to tune to HD RadioTM* automatically.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 260
Playing AM/FM Radio
(Back) Icon Select to go back to the previous display.
Seek Icons Select or to search up and down the selected band for a station with a strong signal.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Push to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
Tune Icon Select to use the on-screen keyboard for entering the radio frequency directly.
Scan Icon Select to scan each station with a strong signal.
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Featu
res
1Preset Memory
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode Press the or button on the steering wheel or select the audio source icon on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 226
You can store 12 AM/FM stations into preset memory.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD RadioTM and the HD, HD Radio, and Arc logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
3 4
Models with HD RadioTM feature
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 261
To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Lists the strongest stations on the selected band. 1. Select Station List to display a list. 2. Select the station.
Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Select Station List to display a list. 2. Select Refresh.
Preset Memory
Station List
Continued 261
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
262
Featu res
1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 262
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn off scan, select Stop or .
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
To find an RDS station from Station List 1. Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station. 2. Select the station.
Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station. 2. Select Refresh.
Displays the subchannel list when an HD RadioTM station is selected while listening to an FM station. 1. Select HD Radio Channels. 2. Select the channel number.
Scan
Radio Data System (RDS)
HD Subchannel
Models with HD RadioTM feature
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio* Featu
res
Audio/Information Screen
Preset Icons Tune the radio frequency for preset memory. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station. Select to display preset 5 onwards.
>
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 263
Playing SiriusXM Radio*
(Back) Icon Select to go back to the previous display.
Channel Icons Select or to the previous or next channel. Select and hold to rapidly skip 10 channels at a time.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Push to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
Category Icons Select or to display and select a SiriusXM Radio category.
Album Art
Station Art
263Continued* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio*
264
Featu res
1Playing SiriusXM Radio*
In the channel mode, all available channels are selectable. In the category mode, you can select a channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
There may be instances when SiriusXM Radio does not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This does not indicate a problem with your audio system.
SiriusXM Radio stations load in ascending order, which can take about a minute. Once they have loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make your selections.
Switching the Audio Mode Press the or button on the steering wheel or select the audio source icon on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 226
Tune Start: When you change to a preset channel, a song being played on that channel restarts from the beginning with this function. This can be turned on or off by the following procedure. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Tune Start. 3. Select ON or OFF.
To change a category, select Category icons, or select More and then select Category List.
3 4
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 264
1. Select Settings. 2. Select Tune Mode. 3. Select All Channels or Within Category.
To Change the Tune Mode
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio* Featu
res
1Preset Memory
You can store 12 SiriusXM channels into the preset memory.
1Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)
TuneMix: The multi-channel preset function can be turned on or off by the following procedure. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select TuneMix. 3. Select ON or OFF.
When you want to replace the channel, select Replace Preset. If you want to delete a channel, select Edit TuneMix, and then select the channel you want to delete.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 265
To store a channel: 1. Tune to the selected channel. 2. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Multi-channel preset (for music channels only) You can store up to 10 of your preferred music channels per preset.
1. Tune a station. 2. Select and hold the preset number you
want to add a music channel. 3. Select Add to TuneMix or Create
TuneMix. u A message appears if there are no
available presets.
Preset Memory
Continued 265
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio*
266
Featu res
1Listening to Featured Channels
Up to three featured channels by SiriusXM can be displayed.
Featured channel lists are at the top of the channel list.
To switch the sorting method, select Number, Name or Category on the upper right of the screen.
Select Keypad to use the on-screen keyboard for entering the channel number directly.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 266
Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM can be displayed and selected. 1. Select Channel List. 2. Select the featured channel list title you want to listen to. u The selected channel list of the title is displayed.
3. Select the channel.
Listening to Featured Channels
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio* Featu
res
1Replay Function
The system starts storing broadcast in memory when the power mode is turned ON. You can go back to the program from that point.
You can no longer replay any program once the power mode is turned off as it erases memory. You can check how long the program has been stored in memory from the audio/information screen.
After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will automatically start deleting the oldest data.
(A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is behind the real-time broadcast (B): Replayed segment (C): Length stored in memory (D): Play/Pause icon
Audio/Information Screen
(C) (B)
(A)
(D)
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 267
The system can record up to the last 60 minutes broadcast of your currently tuned channel as well as the last 30 minutes broadcast of preset channels, starting from the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to preset channel, the system records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You can rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast.
Move the position you want to replay by selecting or .
To play or pause on playback mode, select the play/pause icon.
Returning to real-time broadcast Select and hold .
Replay Function
Continued 267
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio*
268
Featu res
1Live Sports Alert
The sports alert function is active during SiriusXM mode only.
1To set up a favorite team
Sports alerts cut in only when SiriusXM mode is on.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 268
While listening to other channels, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from your favorite teams.
To set up a favorite team 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Sports Notifications Setup. 3. Select Favorite Teams. 4. Select + Add Favorite Team. 5. Select a team.
To set up an alert message 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Sports Notifications Setup. 3. Select Notifications. 4. Select Game Notifications or SportsFlash Game Play Notifications. 5. Select Notifications. 6. Select On. 7. Select a favorite team.
Live Sports Alert
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio* Featu
res
1Traffic and Weather Information
The traffic and weather information function is active during SiriusXM mode only.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 269
You can receive traffic and weather information. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Traffic & Weather Setup. 3. Select Selected City. 4. Select the region. u When you do not want to receive the information, select Reset Location.
Traffic and Weather Information
Continued 269
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio*
270
Featu res
1Channel Schedule
Select Keypad to use the on-screen keyboard for entering the channel number directly.
1To set up an alert message
The alert function is active during SiriusXM mode only.
Selecting Just Once disables the alert feature next time you turn the power mode to ON.
If you want to delete the alert, select Remove Alert.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 270
You can view a channel schedule or receive an alert when your favorite program is about to start.
To view a channel schedule 1. Select More. 2. Select Channel Schedule.
To set up an alert message 1. Select More. 2. Select Channel Schedule. 3. Select a program. 4. Select Set Program Alert. 5. Select Just Once or Every Time.
Channel Schedule
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio* Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 271
You can change settings for the alert function.
To enable the alert function 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Manage Program Alerts. 3. Select Notifications. 4. Select ON or OFF.
To remove an alert 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Manage Program Alerts. 3. Select Alerts Set. 4. Select on the alert you want to delete. u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Delete.
Manage Program Alert
271Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM Radio*
272
Featu res
1Scan
The Scan Songs in Presets function is based on TuneScanTM technology of SiriusXM.
The Featured Channels function is based on Featured FavoritesTM technology of SiriusXM.
TuneScanTM and Featured FavoritesTM are registered trademarks of SiriusXM Radio, Inc.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 272
Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds. 1. Select More. 2. Select Scan.
You can change a scan mode by the following procedure. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Scan Mode. 3. Select Channel or Preset.
To turn off scan, select Stop.
Scan
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod Featu
resAudio/Information Screen
Play/Pause Icon
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 273
Playing an iPod Connect the iPod using your USB connector to the USB port, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Ports P. 223
(Back) Icon Select to go back to the previous display.
Track Icons Select or to change songs. Select and hold to move rapidly within a song.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Push to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
Cover Art
273Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
274
Featu res
1Playing an iPod
Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicles audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 302
If you operate the music app on your iPhone/iPod while the phone is connected to the audio system, you may no longer be able to operate the same app on the audio/information screen. Reconnect the device if necessary.
If an iPhone is connected via Apple CarPlay, the iPod/ USB source will be unavailable and audio files on the phone will be playable only within Apple CarPlay.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 274
1. Select Browse. 2. Select the items on that menu.
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod Featu
res
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in random order.
Repeat Song: Repeats the current track.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 275
You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file. Select or .
To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.
How to Select a Play Mode
275
276
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Featu res
Track Icons Select or to change files. Select and hold to move rapidly within a track.
Audio/Information Screen
Play/Pause Icon
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 276
Playing a USB Flash Drive Your audio system reads and plays audio files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA, or AAC*1 format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Ports P. 223
*1: Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
(Back) Icon Select to go back to the previous display.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Push to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive Featu
res
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 305
WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays The selected file cannot be played on this system, then skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 302
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 277
1. Select Browse. 2. Select the items on that menu.
How to Select a File from the Music Search List
Continued 277
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
278
Featu res
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Random/Repeat
Random in Category: Plays all files in the current category in random order.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 278
You can select repeat and random modes when playing a file. Random/Repeat Select or .
To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.
How to Select a Play Mode
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying My Honda Music Featu
res
Track Icons Select or to change files. Select and hold to move rapidly within a track.
Audio/Information Screen
Play/Pause Icon
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 279
Playing My Honda Music My Honda Music plays audio files that have been imported from a USB flash drive. Your audio system supports audio files in either MP3, WMA, or AAC*1 format.
2 File Manager P. 248
*1: Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
(Back) Icon Select to go back to the previous display.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Push to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
279Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying My Honda Music
280
Featu res
1How to Transfer an Audio File
If there is no audio file in your audio system, the system will automatically proceed to step 3 after connecting a USB device.
Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 305
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 280
1. Connect a USB device into the USB port. 2 USB Ports P. 223
2. Select More. 3. Select Import Files to My Honda Music. u The File Manager screen is displayed.
4. Transfer an audio file to your audio system. 2 How to Transfer a File P. 248
How to delete an audio file 1. Select More. 2. Select Delete Files from My Honda Music. u The File Manager screen is displayed.
3. Delete an audio file. 2 How to Delete a File P. 251
How to Transfer an Audio File
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying My Honda Music Featu
res
1Playing My Honda Music
WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays The selected file cannot be played on this system, then skips to the next file.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 281
1. Select Browse. 2. Select the items on that menu.
How to Select a File from the Music Search List
Continued 281
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying My Honda Music
282
Featu res
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Random/Repeat
Random in Category: Plays all files in the current category in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 282
You can select repeat and random modes when playing a file. Random/Repeat Select or .
To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.
How to Select a Play Mode
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio Featu
res
1Playing Bluetooth Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones: U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876. Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
It may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.
Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there is more than one paired phone in the vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is automatically connected.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there may be a delay before the system begins to play.
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly.
Some functions may not be available on some devices.
If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, Bluetooth Audio from that phone will be unavailable. However, you can have a second previously paired phone stream Bluetooth Audio by selecting from the Bluetooth device list.
2 Phone Setup P. 354
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 283
Playing Bluetooth Audio Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 354
*1: Depending on the Bluetooth device you connect, this function may not be displayed.
Audio/Information Screen
(Back) Icon Select to go back to the previous display.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Push to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
Repeat Icon*1
Select to repeat the current file.
Random Icon*1
Select to play all files in the current category in random order.
Play/Pause Icon
Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
Track Icons Select or to change tracks.
283Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio
284
Featu res
1To Play Bluetooth Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone makers operating instructions.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.
You can change the connected phone by selecting Change Device.
2 Phone Setup P. 354
1Searching for Music
Depending on the Bluetooth device you connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 284
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to the system.
2 Phone Setup P. 354
2. Select the Bluetooth Audio mode.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL- compatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth Audio, may already be connected.
To pause or resume a file Select the play/pause icon.
1. Select Browse. 2. Select a search category (e.g., Albums). 3. Select an item. u The selection begins playing.
To Play Bluetooth Audio Files
Searching for Music
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Social Playlist Featu
res
1Playing Social Playlist
For more information, check the Honda CabinControl smartphone app instruction manual.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 285
Playing Social Playlist The Honda CabinControlTM smartphone app allows users to share audio files from their devices to Social Playlist. Unfortunately, the driver cannot select the audio files from the audio/information screen. The driver can play in order of their choice only if they individually select each song in the queue. The driver cannot rearrange the order of the playlist.
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 292
(Back) Icon Select to go back to the previous display.
Track Icons Select or to change files.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Push to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
Audio/Information Screen
Play/Pause Icon
Repeat Icon Select to repeat the current file.
Random Icon Select to play all files in random order.
Remove Icon Select to remove the file from the playlist.
285Continued
286
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Social Playlist
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 286
1. Select . 2. Select Social Playlist. 3. Select Queue. To play a file on the playlist: u Select the file.
To remove a file from the playlist: u Select on the file.
To clear the playlist: u Select Clear, and then select Request
Songs to reload a playlist. To check the connected device: u Select Devices List.
How to Edit the Playlist
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink Featu
res
1HondaLink
The HondaLink connect app is compatible with most iPhone and Android phones.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phones data subscription package.
When Apple CarPlay or Android Auto is connected to the audio system, HondaLink can be accessed even without a Wi-Fi connection.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 287
HondaLink HondaLink connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth.
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 292 2 Phone Setup P. 354
Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink service.
To enable the HondaLink service You must consent to location sharing to enable the HondaLink service.
Disable: Does not allow this consent. Enable Once: Allows only one time. (Shows again next time.) Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Never show again.)
To Connect to HondaLink Service
287Continued
288
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 288
To link with HondaLink You may see the connection guide screen after launching HondaLink when there is no connection available.
Vehicle Displays instruction messages when the vehicle needs service.
Help & Support Displays tips for vehicle usage, and get support via roadside or customer service center.
HondaLink Menu
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 289
Messages from Honda Displays helpful and important information from Honda.
You can check the messages that are received quickly in the shortcut operation. 1. A notification appears and notifies you of a
new message in the header area.
2. A notification is continuously displayed in the header area until the new message is read.
Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips
Notification
289Continued
290
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 290
3. Select the system status icon to see the messages.
4. Select a new message to open.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink Featu
res
1Operator Assistance*
Remain attentive to road conditions and driving during operator assistance.
If you want to add or renew a subscription, call the Operator Assistance. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select Subscription. 5. Select HondaLink Subscription Status.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 291
Connect to the HondaLink operator when trying to find a destination or for roadside assistance.
1. Press the LINK button. u Connection to the operator begins.
2. Talk to the operator. u To disconnect, select Hang Up on the
audio/information screen or press the button on the steering wheel.
Operator Assistance*
LINK Button
Audio/information screen when connected to the HondaLink operator.
291* Not available on all models
292
uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection
Featu res
1Wi-Fi Connection
Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance.
1Connect the vehicle to a Wi-Fi hotspot
You cannot go through the setting procedure while the vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to setup the Wi-Fi connection.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phones data subscription package.
Check your phone manual to find out if the phone has Wi-Fi connectivity.
You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or off with the icon on the Wi-Fi network list. Transmission speed and others will not be displayed on this screen.
In case of Wi-Fi connection with your phone, make sure your phones Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 292
Wi-Fi Connection This vehicle is equipped with Wi-Fi connectivity. You can connect to an external Wi-Fi hotspot or communication device.
1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Connections. 4. Select Wi-Fi. 5. Select Change Mode. 6. Select Network or HotSpot, then Save. u To change the Wi-Fi settings, select
Network Options or HotSpot Options.
u Select the access point you want to connect to the system.
7. Select Connect. u Enter a password for the access point,
and select OK. u When the connection is successful, the
icon is displayed on the list. 8. Select to go back to the home screen.
Connect the vehicle to a Wi-Fi hotspot
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAT&T Hotspot* Featu
res
1AT&T Hotspot*
To use AT&T Hotspot services, your vehicle must be subscribed to a data plan. If your vehicle is not subscribed to a data plan, you can visit www.att.com/honda to add vehicle data services.
Hotspot username and password can be changed in the Edit Hotspot Properties of the AT&T Hotspot app. Settings cannot be accessed while driving. Park in a safe place to adjust Hotspot settings.
Alternatively, you can use your mobile hotspot to connect the vehicle and other mobile devices to the Internet.
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 292
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 293
AT&T Hotspot*
If you have subscribed to AT&T hotspot services, your vehicle will provide data to connect your mobile devices to the Internet. You can use the AT&T Hotspot app to turn on/off vehicle data and monitor data usage left on your subscription.
AT&T Hotspot Menu
a Hotspot Enable Turn on/off AT&T Hotspot.
b Data Usage Bar Check the current status of your data plan. This Usage Bar will show your current plan and how much data remains on your plan. Subscription plans for AT&T Hotspot can be added/modified at www.att.com/honda.
c Refresh and Plan Info Refreshes screen to show data remaining. Shows your current AT&T subscription plan for the vehicle.
d Edit Hotspot Properties Shows the current username and password for vehicle Hotspot. Hotspot settings can be changed while the vehicle is not in motion.
e Help
293* Not available on all models
294
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri Eyes Free
Featu res
1Siri Eyes Free
Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Check Apple Inc. website for features available for Siri.
While driving we recommend only using Siri through the button on the steering wheel (Siri Eyes Free).
1Using Siri Eyes Free
Some commands work only on specific phone features or apps.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 294
Siri Eyes Free You can talk to Siri using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 354
Using Siri Eyes Free
(Talk) Button Press and hold until the display changes as shown.
(Back) Button Press to deactivate Siri.
While in Siri Eyes Free: The display remains the same. No feedback or commands appears.
Appears when Siri is activated in Siri Eyes Free
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay Featu
res
1Apple CarPlay
Only iPhone 5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later are compatible with Apple CarPlay.
Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to Apple CarPlay and when launching any compatible apps.
To use Apple CarPlay, connect the USB cable to the USB port located on the console panel. The USB ports located in the console compartment and on the back of the console compartment* will not enable Apple CarPlay operation.
2 USB Ports P. 223
While connected to Apple CarPlay, calls are only made through Apple CarPlay. If you want to make a call with HandsFreeLink, turn Apple CarPlay OFF or detach the USB cable from your iPhone.
2 Setting Up Apple CarPlay P. 296
When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlay, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth Audio or Bluetooth HandsFreeLink. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth while Apple CarPlay is connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 354
For details on countries and regions where Apple CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Apple homepage.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 295
Apple CarPlay If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via the front USB port, you can use the audio/information screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages.
2 USB Ports P. 223
Phone Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voicemail.
Messages Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.
Music Play music stored on your iPhone.
Apple CarPlay Menu
Home screen
Apple CarPlay icon
Apple CarPlay menu screen
: Go back to the Apple CarPlay Dashboard screen
Select the Honda icon to go back to the home screen
: Go back to the Apple CarPlay menu screen
295Continued* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
296
Featu res
1Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements & Limitations Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carriers rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Apple CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the Apple homepage for information on compatible apps.
1Setting Up Apple CarPlay
You can also use the method below to set up Apple CarPlay: Select HOMESettingsConnectionsApple CarPlay
Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and Apples Privacy Policy.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 296
Maps Display Apple Maps and use the navigation function just as you would on your iPhone.
Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlay) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination.
After you have connected your iPhone to the system via the front USB port, use the following procedure to set up Apple CarPlay. Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed, and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will need to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/information screen.
Enabling Apple CarPlay Enable: Allows this data sharing. Disable: Does not allow this data sharing.
You may change the consent settings under the Connections settings menu.
Setting Up Apple CarPlay
Models with navigation system
uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay Featu
res
1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
Below are examples of questions and commands for Siri: What movies are playing today? Call dad at work. What song is this? Hows the weather tomorrow? Read my latest email. Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.
For more information, please visit www.apple.com/ios/siri.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 297
Press and hold the (Talk) button to activate Siri.
Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
(Talk) Button: Press and hold to activate Siri. Press again to deactivate Siri. Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.
297
298
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Featu res
1Android Auto
To use Android Auto, you need to download the Android Auto app from Google Play to your smartphone.
Only Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or later versions are compatible with Android Auto. Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used while your phone is connected to Android Auto.
Park in a safe place before connecting your Android phone to Android Auto and when launching any compatible apps.
To use Android Auto, connect the USB cable to the USB port located on the console panel. The USB ports located in the console compartment and on the back of the console compartment* will not enable Android Auto operation.
2 USB Ports P. 223
To directly access the Android Auto phone function, press Phone on the home screen.
2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 300
When your Android phone is connected to Android Auto, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth Audio. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth while Android Auto is connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 354
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 298
Android Auto When you connect an Android phone to the audio system via the front USB port, Android Auto is automatically initiated. When connected via Android Auto, you can use the audio/information screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation), Google Play Music, and Google Now functions. When you first use Android Auto, a tutorial will appear on the screen. We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using Android Auto.
2 USB Ports P. 223 2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 300
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto Featu
res
1Android Auto
For details on countries and regions where Android Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Android Auto homepage.
Screens may differ depending on the version of the Android Auto app you are using.
Android Auto Operating Requirements & Limitations Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carriers rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Android Auto functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Android Auto functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Android Auto performance or functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android Auto homepage for information on compatible apps.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 299
a Maps (Navigation) Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other inputs.
Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Android Auto) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination. The audio/information screen shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination. b Phone (Communication) Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail. c Google Now (Home screen) Display useful information organized by Android Auto into simple cards that appear just when theyre needed.
Android Auto Menu
: Go back to the home screen
Android Auto icon
Models with navigation system
Continued 299
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
300
Featu res
1Enabling Android Auto
Only initialize Android Auto when you are safely parked. When Android Auto first detects your phone, you will need to set up your phone so that auto pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your phone.
You can use the method below to change Android Auto settings after you have completed the initial setup: Select HOMESettingsConnectionsAndroid Auto
Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is governed by the Googles Privacy Policy.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 300
d Music and audio Play Google Play Music and music apps that are compatible with Android Auto. To switch between music apps, press this icon. e Go back to the Home Screen. f Voice Operate Android Auto with your voice.
When you connect an Android phone to the unit via the front USB port, Android Auto is automatically initiated.
Enabling Android Auto Enable: Allows this data sharing. Disable: Does not allow this data sharing.
You may change the consent settings under the Connections settings menu.
Auto Pairing Connection
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto Featu
res
1Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
Below are examples of commands you can give with voice recognition: Reply to text. Call my wife. Navigate to Honda. Play my music. Send a text message to my wife. Call flower shop.
For more information, please refer to the Android Auto homepage.
You can also activate the voice recognition function by pressing the icon in the upper-right corner of the screen.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 301
Press and hold the (Talk) button to operate Android Auto with your voice.
Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
(Talk) Button: Press and hold to operate Android Auto with your voice. Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.
301
302
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 302
Audio Error Messages
Solution
th the audio system. Check if the device is
e is connected. Disconnect the device. Then, turn gain. Do not reconnect the device that caused the
od is connected. If it appears when a supported d software to the newer version. vice is connected. If it appears when a supported
e device.
iPod/USB Flash Drive If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
Problem reading connected device. See Owners Manual for a list of compatible devices. If device is compatible, try reconnecting device. If this error remains, contact Honda dealer.
Appears when there is a problem wi compatible with the audio system.
Problem reading connected device. See Owners Manual for a list of compatible devices. If device is compatible, try reconnecting device. If this error remains, contact Honda dealer.
Appears when an incompatible devic the audio system off and turn it on a error.
Problem reading connected device. See Owners Manual for a list of compatible devices. If device is compatible, try reconnecting device. If this error remains, contact Honda dealer.
Appears when an unsupported iP iPod is connected, update the iPo
Appears when an unsupported de device is connected, reconnect th
uuAudio Error Messagesu iPod/USB Flash Drive Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 303
Error Message Solution
Problem reading connected device. See Owners Manual for a list of compatible devices. If device is compatible, try reconnecting device. If this error remains, contact Honda dealer.
Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
The selected file cannot be played on this system
Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message appears for about three seconds, then plays the next song.
The connected device does not contain any files that can be played on this system. See Owners Manual for a list of compatible file types.
Appears when the iPod is empty.
Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash drive.
Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
iPod
USB flash drive
iPod and USB flash drive
303
304
uuAudio Error MessagesuAndroid/Apps
Featu res
on
n to close the app.
ittle longer. If it does not respond even if you keep e error message continues, perform Factory Data
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 304
Android/Apps If an error occurs while using the audio system or apps, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
*1:****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an error occurs.
Error Message Soluti
Unfortunately, **** has stopped.*1 Error has occurred within app, select OK on the scree
**** is not responding. Would you like to close it?*1
App is not responding. Select Wait if you can wait for a response from app a l waiting, select OK to close the app and start it up. If th Reset.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 345
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 305
General Information on the Audio System
res
1Subscribing to SiriusXM Radio
Contact Information for SiriusXM Radio: US: SiriusXM Radio at
www.siriusxm.com/subscribenow, or 1-866-635-2349
Canada: SiriusXM Canada at www.siriusxm.ca/subscribe-now, or 1-877-209-0079
1Receiving SiriusXM Radio
The SiriusXM satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator.
You may experience reception problems under the following circumstances: In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle. In tunnels On the lower level of a multi-tiered road Large items carried on the roof rack
SiriusXM Radio Service*
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in the screen, select Channel to 0.
2. Have your radio ID ready, and either call or visit the SiriusXM website to subscribe.
Switch to the SiriusXM mode by using the audio remote controls on the steering wheel, or through the audio/information screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.
Channel not subscribed. Call SiriusXM to subscribe.: You are not subscribed to the channel selected. Subscription Update: SiriusXM radio is receiving information update from the network. Channel Not Available: No such channel exits, or the artist or title information is unavailable. No Signal: The signal is too weak in the current location. Check Tuner: There is a problem with the SiriusXM tuner. Contact a dealer. Check Antenna: There is a problem with the SiriusXM antenna. Contact a dealer.
Subscribing to SiriusXM Radio
Receiving SiriusXM Radio
SiriusXM Radio Display Messages
305* Not available on all models
306
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPad, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
Featu res
1iPod, iPad, and iPhone Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions of these devices.
The Lightning connector works with iPhone 5, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5s, iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6s, iPhone 6s Plus, iPhone SE, iPhone 7, iPhone 7 Plus, iPad Pro 9.7 inch, iPad Pro 12.9 inch (1st generation), iPad (4th generation), iPad Air, iPad Air 2, iPad mini, iPad mini 2, iPad mini 3, iPad mini 4, iPod nano (7th generation), iPod touch (5th and 6th generation).
The 30-pin connector works with iPhone 4s, iPad 2, iPad (3rd generation).
USB works with iPhone 4s, iPhone 5, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5s, iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6s, iPhone 6s Plus, iPhone SE, iPhone 7, iPhone 7 Plus, iPad Pro 9.7 inch, iPad Pro 12.9 inch (1st generation), iPad 2, iPad (3rd generation), iPad (4th generation), iPad Air, iPad Air 2, iPad mini, iPad mini 2, iPad mini 3, iPad mini 4, iPod nano (7th generation), iPod touch (5th to 6th generation).
1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored order. This order may be different from the order displayed on your PC or device.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 306
Compatible iPod, iPad, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended. Some digital audio players may not be compatible. Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work. Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display. Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
iPod, iPad, and iPhone Model Compatibility
Model Made for iPod nano (7th generation) released 2012 Made for iPod touch (5th and 6th generation) released between 2012 and 2015 Made for iPhone 4s/iPhone 5/iPhone 5c/iPhone 5s/iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus/iPhone 6s/iPhone 6s Plus/iPhone SE/iPhone 7/iPhone 7 Plus Made for iPad Pro 9.7 inch/iPad Pro 12.9 inch (1st generation) Made for iPad 2/iPad (3rd generation)/iPad (4th generation) Made for iPad Air/iPad Air 2 Made for iPad mini/iPad mini 2/iPad mini 3/iPad mini 4
USB Flash Drives
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 307
Honda App License Agreement
Featu res
PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS AGREEMENT) WHICH GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON YOUR HONDA OR ACURA VEHICLE (YOUR VEHICLE) AS WELL AS THE APPLICATIONS, SERVICES, FUNCTIONS, AND CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SOFTWARE (COLLECTIVELY, THE SERVICES). YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL SERVE AS YOUR CONSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE IS OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY AMERICAN HONDA MOTOR CO. INC., (HONDA, US, WE, OR OUR), WITH ITS BUSINESS ADDRESS AT 1919 TORRANCE BLVD., TORRANCE, CA 90501. REFERENCE TO HONDA IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES HONDAS PARENT COMPANY AND ITS AFFILIATES AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. THE SERVICES ARE OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY HONDA OR A THIRD-PARTY SERVICE PROVIDER (A PROVIDER). REFERENCE TO A PROVIDER IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES SUCH PROVIDERS PARENT COMPANY, AFFILIATES, AND DESIGNATED AGENTS.
A. Description of the Software. The SOFTWARE includes the software, firmware and the like, installed and executing on your VEHICLE during manufacture, and thereafter updated from time to time by HONDA, you or an authorized HONDA dealer (a DEALER). The SOFTWARE allows you to access and use a variety of SERVICES, including but not limited to: (a) HONDA applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, HONDA SERVICES); and (b) PROVIDER applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, PROVIDER SERVICES), each of which may provide access to various information, media, content, and services.
B. SOFTWARE Licensing and Intellectual Property. 1. SOFTWARE. This AGREEMENT grants you a non-exclusive, limited, and revocable license to use the SOFTWARE and SERVICES solely (a) as installed on your VEHICLE by HONDA, (b) as updated on your Vehicle by HONDA, you (but only as and when directed by HONDA), or a DEALER and (c) as permitted under the terms of this AGREEMENT.
2. HONDA Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various HONDA SERVICES. Installation, activation, or use of HONDA SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies applicable to those HONDA SERVICES (the HONDA TERMS). You acknowledge and agree that any collection, use, sharing of data generated by your VEHICLE or your use of your VEHICLE, and your use of the HONDA SERVICES shall be subject to this AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS that may be specifically applicable to such HONDA SERVICES or data generation. The HONDA SERVICES may collect, use, and share such data while you are using the SOFTWARE.
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
307Continued
308
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 308
3. Open-Source Software. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may incorporate software licensed to HONDA under free or open-source licenses which govern HONDAs distribution and your use of such software. HONDA and the third-party authors, licensors, and distributors of such software disclaim all warranties and all liability arising from any and all use or distribution of the software. To the extent such software is provided under terms that differ from the applicable free or open-source licenses, those terms are offered by HONDA alone. Additional information regarding free and open-source software incorporated in the SOFTWARE and SERVICES is available in this manual or within the SOFTWARE.
4. Provider Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various PROVIDER SERVICES. Installation or use of such PROVIDER SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies of the applicable PROVIDER (the PROVIDER TERMS). This AGREEMENT restricts the manner in which you can install and use PROVIDER SERVICES but does not grant you a license or permission to use such PROVIDER SERVICES. Your permission to use PROVIDER SERVICES is limited and subject to any license grants, conditions, and limitations included in the PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge that any collection, use, sharing of your information, targeted advertising practices by PROVIDERS, and your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES shall be subject to both this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS. The PROVIDER SERVICES may collect, use, and share such information while you are using the SOFTWARE.
5. License Limitations and Restrictions on Use. (a) Limited License. You understand and agree that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are licensed, not sold, to you solely for use in accordance with this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and any documentation for the VEHICLE made available to you by HONDA (any DOCUMENTATION). HONDA and its licensors reserve all rights in the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES not expressly granted to you under this AGREEMENT. PROVIDERS and their licensors reserve all rights in the PROVIDER SERVICES not expressly granted to you under the applicable PROVIDER TERMS.
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 309
(b) Restrictions on Use. The licenses granted under this AGREEMENT do not permit you to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES on a device other than your VEHICLE. As a condition of using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, you agree that you may not and will not:
6. Intellectual Property Rights. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, the accompanying DOCUMENTATION, and all copies of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are owned by HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their suppliers or licensors. This AGREEMENT does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their licensors, affiliates, or suppliers.
(1) copy, download, distribute, modify, publish, sell, rent, lease, lend, license, sublicense, reuse, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or any of the content or other material within the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including without limitation, HONDA or PROVIDER names, logos, or any other trademarks of HONDA or PROVIDERS or used in association with the SOFTWARE or any SERVICES, except as required to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in accordance with this AGREEMENT, any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and the DOCUMENTATION; (2) access or use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any manner intended to damage or impair the operation of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or interfere with anyone elses use and enjoyment of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES; (3) access or attempt to access any system or server on which the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is hosted or modify or alter the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any way; (4) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES for any unlawful purpose, or in violation of any third party rights; (5) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in violation of any applicable traffic regulations, rules or laws, including but not limited to any driver distraction laws, rules or regulations; (6) violate the terms of this AGREEMENT, any HONDA TERMS, any PROVIDER TERMS or other applicable third-party terms, conditions, and privacy policies; or (7) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble, or attempt to derive the source code of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted (a) by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or (b) the terms of applicable free or opensource software licenses.
309Continued
310
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 310
7. Export Restrictions: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to U.S., European Union, and other export jurisdictions. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use, and destination restrictions issued by the U.S. and other governments.
C. SOFTWARE Operation 1. HONDA reserves the right to suspend or terminate your access to and use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES if you are found to be in violation of this AGREEMENT or as reasonably deemed necessary by HONDA.
2. Eligibility/Registration/Activation. The SOFTWARE is intended for and available to individuals who (a) are of legal age of majority in their jurisdiction of residence (and at least 18 years of age), or are younger than 18 years of age and possess a valid drivers license issued by their jurisdiction of residence, and (b) own or have permissive access to a compatible VEHICLE. We do not knowingly collect any information, including personal information, from children under 13. If we learn or are notified that we have collected personal information of a child under 13, we will immediately take steps to delete such information.
3. Use of PROVIDER SERVICES through the SOFTWARE. Certain PROVIDER SERVICES made available through the SOFTWARE may require that you register or otherwise have an account with the PROVIDER and agree to PROVIDER TERMS. Any use of any of such PROVIDER SERVICES within the SOFTWARE is subject to this AGREEMENT and the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. HONDA does not exercise control over such PROVIDER SERVICES and is not responsible or liable for the availability, security, or content of such PROVIDER SERVICES, and the inclusion of any PROVIDER SERVICES does not imply a referral from, the approval of, or the endorsement by HONDA of such PROVIDER SERVICES. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage relating to or resulting from your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES.
4. Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to access third-party sites and content through the use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. The third-party sites and content are not under the control of HONDA. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for such third-party websites and their content or for any damage relating to or resulting from your access or use of such websites and content.
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 311
5. Unauthorized Use and Abuse. You are responsible for ensuring your (and any authorized third parties) use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES remains in compliance with this AGREEMENT and all other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge and agree that any use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES occurring through your VEHICLE will be deemed your actions and that HONDA and PROVIDERS may rely upon such actions. You agree to immediately notify us if you suspect fraudulent or abusive activity involving the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. If you so notify us or if we otherwise suspect fraudulent or abusive activity, you agree to cooperate with us in any fraud investigation and to use any fraud prevention measures we prescribe. Your failure to immediately notify us or cooperate to use such measures will result in your liability for all fraudulent usage or abusive activity associated with your VEHICLE.
6. SOFTWARE Updates. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be updated when your VEHICLE is serviced by a DEALER or remotely, over-the- air, by HONDA from time to time; such updates may occur with or without further notice or your future consent. The SOFTWARE may be updated at HONDAs discretion and for any purpose including, without limitation, to patch or otherwise improve the SOFTWARE or SERVICES functionality, security, or stability. All updates to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to this AGREEMENT and any other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS.
7. Uninstalling, Removing, and Replacing the SOFTWARE. Replacing SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES with software or firmware not provided and installed by HONDA or a DEALER will render all representations and warranties for the SOFTWARE, HONDA SERVICES, and VEHICLE functionality reliant upon the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES null and void.
D. SOFTWARE Operational Notices and Warnings 1. Vehicle Geolocation Information. You acknowledge that your VEHICLE may be equipped with certain traffic and map features. The traffic feature will automatically collect and transmit, through GPS technology, your Vehicles current location (longitude and latitude), travel direction and speed (VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION) to HONDA and PROVIDERS. The VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION is used by HONDA and PROVIDERS to provide traffic and navigation-related information to you, but may also be used to provide other SERVICES or offers to you. HONDA will not use such VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION for its own marketing efforts, or provide such information to unaffiliated third parties for their own purposes, without your express consent.
311Continued
312
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 312
2. Potential Map Inaccuracy and Route Safety. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls, routing, or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following suggested routes. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal driving maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals, or clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for such locations and routes. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Navigation features are not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by the SOFTWARE or SERVICES should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices.
3. Speech Recognition: You acknowledge and understand that HONDA and PROVIDERS may record, retain, and use voices commands when you use the speech recognition components of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. You and all VEHICLE operators and passengers (a) consent to the recording and retention of voice commands in support of providing speech recognition components and (b) release HONDA and PROVIDERS from all claims, liabilities, and losses that may result from any use of such recorded voice commands. Recognition errors are inherent in speech recognition. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address any errors. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process.
4. Distraction Hazards. Navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) input or setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause a crash or other serious consequences; the ability to undertake such interactions may also be limited by state or local law, which laws you are responsible to know and follow. Even occasional short scans of the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving at a critical time. Pull over and stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could result in a crash.
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 313
E. Information Collection and Storage 1. Information Collection, Use, Transmission and Storage of Data. Consent to Use of Data: You agree that HONDA and PROVIDERS may collect and use your information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. HONDA may share such information with third parties, including, without limitation, PROVIDERS, third party software and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agents, solely to improve their products or to provide services or technologies to you. HONDA, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you.
2. Information Storage. Depending on the type of multimedia system you have in your VEHICLE, certain information may be stored for ease of use of the SOFTWARE including, without limitation, search history, location history in certain applications, previous and saved destinations, map locations within certain applications, and device numbers and contact information.
(a) Vehicle Health Information. Your VEHICLE may remotely transmit information regarding the status and health of your VEHICLE (VEHICLE INFORMATION) to HONDA without notification to you. VEHICLE INFORMATION may contain VEHICLE maintenance and malfunction status that is derived from VEHICLE diagnostic data and includes, but is not limited to, status of powered doors and windows, battery life data, battery charging data, VEHICLE speed, coolant temperature, air compressor revolution, output power, warning codes, diagnostic trouble codes, fuel injection volume, and engine rotations per minute. VEHICLE HEALTH INFORMATION may be used by HONDA for research and development, to deliver HONDA SERVICES and information to you, and to contact you, and is retained only for a period of time necessary to fulfill these goals.
(b) VEHICLE Geolocation Data (non-navigation/map based). If you opt-in to geolocation-based SERVICES, your vehicles geolocation data (latitude and longitude) will be automatically sent from your VEHICLE to HONDA and PROVIDERS.
(c) You understand that the inputting or uploading of information to your VEHICLEs multimedia system or the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is at your own risk and that HONDA is not responsible for unauthorized access to or use of any personal or other information. All information uploaded to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be stored on your VEHICLESs multimedia system and you understand that the security and safety of your VEHICLEs multimedia system is your sole responsibility.
313Continued
314
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 314
F. NO WARRANTY. You understand and agree that your use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are solely at your own risk and that you will be solely responsible for any damage to your VEHICLEs multimedia system or any other equipment or any loss of data that may result from your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. THE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED ON AN AS IS AND AS AVAILABLE BASIS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HONDA makes no warranties that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will meet your requirements, or that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will be uninterrupted, timely, secure, non- infringing or error free. You understand and agree that you are responsible for any and all charges, costs or expenses associated with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Advice or information, whether oral or written, obtained by you from us or through the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are provided for informational purposes only and will not create any warranty not expressly made herein. You should not rely on any such information or advice. We assume no liability or responsibility for any errors or omissions in the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. We do not make any warranty or representation that your use of the material displayed on, or obtained through, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is non-infringing of any rights of any third party. Any decision or action taken by you on the basis of information or content provided via the application is at your sole discretion and risk. HONDA and PROVIDERS are not responsible or liable for any such decision, or for the accuracy, completeness, usefulness, or availability of any content or information displayed, transmitted, or otherwise made available via the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. To the extent jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of certain warranties, some of the above exclusions may not apply to you.
G. LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY. You and HONDA are each waiving important rights. 1. Limitations on YOUR liability. HONDA cannot recover from you any consequential, indirect, incidental, or special damages, or attorneys fees in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES. HONDA WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 315
2. Limitation on HONDA and PROVIDER liability. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable to you or any other party for consequential, indirect, incidental, special, or punitive damages (including without limitation lost profits) in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if HONDA or PROVIDERS are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). To the extent that a jurisdiction does not permit the exclusion or limitation of liability as set forth herein our liability is limited to the maximum extent permitted by law in such states. If HONDA or PROVIDERS are found liable to you for any reason, you agree that the aggregate liability of all these parties to you for any claim is limited to ten U.S. dollars (US $10.00). Neither HONDA nor any PROVIDER would have agreed to provide the SOFTWARE or SERVICES to you if you did not agree to this limitation. This amount is the sole and exclusive liability of HONDA and PROVIDERS to you, and is payable as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Except where prohibited by law, you may not bring any claim against HONDA or any third-party beneficiary more than two (2) years after the claim arises. We do not have any liability for SOFTWARE or SERVICES interruptions of any length.
(a) Release of HONDA and PROVIDERS For yourself and anyone else claiming under you, you agree to release and discharge HONDA, PROVIDERS, their respective officers, directors, and employees, and each third-party beneficiary from all claims, liabilities and losses in connection with the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including, but not limited to claims for personal injury or property damage arising from the total or partial failure of performance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if caused by or based upon the negligence, gross negligence, strict products liability, Deceptive Trade Practices Act violations, bad faith, or breach of warranty of us or the malfunction of the SOFTWARE or SOFTWARE SERVICES. YOU AGREE TO WAIVE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. YOU HEREBY RELEASE AND DISCHARGE HONDA AND ITS LICENSORS AND CONTRACTORS (INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTIES PROVIDING ALL OR PART OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES) FROM AND AGAINST ANY CLAIMS, DAMAGES, EXPENSES AND LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO ANY INJURIES, DAMAGES, OR LOSSES TO ANY PERSON (INCLUDING DEATH) OR PROPERTY OF ANY KIND RESULTING IN WHOLE OR PART, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FROM YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES.
H. Survival. You agree that the limitations of liability and indemnities in this AGREEMENT will survive even after the AGREEMENT has ended. These limitations of liability apply not only to you, but to anyone using the SOFTWARE or SERVICES via your VEHICLE, to anyone making a claim on your behalf, and to any claims made by your family, employees, customers, or others arising out of or relating to your VEHICLE, the SOFTWARE, or SERVICES.
315Continued
316
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 316
I. Availability/Interruption. The SOFTWARE and certain SERVICES are made available through your VEHICLEs compatible multimedia system when the VEHICLE is turned on. Certain SERVICES may be available only through your compatible mobile device when it is within the operating range of the VEHICLE and a wireless carrier. The availability of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be subject to transmission limitation or interruption, including but not limited to technical obsolesce or sunsetting of the hardware, software or firmware, inside of or external to the Vehicle, required for data transmission or receipt. HONDA does not guarantee that the SOFTWARE, SERVICES, or any portion thereof will be available at all times or in all areas. You acknowledge and agree that HONDA is not responsible for performance degradation, interruption or delays. You acknowledge that HONDA shall not be liable to you if the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in a given location are not available. If the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are not available within your intended location, you agree that your sole remedy shall be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
J. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is provided by HONDA. For product support, please refer to HONDA instructions provided in the DOCUMENTATION. Should you have any questions concerning this AGREEMENT, or if you desire to contact HONDA for any other reason, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
K. Termination and Transfer. 1. Termination. This AGREEMENT is effective until terminated by you or US. WE may terminate this AGREEMENT for any or no reason, and with or without notice to you. Your rights under this AGREEMENT will terminate automatically without notice from US if you fail to comply with any term of this AGREEMENT. Upon termination of this AGREEMENT, you shall cease all use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
2. Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this AGREEMENT only as part of a sale or transfer of the VEHICLE, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, and any upgrades), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this AGREEMENT. You agree to notify HONDA upon the sale or transfer of the VEHICLE. To contact HONDA, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 317
L. Changes to the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. WE may change, modify, or update the SOFTWARE or SERVICES from time to time. Unless explicitly stated otherwise, any new features or services that augment or enhance the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in the future shall respectively be considered part of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES and subject to this AGREEMENT. WE reserve the right at any time and from time to time to interrupt, restrict, modify, suspend, discontinue, temporarily or permanently, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES (or any portion thereof), with or without notice to you, and you agree that HONDA shall not be liable to you or to any third party for any modification, suspension or discontinuance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES.
M. ARBITRATION: PLEASE READ THIS ARBITRATION PROVISION CAREFULLY TO UNDERSTAND YOUR RIGHTS. YOU AGREE THAT ANY CLAIM THAT YOU MAY HAVE IN THE FUTURE MUST BE RESOLVED THROUGH BINDING ARBITRATION. YOU WAIVE THE RIGHT TO HAVE YOUR DISPUTE HEARD IN COURT AND WAIVE THE RIGHT TO BRING CLASS CLAIMS. YOU UNDERSTAND THAT DISCOVERY AND APPEAL RIGHTS ARE MORE LIMITED IN ARBITRATION. Arbitration is a method of resolving a claim, dispute or controversy without filing a lawsuit. By agreeing to arbitrate, the right to go to court is waived and instead claims, disputes or controversies are submitted to binding arbitration. This provision sets forth the terms and conditions of our agreement. YOU and HONDA agree and acknowledge that this Agreement affects interstate commerce and the Federal Arbitration Act (FAA) applies. By using the Software, Vehicle, or Services, YOU elect to have disputes resolved by arbitration. YOU, HONDA or any involved third party may pursue a Claim. Claim means any dispute between YOU, HONDA, or any involved third party relating to your use of the Software, the Vehicle, or the Services, this Agreement, or our relationship, including any representations, omissions or warranties. Claim does not include personal injury or wrongful death claims. YOU or HONDA may seek remedies in small claims court or provisional judicial remedies without arbitrating. In addition, notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, YOU or HONDA may seek equitable relief in a court of competent jurisdiction. YOU or HONDA may select arbitration with American Arbitration Association, JAMS or National Arbitration and Mediation. Contact these sponsors for their rules. The hearing will be in the federal district where YOU reside. If agreed, it may be by telephone or written submissions. Filing and arbitrator fees to be paid per the sponsor rules. You may contact the sponsor for a fee waiver. If no fee waivers, HONDA will pay filing and arbitrator fees up to $5,000, unless law requires more. Each party is responsible for other fees. Arbitrator may award costs or fees to prevailing party, if permitted by law. HONDA will not seek fees, unless the claims are frivolous.
317Continued
318
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 318
N. Miscellaneous: You may not assign this AGREEMENT without HONDAs prior written consent. This AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS represents the entire agreement between you and US. HONDA may amend the terms of this AGREEMENT by providing you with notices of such updated terms. If you do not consent to be bound by the updated terms, your sole remedy will be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. If any part of this AGREEMENT is found invalid, void, or unenforceable, the balance of the AGREEMENT will remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. To the fullest extent permitted by law, and except as explicitly provided otherwise, this AGREEMENT and any disputes arising out of or relating to it will be governed by the laws of the State of California, except that California laws concerning choice of law or conflicts shall not apply if they would cause the substantive law of another jurisdiction to apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Section M shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act and the laws of the State of California, as applicable, as set forth therein. The failure to enforce any term of this AGREEMENT on one occasion shall not prevent enforcement on any other occasion or the enforcement of any other term. Headings and captions shall not be considered included for purposes of interpretation or application hereof, but are for convenience only.
Arbitrator shall be an attorney or current or retired judge familiar with automotive or consumer software. The arbitrator shall follow substantive law, statute of limitations and decide all issues relating to the interpretation, construction, enforceability and applicability of this provision. The arbitrator may order relief permitted by law. This provision is governed and enforceable by the FAA. An award shall include a written opinion and be final, subject to appeal by the FAA. This provision survives termination of this Agreement or relationship, bankruptcy, assignment or transfer. If part of this provision is unenforceable, the remainder remains in effect. If unenforceability allows arbitration as a class action, then this provision is entirely unenforceable. YOU may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at Honda Financial Services, P.O. Box 165007, Irving, TX 75016. HONDA reserves the right to make changes to this provision after providing written notice and an opportunity to opt out.
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 319
Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Featu res
USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLES PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING APPLE'S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY.
USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLES PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLES USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO.
OWNERS MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS
319Continued
320
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 320
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO (THE APPLICATIONS) IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS PROVIDED AS IS AND AS AVAILABLE, WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON- INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE, SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC., SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.
TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDAS TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuAbout Open Source Licenses Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 321
About Open Source Licenses To see the open source license information, follow these steps. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select About. 5. Select Legal Information.
321
322
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 322
License Information
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
DOLBY DIGITAL
DTS
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 323
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by DENSO CORPORATION is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft.
Bluetooth
Windows Media
323Continued
324
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 324
Made for iPod, Made for iPhone, and Made for iPad mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance. Apple, the Apple Logo, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. iPad Air, iPad mini, iPad Pro, Apple CarPlay, and Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
Apple
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 325
Mpeg4 Visual THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR (i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUALA STANDARD (MPEG-4 VIDEO) AND/OR (ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
VC-1 This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license and VC-1 patent portfolio license for the personal use of a consumer or other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to (i) encode video in compliance with the AVC Standard and VC-1 Standard (AVC/ VC-1 Video) and/or (ii) decode AVC/VC-1 Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC/VC-1 Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, L.L.C. See http://www.mpegla.com.
MPEG
325Continued
326
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 326
AVC/H.264 THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (AVC VIDEO) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
microSDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
SDHC Memory Card
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 327
Customized Features
res
1Customized Features
When you customize settings, make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop and shift to (P.
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features. How to customize With the power mode in ON, select Settings, then select a setting item.
Audio/Information Screen
327Continued
328
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 328
Customization flow
Select Settings.
Automatic Date & Time
Set Date Set Time
System
Select .
Automatic Time Zone*
Select Time Format
HondaLink Subscription Status
Set Time Zone
Set Date & Time
Touch Sensitivity
Subscriptions
Language
Factory Data Reset
About
Date & Time
Select time zone
System SoundsSystem Volumes
Navigation Guidance*
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
Interruption Mode
Events and reminders
Calls
Manager
t Location t from Apps
ion Setting
rruptions
Messages Calls/messages
from
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 329
Advanced Options
App
Recen Reques
Locat
Inte
329Continued
330
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
+ Connect New Device
Saved Devices
Change Mode
Connected Devices
CabinControl
Connection Information
vice list)
ptions
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 330
Connections
Android Auto
Apple CarPlay
Bluetooth
Wi-Fi
(De
CabinControl O
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
t Position Movement at Entry/Exit Memory Position Link
Adjust Outside Temp Display Trip A Reset Timing Trip B Reset Timing
Reverse Shift Position Beep Adjust Alarm Volume Turn by Turn Display
wer Tailgate Keyless Open Mode
er Tailgate Open by Outer Handle
Door Unlock Mode Keyless Access Light Flash
Keyless Access Beep
Remote Start System On/Off*
Walk Away Auto Lock
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
nds Free Access Power Tailgate*
Rear Seat Reminder
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 331
Vehicle
Driving Position Setup*
Sea
Meter Setup
Power Tailgate Setup*
Po
Pow
Keyless Access Setup
Ha
331Continued* Not available on all models
332
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto Off Timer
rward Collision Warning Distance
CC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep
to Interior Illumination Sensitivity
Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Key and Remote Unlock Mode
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Oil Life
ad Departure Mitigation Setting
ne Keeping Assist Suspend Beep
Blind Spot Information*
uto Headlight On with Wiper On
Auto Light Sensitivity*
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 332
Lighting Setup
Fo
A
Au
Door Setup
Maintenance Information
Driver Assist System Setup
Ro
La
Wireless Charger*
A
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
Default Camera View
Guidelines
Cross Traffic Monitor*
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 333
Audio Zones*
Bass / Treble
Camera Rear Camera
Sound
Balance / Fader
Center / Subwoofer
Volume*
DTS Neural Surround*
Speed Volume Compensation
Notifications
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Display
Subwoofer Volume*
333Continued* Not available on all models
334
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 334
List of customizable options
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System Date & Time
Set Date & Time
Automatic Date & Time
Selects ON to have the GPS automatically adjust the clock. Select OFF to cancel this function.
ON*1/OFF
Set Date Adjusts date. 2 Adjusting the Clock P. 124
Set Time Adjusts clock. 2 Adjusting the Clock P. 124
Set Time Zone
Automatic Time Zone*
Sets the navigation system to automatically adjust the clock when driving through different time zones.
ON*1/OFF
Select time zone
Changes the time zone manually.
Select Time Format Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H*1/24H
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 335
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
System Volumes
System Sounds Changes the system sounds volume.
Navigation Guidance* Changes the navigation guidance volume.
Touch Sensitivity
Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen. High/Low*1
Subscriptions HondaLink Subscription Status
Lists subscriptions and subscription status for HondaLink.
Language Changes the display language.
English (United States)*1/English (United Kingdom)/ Korean/French/ Spanish/Arabic
Factory Data Reset
Resets all the settings to their factory default. 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 345
Continue/Cancel
About Displays the Android setting items.
335Continued* Not available on all models
336
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 336
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System Advanced Options
App Manager Displays the Android system memory and apps information.
Recent Location Request from Apps
Displays the recent location requests from apps.
Location Setting Selects OFF not to allow apps including the navigation system* to access the vehicles location.
ON*1/OFF
Inter- ruptions
Inter- ruption Mode
Sets the interruption mode for allowing to notify when calls and notifications arrive.
Always interrupt*1/ Dont interrupt/ Allow only priority interruptions
Events and reminders
Sets priority interruptions of events and reminders. ON*1/OFF
Calls Sets priority interruptions of calls. ON*1/OFF
Messages Sets priority interruptions of messages. ON*1/OFF
Calls/ messages from
Sets priority interruptions of from who. Anyone*1/Contacts only/Starred contacts only
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 337
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Connec- tions
Bluetooth
+ Connect New Device
Pairs a new phone to HFL. 2 Phone Setup P. 354
Saved Devices Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired phone. 2 Phone Setup P. 354
Wi-Fi
Change Mode Changes the Wi-Fi mode. Network*1/HotSpot/ OFF
Available Networks/ Connected Devices
Displays the available network(s) or current connected device(s).
Android Auto Sets up the Android Auto connection.
Apple CarPlay Sets up the Apple CarPlay connection.
CabinControl Options
Cabin- Control
Turns the Honda CabinControl function on and off. ON*1/OFF
Connection Information
Displays the Honda CabinControl connection information.
(Device list) Selects functions or deletes a device.
337Continued
338
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 338
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Driving Position Setup*
Seat Position Movement at Entry/ Exit
Moves the seat rearward when you get in/get out of the vehicle. Changes the setting for this feature.
ON*1/OFF
Memory Position Link
Turns the driving position memory system on and off.
ON*1/OFF
Meter Setup
Adjust Outside Temp Display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
-5F ~ 0F*1 ~ +5F (U.S.) -3C ~ 0C*1 ~ +3C (Canada)
Trip A Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A and average fuel economy A.
With Refuel/IGN Off/Manually Reset*1
Trip B Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B and average fuel economy B.
With Refuel/IGN Off/Manually Reset*1
Reverse Shift Position Beep
Turns the reverse alert tone on and off. ON/OFF*1
Adjust Alarm Volume Changes the alarm volume, such as the buzzers, warnings, turn signal sound, and so on.
High/Mid*1/Low
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 339
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Meter Setup
Turn by Turn Display Selects whether the turn-by-turn display comes on during the route guidance.
ON*1/OFF
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. ON*1/OFF
Rear Seat Reminder Turns the Rear Seat Reminder feature on and off. ON*1/OFF
Power Tailgate Setup*
Power Tailgate Keyless Open Mode
Changes the keyless setting for when the power tailgate opens.
Anytime*1/When Unlocked
Power Tailgate Open by Outer Handle
Changes the setting to open power tailgate by tailgate outer handle.
Off (Manual only)/ On (Power/ Manual)*1
Hands Free Access Power Tailgate*
Changes the setting to open power tailgate by a swift forward in and out kicking motion under the rear bumper.
ON*1/OFF
Keyless Access Setup
Door Unlock Mode Changes which doors unlock when you grab the drivers door handle.
Driver Door or Tailgate*1/All Doors
Keyless Access Light Flash
Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/lock the doors.
ON*1/OFF
Keyless Access Beep Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the doors.
ON*1/OFF
339Continued* Not available on all models
340
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 340
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Keyless Access Setup
Remote Start System On/Off* Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. ON*1/OFF
Walk Away Auto Lock
Changes the settings for the automatic locking the doors when you walk away from the vehicle while carrying the remote.
Enable/Disable*1
Driver Assist System Setup
Forward Collision Warning Distance
Changes at which distance CMBSTM alerts. Long/Normal*1/ Short
ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep
Causes the system to beep when the system detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of the ACC range.
ON/OFF*1
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
Changes the setting for the road departure mitigation system.
Normal*1/Wide/ Warning Only
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep
Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is suspended.
ON/OFF*1
Blind Spot Information* Changes the setting for the blind spot information.
Audible and Visual Alert*1/Visual Alert/ OFF
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 341
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle Door Setup
Auto Door Lock Changes the setting for the automatic locking feature.
With Vehicle Speed*1/Shift from P/OFF
Auto Door Unlock Changes the setting for when the doors unlock automatically.
All Doors with Drivers Door Opens*1/All Doors with Shift to P/All Doors with IGN Off/ OFF
Key and Remote Unlock Mode
Sets up either the drivers door or all doors to unlock on the first push of the remote or built-in key.
Driver Door*1/All Doors
Keyless Lock Answer Back
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash. LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
ON*1/OFF
Security Relock Timer Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and the security system to set after you unlock the vehicle without opening any door.
90 sec/60 sec/30 sec*1
341Continued
342
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 342
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle
Lighting Setup
Interior Light Dimming Time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on after you close the doors.
60 sec/30 sec*1/15 sec
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close the drivers door.
60 sec/30 sec/15 sec*1/0 sec
Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity
Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of the instrument panel when the headlight switch is in the AUTO position.
Min/Low/Mid*1/ High/Max
Auto Headlight On with Wiper On
Changes the settings for the wiper operation when the headlights automatically come on while the headlight switch is in the AUTO position.
ON*1/OFF
Auto Light Sensitivity* Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.
Max/High/Mid*1/ Low/Min
Wireless Charger* Turns the wireless charger feature on and off. ON*1/OFF
Maintenance Information
Oil Life Resets the engine oil life display when you have performed the maintenance service.
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 343
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Camera Rear Camera
Default Camera View Changes the camera view mode when the rear camera monitor is turned on.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 491
Last Used/Normal View/Wide View*1
Guidelines Selects whether the guidelines come on the rear camera monitor.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 491
Dynamic/Fixed/ Both*1/OFF
Cross Traffic Monitor* Turns the cross traffic monitor on and off. ON*1/OFF
Display
Brightness Adjusts the settings of the audio/information screen.
2 Display Setup P. 255 Contrast
Black Level
343Continued* Not available on all models
344
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 344
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Sound
Bass / Treble
Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers sound. 2 Adjusting the Sound P. 254
Center / Subwoofer Volume*
Subwoofer Volume*
Balance / Fader
Audio Zones*
Speed Volume Compensation
DTS Neural Surround*
Notifications Changes the notification settings for apps.
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings Featu
res
1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset all settings to default and delete all personal data.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the preinstalled apps to their factory default.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use the HondaLink because it goes offline.
2 HondaLink P. 287
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 345
Defaulting All the Settings Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select Factory Data Reset. u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. 5. Select Continue to reset the settings. 6. Select Continue again to reset the settings. u The system will reboot.
345
346
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 346
HomeLink Universal Transceiver*
1HomeLink Universal Transceiver*
Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage door opener, confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system, such as an electronic eye, or other safety and reverse stop features. If it does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.
NOTE: Some LED lightbulbs installed in the garage door opener can interfere with the training and consistent operation of your HomeLink device. Please consider use of Low RF interference bulbs in your garage door opener.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems.
Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety information, contact the manufacturer.
Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.
When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage doors path.
Important Safety Precautions
* Not available on all models
uuHomeLink Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 347
Training HomeLink If it is necessary to erase a previously entered learned code: Press and hold the I and III HomeLink
buttons for about 10 seconds, until the orange indicator blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to step 1.
If you are training the second or third button, go directly to step 1.
The instructions on the next page should work for most gate or garage openers, but may not work for all. For detailed instructions about your specific remote opener, visit http://www.homelink.com or call (800) 355-3515.
III HomeLink Button
Indicator
I HomeLink Button
347Continued
uuHomeLink Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink
348
Featu res
1Training HomeLink
Reprogramming a Button If you want to retrain a programmed button for a new device, you do not have to erase all button memory. You can replace the existing memory code using this procedure:
Erasing Button Memory To erase programming from the buttons, press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons until the HomeLink indicator changes from orange to rapidly flashing green. This should take about 10 seconds. You should erase all programming before selling the vehicle.
Operating To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device.
Questions For questions or comments, visit www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/ HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the HomeLink Hotline (North America only) at (800) 355-3515.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.
2.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the HomeLink indicator begins to slowly flash orange. This should take about 20 seconds.
Release the HomeLink button and position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 - 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the HomeLink button you want to program, then follow steps 3 - 6 under programming a button.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 348
Programming a Button
Training Complete HomeLink LED is
continuously on green.
YES
YES
1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the HomeLink button you want to program.
3b. Canadian Garage Door Opener A. Press and release the HomeLink button. Press, hold and release the button on the remote every 2 secs. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing or continuously on green? The process should take less than 60 seconds.
NO
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Is the HomeLink indicator (LED) slowly flashing orange?
NO
3a. Hold the button on the remote transmitter. Does HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing green or continuously on green? The process should take less than 60 seconds.
5. Press and hold the HomeLink button again.
HomeLink indicator rapidly flashes green.
5a. The remote has a rolling code. Press the learn button on the remote-controlled device (e.g. garage door opener).
6. Press and hold the HomeLink button again. The remote-controlled device should operate.
Training Complete 5b. Within 30 secs, press and hold the
programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.
4. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for about a second. Does the device (garage door opener) work?
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 349
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
res
1Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Place your phone where you can get good reception.
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities, U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876. Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
To use the system, the Bluetooth setting must be ON.
2 Phone Setup P. 354
Voice control tips Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphones.
Press the button when you want to call a number using a phonebook name or a number. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
If the microphones pick up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted.
To change the volume level, select the audio systems VOL (Volume) or use the remote audio controls on the steering wheel.
If there is no speed dial entry in the system, the pop- up notification appears on the screen.
2 Favorite Contacts P. 359
If there is no call history, the call history is disabled.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicles audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
HFL Buttons
(Talk) Button
Volume up
Microphone
(Hang-up) Button
(Pick-up) Button
Volume down
ENTER Button
(Back) Button
/ / / Buttons3 4
(Home) Button
349Continued
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuUsing HFL
350
Featu res
1Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Bluetooth Wireless Technology The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 350
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen of the driver information interface, or to answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up) button: Press to end a call. (Back) button: Press to go back to the previous screen, or cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to access Voice Portal. / / / buttons: Press to select an item displayed on the phone screen
of the driver information interface. ENTER button: Press to call a number listed in the selected item on the phone screen of the driver information interface.
(Home) button: Press to go back to the home screen of the driver information interface.
To go to the phone screen of the driver information interface: 1. Press the (home) button on the steering wheel. 2. Select Phone. u You can select Favorite Contacts or Recent Calls.
3 4
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuUsing HFL Featu
res
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 351
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored phonebook names or numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.
2 Favorite Contacts P. 359
HFL Status Display
Limitations for Manual Operation
Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
Signal Strength
HFL Mode
Battery Level Status
Callers Name Callers Number
351
352
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth- compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving.
o the system.
ct, or delete a paired device.
cted cell phone.
atically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
e to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 352
HFL Menus The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.
Phone settings screen 1. Select . 2. Select Phone. 3. Select Settings.
Change Connected Phone
(Existing entry list)
+ Connect New Device Pair a new phone t
Connect, disconne
Ringtone Select a fixed ringtone or the one from the conne
Auto Sync Phone Set phonebook and call history data to be autom
Turn HondaLink Assist on and off.HondaLink Assist
Auto Phone Call Transfer Set calls to automatically transfer from your phon
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
oming and missed calls.
.
.
in the speed dial list.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 353
Phone menu screen 1. Select . 2. Select Phone.
Display the last outgoing, incRecent Calls
Favorite Contacts
All
Dialed
Received
Display the last outgoing calls
Display the last incoming calls
Missed Display the last missed calls.
Keypad Enter a phone number to dial.
(Existing entry list) Dial the selected number
Contacts Display the paired phones phonebook.
353Continued
354
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 354
Bluetooth setup You can turn Bluetooth function on and off. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Connections. 4. Select Bluetooth. 5. Select Options. 6. Select Bluetooth, then ON.
Phone Setup
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to the system before you can make and receive hands- free calls.
Phone Pairing Tips: You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving. Up to six phones can be paired. Your phones battery may drain faster when it is
paired to the system. If your phone is not ready to be paired or is not
paired within three minutes, the system will time out and return to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or more icons on the right side. These icons indicate the following:
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth Audio. : The phone can be used with HFL. : The phone can be used with the internet
tethering.
If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, pairing of additional Bluetooth compatible devices is unavailable and + Connect New Device is grayed out from the Bluetooth screen.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 355
To pair a cell phone (when there is no phone paired to the system)
1. Select . 2. Select Phone. 3. Select Connect Phone. 4. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then select + Connect New Device. u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device. 5. Select your phone when it appears on the
list. u If your phone still does not appear,
search for Bluetooth devices using your phone. From your phone, search for HandsFree Link.
6. The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match. This may vary by phone.
7. Select desired functions and then select Connect. u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Continue or Connect without Internet.
Continued 355
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
356
Featu res
1To change the currently paired phone
If no other phones are found or paired when trying to switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the original phone is connected again.
To pair other phones, select + Connect New Device from the Bluetooth screen.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 356
To change the currently paired phone 1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 352
2. Select Change Connected Phone. 3. Select a phone to connect. u HFL disconnects the connected phone
and starts searching for another paired phone.
4. Select , or . 5. Select Apply.
To delete a paired phone 1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 352
2. Select Change Connected Phone. 3. Select a phone you want to delete.
4. Select Delete Device. 5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Delete.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Ringtone
Vehicle: The fixed ringtone sounds from the speakers. Phone: Depending on the make and model of the cell phone, the ringtone stored in the phone will sound if the phone is connected.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 357
You can change the ringtone setting. 1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 352
2. Select Ringtone. 3. Select Vehicle or Phone.
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL.
1. Go to the phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 352
2. Select Auto Phone Call Transfer. 3. Select ON or OFF.
Ringtone
Automatic Transferring
Continued 357
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
358
Featu res
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a name from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see a category icon. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to the system.
The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Home
Mobile Work
Other
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 358
When Automatic Phone Sync is set to On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to the system.
Changing the Automatic Phone Sync setting
1. Go to the phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 352
2. Select Auto Sync Phone. 3. Select ON or OFF.
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 359
To store a speed dial number: 1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 353
2. Select the Recent Calls, Contacts, or Keypad screen.
3. Select the star icon. u A notification appears on the screen if
the speed dial is successfully stored. u To remove the speed dial, select the star
icon again.
Favorite Contacts
Recent Calls Screen
Contacts Screen
Keypad Screen
Star Icon
Star Icon
Star Icon
359Continued
360
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 360
To edit a speed dial 1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 353
2. Select Favorite Contacts. 3. Select Edit on the speed dial entry you
want to edit. 4. Select a setting you want.
To delete a speed dial 1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 353
2. Select Favorite Contacts. 3. Select Edit on the speed dial entry you
want to delete. 4. Select Remove Contact. 5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Continue.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Making a Call
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.
While there is an active connection with Apple CarPlay, phone calls cannot be made with HandsFreeLink and are only made from Apple CarPlay.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 361
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, or speed dial entries.
Making a Call
Continued 361
362
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 362
To make a call using the imported phonebook
1. Go to the phone menu screen. 2 Phone menu screen P. 353
2. Select Contacts. 3. Select a name. u You can sort by First Name or Last
Name. Select the icon on the upper right of the screen.
4. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.
To make a call using a phone number 1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 353
2. Select Keypad. 3. Select a number. u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering numbers. 4. Select Call. u Dialing starts automatically.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1To make a call using the call history
The call history appears only when a phone is connected to the system.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 363
To make a call using the call history Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Missed, and Received. 1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 353
2. Select Recent Calls. u You can sort by All, Dialed, Missed, or
Received. Select the icon on the upper right of the screen.
3. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.
To make a call using a speed dial entry 1. Go to the phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 353
2. Select Favorite Contacts. u You can change the order of speed dial
entries by selecting Reorder. 3. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.
Continued 363
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
364
Featu res
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call. Press the button again to return to the current call.
Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it. Press the button if you want to hang up the current call.
You can select the icons on the audio/information screen instead of the and buttons.
1Options During a Call
Keypad: Available on some phones.
You can select the icons on the audio/information screen.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 364
When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds (if activated) and the Incoming Call... screen appears.
Press the button to answer the call. Press the button to decline or end the call.
The following options are available during a call. Mute: Mute your voice. Use Handheld: Transfer a call from the system to your phone. Keypad: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system.
The available options are shown on the lower half of the screen.
Select the option. u The mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
Receiving a Call
Options During a Call
Mute Icon
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1To Set Up Text Message Options
To use the text message function, it may be necessary to set up on your phone.
1To turn on or off the text message notice
ON: A pop-up notification comes on every time you receive a new message. OFF: The message you receive is stored in the system without notification.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 365
To turn on or off the text message notice
1. Select . 2. Select Messages. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Notifications. 5. Select ON or OFF.
To Set Up Text Message Options
Continued 365
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
366
Featu res
1Receiving a Text Message
The system does not display any received messages while you are driving. You can only hear them read aloud.
The system can only receive messages that are sent as text (SMS) messages. The message sent using the data services will not be displayed in the list.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to 20 of the last text messages received.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text message feature. Only use the text message feature when conditions allow you to do so safely.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 366
HFL can display newly received text messages as well as the last 20 messages received on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new text message.
2. Select Open to display the message. u The text message is displayed.
3. Select Play to listen to the message. To discontinue the message read-out, select Stop.
Receiving a Text Message
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Selecting a Phone
You can only receive notifications from one phone at a time.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 367
You can select one from the Bluetooth device list to be active and receive notifications.
1. Select . 2. Select Messages. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Change Connected Phone. 5. Change a desired phone.
2 To change the currently paired phone P. 356
Selecting a Phone
Continued 367
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
368
Featu res
1Displaying Messages
The (blue) icon appears next to an unread message.
If you delete a message on the phone, the message will also be deleted from the system. If you send a message from the system, the message goes to your phones outbox.
To see the previous or next message, select Prev or Next on the message screen.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 368
1. Select . 2. Select Messages. u Select a phone if necessary.
3. Select a message. u The text message is displayed.
Displaying Messages
Message List
Text Message
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Reply to a message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows: Talk to you later, Im driving. Im on my way. Im running late. OK Yes No
You can add a reply message by selecting + Create New Message.
2 To edit a reply message P. 370
Only certain phones receive and send messages when paired and connected. For a list of compatible phones: U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876. Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 369
Read or Stop reading a message 1. Go to the text message screen. 2. Select Play. u The system starts reading the message
aloud. 3. Select Pause to stop reading.
Select Play again to start reading the message.
Reply to a message 1. Go to the text message screen. 2. Select Reply. 3. Select the reply message. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Send to send the message. u Message sent appears on the screen
when the reply message was successfully sent.
Continued 369
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
370
Featu res
1To edit a reply message
You can change the order of reply messages by selecting Reorder.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 370
To edit a reply message 1. Select . 2. Select Messages. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Edit System Replies. 5. Select the reply message you want to edit
or + Create New Message. u The on-screen keyboard screen is
displayed. 6. Enter a reply message, and then select
Save.
To delete a reply message 1. Select . 2. Select Messages. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Delete System Replies. 5. Select on the reply message you want to
delete. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
6. Select Delete.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 371
Making a call to a sender 1. Go to the text message screen. 2. Select Call.
371Continued
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
372
Featu res
1In Case of Emergency
Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the operator if the battery level is low, the line is disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular coverage.
You cannot use this emergency service when: You travel outside the HondaLink service coverage
areas. There is a problem with the connecting devices,
such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit itself.
You cannot operate other phone-related functions using the screen while talking to the operator. Select Hang Up to terminate the connection to your vehicle.
1Automatic collision notification
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it repeatedly tries until it succeeds.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 372
Automatic collision notification If your vehicles airbags deploy or if the unit detects that the vehicle is severely impacted, your vehicle automatically will attempt to connect to the HondaLink operator. If connected, information about your vehicle, its location, and its condition can be sent to the operator*1; you also can speak to the operator when connected.
IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink Assist, owner activation constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink Assist will attempt to notify emergency services but NEITHER HONDA NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.
Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink Assist services at any time or for any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in, or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental regulation.
*1: Depending on your phone and adequate cellular coverage, your vehicles location may not be sent to the operator.
In Case of Emergency
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1To enable notification
Setting options: ON: Notification is available. OFF: Disable the feature.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 373
To enable notification 1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 352
2. Select HondaLink Assist. 3. Select ON or OFF.
Continued 373
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
374
Featu res
1Manual operator connection*
Do not press the button while driving. When you need to contact the operator, park the vehicle in a safe place.
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it automatically cancels the action after three minutes.
If necessary, the cover can be broken to access the ASSIST button.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 374
Manual operator connection*
If you need to talk to the HondaLink operator in a situation where no airbag has deployed, you can manually connect to them by pressing the ASSIST button with the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON. 1. Open the cover attached to the ceiling
console. 2. Press the ASSIST button. u You are connected to the HondaLink
operator.
ASSIST Button
* Not available on all models
* Not available on all m
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 375
Driving
This chapter discusses driving and refueling.
Before Driving................................... 376 Towing a Trailer................................ 382 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ..... 392 When Driving
Starting the Engine .......................... 394 Automatic Transmission ................... 402 Shifting............................................ 403 Auto Idle Stop.................................. 411 ECON Mode .................................... 417 Intelligent Traction Management...... 418 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System............... 420
Agile Handling Assist ....................... 422 Blind spot information System*........ 423
odels
Intelligent Variable Torque Management (i- VTM4TM) AWD System*.................. 426
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire Fill Assist.......................... 427
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation ......... 429
Honda Sensing ................................ 431 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ....................................... 434
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)......... 446 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) .. 459 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System ....................................... 468
Front Sensor Camera ....................... 473 Radar Sensor.................................... 475
Braking Brake System ................................... 476 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 478 Brake Assist System ......................... 479
Parking Your Vehicle When Stopped ................................ 480 Parking Sensor System* ................... 482 Cross Traffic Monitor* ..................... 487
Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 491 Refueling
Fuel Information .............................. 493 How to Refuel ................................. 494
Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions................................ 496
375
376
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 376
Before Driving
1Exterior Checks
NOTICE When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force them open, as this can damage the rubber trim around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder. You will be unable to insert the key if the water freezes in the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite flammable materials left under the hood, causing a fire. If youve parked your vehicle for an extended period, inspect and remove any debris that may have collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a small animal. Also, check under the hood for leftover flammable materials after you or someone else has performed maintenance on your vehicle.
Driving Preparation Check the following items before you start driving.
Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior lights, or other parts of the vehicle. u Remove any frost, snow, or ice. u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened. u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components. Make sure the hood is securely closed. u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
Make sure the tires are in good condition. u Check air pressures, and check for damage and excessive wear.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 528
Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle. u There are blind spots from the inside.
Exterior Checks
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation D
rivin g
1Interior Checks
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 377
Store or secure all items on board properly. u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicles
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe. 2 Maximum Load Limit P. 379
Do not pile items higher than the seat height. u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking. Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat. u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving. If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle. u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
Securely close and lock all doors and the tailgate. 2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 137
Adjust your seating position properly. u Adjust the head restraint, too.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 181 2 Adjusting the Front and Rear Outer Seat Head Restraint Positions P. 188
Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly. u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 178 2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 179
Interior Checks
Continued 377
378
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 378
Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats. u They can interfere with the drivers ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats. Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 42
Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the vehicle, and go off soon after. u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 80
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit D
rivin g
1Maximum Load Limit
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue load.
2 Specifications P. 582
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 582
3WARNING Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 379
Maximum Load Limit The maximum load for your vehicle is 948 lbs (430 kg).
See the Tire and Loading Information label attached to the drivers doorjamb.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit - (1)Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicles placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
Label Example
379Continued
380
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 380
(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit D
rivin g
1Maximum Load Limit
Towing a Trailer: See Towing a Trailer to determine whether your vehicle is designed to tow a tailer.
2 Towing a Trailer P. 382
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 381
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the drivers doorjamb.
Load Limits Example
Example1
Max Load 948 lbs (430 kg)
Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs (68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight 648 lbs (294 kg)
Example2
Max Load 948 lbs (430 kg)
Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs (68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight 198 lbs (90 kg)
381
382
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 382
Towing a Trailer
1Towing Load Limits
Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale. If a public scale is not available, add the estimated weight of your cargo load to the weight of your trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and then measure the tongue load with an appropriate scale or tongue gauge or estimate it based on cargo distribution.
Refer to the trailer owners manual for additional information.
Break-in Period Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicles first 600 miles (1,000 km).
Never exceed the gross weight ratings. Gross weight information
2 Vehicle Specifications P. 582
3WARNING Exceeding any load limit or improperly loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Check the loading of your vehicle and trailer carefully before starting to drive.
Towing Preparation
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.
Total trailer weight Do not exceed the maximum allowable weight of the trailer, cargo, and everything in or on it shown in the table. Towing loads in excess of this can seriously affect vehicle handling and performance and can damage the engine and drivetrain.
Each weight limit is calculated based on the following conditions: Occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back. Each occupant weighs 150 lbs (68 kg). Each occupant has 17.6 lb (8 kg) cargo in the cargo area. Any additional weight, cargo or accessories reduce the maximum trailer weight and maximum tongue load.
Towing Load Limits
Total Load
Number of occupants
AWD models with ATF cooler
AWD models without ATF cooler
2WD models
2 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg) 3,500 lbs (1,588 kg) 3,500 lbs (1,588 kg) 3 4,750 lbs (2,155 kg) 3,250 lbs (1,474 kg) 3,250 lbs (1,474 kg) 4 4,500 lbs (2,041 kg) 3,000 lbs (1,361 kg) 3,000 lbs (1,361 kg) 5 4,250 lbs (1,928 kg) 2,750 lbs (1,247 kg) 2,750 lbs (1,247 kg)
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation D
rivin g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 383
Tongue load The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded trailer on the hitch should be approximately: Boat trailers: 5 15% of the total trailer weight Other trailers: 10 15% of total trailer weight
Tongue Load
Number of occupants
AWD models with or without ATF cooler
2WD models
2 500 lbs (227 kg) 350 lbs (159 kg) 3 475 lbs (215 kg) 325 lbs (147 kg) 4 405 lbs (183 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg) 5 234 lbs (106 kg) 275 lbs (125 kg)
383Continued
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
384
D rivin
g
1How to weigh the trailer loads using the public scale
Fully load the vehicle and trailer. An attendant who watches the scale is needed as all occupants should stay in the vehicle.
If a public scale is not available, add the estimated weight of your cargo load to the weight of your trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and then measure the tongue load with an appropriate scale or tongue gauge or estimate it based on cargo distribution.
Weight limit for 2WD models AWD models
Front gross axle 2,734 lbs (1,240 kg)
2,855 lbs (1,295 kg)
Gross vehicle 5,291 lbs (2,400 kg)
5,401 lbs (2,450 kg)
Rear gross axle 2,965 lbs (1,345 kg)
3,141 lbs (1,425 kg)
Gross combined 8,025 lbs (3,640 kg)
9,755 lbs (4,425 kg)
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 384
How to weigh the trailer loads using the public scale Check each weight in the order indicated as shown. Refer to the table on the right for each weights limit except for the tongue load.
2 Tongue load P. 383
If you cannot weigh the rear axle, subtract 1 from 2. The maximum gross combined weight (4) decreases by 2% for every 1,000 feet
(305 meters) of elevation. To calculate the tongue load, subtract 5 from 6. Refer to the trailer owners manual for additional information.
1. Front gross axle weight.
2. Gross vehicle weight.
4. Gross combined weight.
3. Rear gross axle weight. 5. Hitched trailer weight. 6. Unhitched trailer weight.
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation D
rivin g
1Towing Equipment and Accessories
Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/ territory, and local regulations.
Consult your trailer maker for proper installation and setup of the equipment. Improper installation and setup can affect the handling, stability, and braking performance of your vehicle.
Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other items are recommended or required for your towing situation.
The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type and brand. If a connector is required, it should only be installed by a qualified technician.
Trailer packages and products: Ball mount, hitch plug, hitch pin etc. Wiring harness kit Trailer hitch kit (jumper harness included)
2 Trailer brakes P. 385 Automatic transmission cooler Are available at a dealer.
1Trailer brakes
The 4-pin gray connector is located under the instrument panel near the top of the parking brake pedal.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 385
Towing generally requires a variety of supplemental equipment. To ensure the best quality, we recommend that you purchase Honda equipment whenever possible.
Trailer brakes Recommended for any trailer with a total weight of 1,000 lbs (450 kg) or more: There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet. If you choose electric brakes, be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to your vehicles hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a potential hazard. The 4-pin gray connector installed in your vehicle has all of the circuits required to install most electric trailer brake controllers.
Have a qualified mechanic install your trailer brake controller following the trailer brake controller manufacturers instructions. Failure to properly install the trailer brake controller may increase the distance it takes for you to stop your vehicle when towing a trailer.
Towing Equipment and Accessories
Electric Brake (Brown)
Ground (Black)
+B (Light Green) (20A)
Stop (Violet)
Trailer brake controller connectors terminals:
Continued 385
386
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 386
The trailer hitch harness is used to install the controller for the electric trailer brakes. Insert the trailer brake fuse into the engine compartment sub fuse box.
2 Engine Compartment Fuse Box Type B P. 573
Electric Brake (Brown)
+B (20A) (Blue)Ground
(Black)
Brake Lights (Sky Blue)
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation D
rivin g
1Trailer light
The trailer lighting connector is located behind the left side panel in the cargo area. Even if you are planning to use the non-Honda trailer lighting harness and converter, ask a dealer for the correct connector and pins.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 387
Trailer light Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the requirements in the area where you plan to tow.
We recommend that you have a dealer install a Honda wiring harness and converter. They are designed for your vehicle.
Hitches Read the trailer manufacturers instructions, and select the appropriate draw bar for the height of the trailer you will be towing.
Weight distribution hitches Your vehicle is designed to tow without the need for a load distributing hitch. If you wish to use one, please consult your trailer maker for proper installation and set-up. Improper set-up could degrade the handling, stability, and braking performance of your vehicle.
+B Trailer Main (Red)
+B Trailer Charge (Sky Blue)
+B ELEC Brake (Brown)
IG2 HAC (Light Green)
Back Light (Brown) Trailer Small Light (Red)
Stop Light (Beige)
Pins wiring color codes and their purposes:
Right Turn Signal (Green) Left Turn Signal (Blue)
Continued 387
388
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 388
Safety chains Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
Sway control This device can be used if your trailer tends to sway. Your trailer maker can tell you what kind of sway control you need and how to install it. Improper installation could degrade the handling and stability of your vehicle.
Trailer mirrors Many states, provinces and territories require special exterior mirrors when towing a trailer. Install special mirrors whenever you cannot clearly see behind you, or if the trailer creates a blind spot.
Automatic transmission cooler
An additional ATF (automatic transmission fluid) cooler is required to keep the transmission from overheating when towing more than 3,500 lbs (1,588 kg). You can get the additional ATF cooler at a dealer.
AWD models
uuTowing a TraileruTrailer Stability Assist D
rivin g
1Trailer Stability Assist
Trailer stability assist is not a function that prevents the vehicle and trailer from swaying. Avoid high speeds, abrupt steering, improper trailer load, and sudden braking to keep the trailer from swaying. When swayed too severely, the system becomes ineffective, and you may lose control of your vehicle, causing the trailer to roll over or get damaged.
2 Driving Safely with a Trailer P. 390
Trailer towing sway is caused by: Crosswinds Improper towbar down load Excessive Speed
The VSA system indicator blinks during the trailer stability assist operation.
2 VSA Operation P. 420
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 389
Trailer Stability Assist Helps to stabilize the vehicle and trailer when the trailer severely sways.
How trailer stability assist works When the vehicle and trailer become unstable while driving, trailer stability assist determines the cause. If the trailer oscillation is detected as the cause, and the swaying increases, the system applies the brakes or controls engine output to reduce vehicle speed. Both the vehicle and trailer brake lights come on automatically if you brake to reduce vehicle speed.
389
390
uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer
D rivin
g
1Driving Safely with a Trailer
Operating speed when towing a trailer must not exceed 62 mph (100 km/h).
Parking In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel chocks at each of the trailers tires.
1Towing Speeds and Gears
When towing a fixed-sided trailer (e.g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h). At higher speeds, the trailer may sway or affect vehicle handling.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 390
Driving Safely with a Trailer
Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition. Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits.
2 Towing Load Limits P. 382
When towing more than 3,500 lbs (1,588 kg), use of gasoline with a pump octane number of 87 or higher is recommended. u Towing performance can be affected by high altitude, high temperature, or
steep uphill. Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer. Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while
driving. Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly. Check the pressures of the trailer tires. Turn off the Auto Idle Stop system using the Auto Idle Stop OFF button. The
trailer weight can affect your vehicle's brake effectiveness if Auto Idle Stop is activated on a hill while towing a trailer.
Drive slower than normal. Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers. Use the (D position when towing a trailer on level roads.
Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal. Allow more time and distance for braking. Do not brake or turn suddenly.
Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer
Towing Speeds and Gears
Turning and Braking
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle D
rivin g
1Driving in Hilly Terrain
If the automatic transmission fluid temperature exceeds the specified limit, the transmission will also automatically up shift, even in the sequential shift mode.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 391
Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the white (Hot) mark, turn off the climate control system and reduce speed. Pull to the side of the road safely to cool down the engine if necessary.
Change the gear position to (S position if the transmission shifts frequently.
When retrieving a boat from the water, we recommend using the sequential shift mode (S to utilize the transmissions lower gears.
Towing Your Vehicle Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 577
Driving in Hilly Terrain
Retrieving a Boat
391
392
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 392
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
1Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover.
2 Important Handling Information P. 34 2 Precautions While Driving P. 401
Spinning the tires excessively can also damage the Intelligent VTM4 (i-VTM4TM) system.
3WARNING Improperly operating this vehicle on or off pavement can cause a crash or rollover in which you and your passengers could be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions and guidelines in this owners manual.
Keep your speed low, and dont drive faster than conditions permit.
General Information Your vehicle has been designed primarily for use on pavement, however, its higher ground clearance allows you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads. It is not designed for trail-blazing, or other challenging off-highway activities.
If you decide to drive on unpaved roads, you will find that it requires somewhat different driving skills and that your vehicle will handle somewhat differently than it does on pavement. Pay attention to the precautions and tips in this section, and get acquainted with your vehicle before leaving the pavement.
Important Safety Precautions To avoid loss of control or rollover, be sure to follow all precautions and recommendations: Be sure to store cargo properly and do not exceed your cargo load limits.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 379
Whenever you drive, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts. Keep your speed low, and never go faster than the conditions allow. Its up to you to continually assess the situation and drive within the limits.
uuOff-Highway Driving GuidelinesuAvoiding Trouble D
rivin g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 393
Avoiding Trouble Check Out Your Vehicle before you leave the pavement and make sure that all
scheduled maintenance has been completed. Pay special attention to the condition of the tires, and check the tire pressures.
Remember the route you choose presents limits (too steep or bumpy), you have limits (driving skill and comfort), and your vehicle has limits (traction, stability, and power). Failing to recognize these limits will likely put you and your passengers in a hazardous situation.
Accelerating and Braking should be done slowly and gradually. Trying to start or stop too fast can cause a loss of traction and you could lose control.
Avoiding Obstacles and Debris in the road reduces the likelihood of a rollover or damage to your suspension or other components.
Driving on Slopes increases your risk of a rollover, particularly if you attempt to drive across a slope that is too steep. Going straight up or down a slope is usually the safest. If you cant clearly see all conditions or obstacles on a slope, walk it before you drive it. If there is any doubt whether you can safely pass, dont try it. Find another route. If you get stuck when climbing, do not try to turn around. Back down slowly following the same route you took up the hill.
Crossing a Stream - Avoid driving through deep water. If you encounter water in your route (a small stream or large puddle, for example), evaluate it carefully before going ahead. Make sure it is shallow, flowing slowly, and has firm ground underneath. If you are not sure of the depth or the ground, turn around and find another route. Driving through deep water can also damage your vehicle. The water can get into the transmission and differential, diluting the lubricant and causing an eventual failure. It can also wash the grease out of the wheel bearings.
If You Get Stuck, carefully go in the direction that you think will get you unstuck. Do not spin the tires as this will only make things worse and could damage the transmission. If you are unable to free yourself, your vehicle will need to be towed. Front tow hook is provided for this purpose.
393
394
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 394
When Driving
1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the engine. The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, climate control system and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve starting and warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system.
Bring the keyless remote close to the ENGINE START/STOP button if the battery in the keyless remote is weak.
2 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak P. 560
The engine may not start if the keyless remote is subjected to strong radio waves.
Starting the Engine 1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button without depressing the accelerator pedal.
Brake Pedal
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine D
rivin g
1Starting the Engine
Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to start the engine. If the engine does not start, wait at least 30 seconds before starting the engine again.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded device is used, the engines fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 151
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 395
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped. 1. Put the transmission into (P . 2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Stopping the Engine
Continued 395
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
396
D rivin
g
1Remote Engine Start*
If there are buildings and obstacles between your vehicle and the remote, the range will be reduced. This distance may vary by external electrical interference.
3WARNING Carbon monoxide gas is toxic and can rapidly accumulate in closed or even partly enclosed areas. Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you. Never use the remote engine starter with the vehicle parked in a garage or other areas with limited ventilation.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 396
You can remotely start the engine on using the keyless remote.
To start the engine
When started remotely, the engine automatically shuts off after 10 minutes of idling and/or the brake pedal and ENGINE START/STOP button have not been pressed simultaneously.
Remote Engine Start*
Press the button, then press and hold the button. Some exterior lights flash once.
Go within the range, and try again.
LED: Blinks when any button is pressed.
Some exterior lights flash six times if the engine starts successfully.
Exterior lights will not flash if the engine does not start.
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine D
rivin g
1Remote Engine Start*
The engine may not start by the remote engine start if: You have disabled a remote engine start setting
using the driver information interface. The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). The transmission is in a position other than (P. The hood is open, or any door or the tailgate is
unlocked. You have already used the remote twice to start
the engine. Another registered keyless remote is in the vehicle. There is any antenna failure. The door is unlocked with the built-in key. The engine oil pressure is low. The engine coolant temperature is extremely high. The telematics unit malfunctions. The security system alarm is not set.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 397
To extend the run time for another 10 minutes during the first run, press the button, then press and hold the button. u Some exterior lights flash six times if a 10-minute extension request was
transmitted successfully. To stop the engine
Press and hold the button for
one second.
Go within the range, and try again.
The exterior lights will not flash when the remote is out of the keyless access system range. The engine will not stop.
The exterior lights flash once if the engine stops successfully.
Continued 397* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
398
D rivin
g
1Remote Engine Start*
The engine may stop while it is running if: You do not start the vehicle within 10 minutes of
starting the engine with the keyless remote. The engine is stopped by using the keyless remote. There is any antenna failure. The security system alarm is not set. The door is unlocked with the built-in key. The hood is open, or any door, or the tailgate is
unlocked. Any door is open. The telematics unit* malfunction. The engine coolant temperature is extremely high. The battery is low. The engine oil pressure is low. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp comes on if there
is a problem with the emissions control systems. The transmission is in a position other than (P.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 398
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine D
rivin g
1Remote Engine Start*
While the engine is running, the vehicle will automatically precondition inside the vehicle. When it is warm outside: The climate control system is activated in
recirculation mode. The seat ventilator is activated*. When it is cold outside: The defroster is activated at a moderately warm
temperature. The rear defogger and door mirror heaters* are
activated. The seat heaters* and heated steering wheel* are
activated. 2 Heated Steering Wheel* P. 210 2 Front Seat Heaters/Ventilators* P. 208,
209
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 399
Continued 399* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
400
D rivin
g
1Starting to Drive
The engine stops when the transmission position is changed from (P before the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed. Follow step 1 when starting to drive.
When the engine was started using the keyless remote*
1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and will not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake.
Hill start assist will operate even when VSA is switched off.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 400
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal and press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that the parking brake and brake system indicator has gone off.
2 Parking Brake P. 476
3. Put the transmission into (D . Select (R when reversing. 4. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away. Hill start assist system Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Put the transmission into (D or (S when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Starting to Drive When the engine was started using the keyless remote*
When the engine was started in any case
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving D
rivin g
1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE Do not change the gear position while pressing the accelerator pedal. You could damage the transmission.
NOTICE If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel in the full left or right position for a while, the electric power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system goes into a protective mode, and limits its performance. The steering wheel becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the system cools down, the EPS system is restored. Repeated operation under these conditions can eventually damage the system.
If the power mode is set to ACCESSORY while driving, the engine will shut down and all steering and brake power assist functions will stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not select (N while driving as you will lose engine braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation, avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so as not to damage the engine or powertrain.
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km) after purchasing your new vehicle or replacing the brake pads or rotors, to allow for proper break-in.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 401
Precautions While Driving
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. To prevent rollovers or loss of control: Take corners at slower speeds than you would with a passenger vehicle. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers whenever possible. Do not modify your vehicle in any way that you would raise the center of gravity. Do not carry heavy cargo on the roof.
Never carry more than 165 lbs (75 kg) of cargo on the roof rack (Honda accessory).
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine, driveline, or cause electrical component failure.
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location. Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.
Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
In Rain
Other Precautions
401
402
uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission
D rivin
g
1Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover.
2 Important Handling Information P. 34 2 Precautions While Driving P. 401
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 402
Automatic Transmission
When the engine runs at higher idle speeds, the creeping force increases. Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.
Creeping
Kickdown
uuWhen DrivinguShifting D
rivin g
1Shifting
To prevent malfunction and unintended engagement: Do not spill any liquids on or around shift buttons. Do not place or drop any objects on or around shift
buttons. Do not let passengers or children operate the shift
buttons.
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when you depress the accelerator pedal with the gear position in (N. Change the gear position to (D or (R with the brake pedal depressed.
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 96
3WARNING The vehicle can roll away if left unattended without confirming that Park is engaged.
A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death.
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal until you have confirmed that (P is shown on the gear position Indicator.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 403
Shifting Change the gear position in accordance with your driving needs.
Shift button positions
Park Used when parking or starting the engine
Reverse Used when reversing
Neutral Transmission is not locked
Drive/S Position Each time you press the button, the mode switches between Drive and S position mode Used for:
Normal driving (gears change between 1st and 9th automatically)
Temporarily driving in the sequential mode
Automatically changing gears between 1st and 8th (8th gear is used only at high speed)
Driving in the sequential mode
D/S
Drive
S Position
403Continued
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
404
D rivin
g
1Shifting
When shifting gears in extremely low temperatures (22F/30C), there may be a short delay before the shift is indicated in the display. Always confirm you are in the correct gear before driving.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 404
(P (parking) button Park your vehicle in a safe place with the power mode in ON, then apply the brakes and press the (P button to put the transmission in Park. The indicators on the sides of the (P button come on.
(P Button
uuWhen DrivinguShifting D
rivin g
1Shift Operation
NOTICE When you change (D to (R and vice versa, depress the brake pedal to come to a complete stop, then select the intended gear position while maintaining brake pressure.
Use the gear position indicator and the shift button indicator to check the gear position before selecting a shift button.
If the indicator of the currently selected gear position, or all the gear position indicators are blinking simultaneously, there is a problem with the transmission. Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometer red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.
When the engine speed is increased while the transmission is in (N, (P or (R, the fuel supply may be cut off even without the engine speed entering the tachometer red zone.
From the audio/information screen, you can choose to have the system activate a beeper when you change to (R.
2 Customized Features P. 327
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 405
Shift Operation
Gear Position Indicator (Transmission System Indicator)
Tachometer Red Zone
Press the (P button.
Pull back the (R button.
Press the (N button.
Press the button. Each time you press the button, the mode switches between Drive and S position mode.
D/S
Shift Button Indicator
M (sequential mode) Indicator
Sequential Mode Gear Selection Indicator
Continued 405
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
406
D rivin
g
1When opening the drivers door
You should always select (P before opening the drivers door. Make sure to park the vehicle in a safe place.
2 When Stopped P. 480
If you want to drive the vehicle after the gear position has automatically changed to (P under the described conditions, close the door, fasten the seat belt, depress the brake pedal, then change the gear position.
If you leave the vehicle, turn off the engine and lock the doors.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 406
In freezing or sub-freezing conditions, the electronic gear selector response may be slow. Always depress the brake pedal before changing the gear position to (P , and confirm that (P is shown on the gear position indicator before releasing the brake.
When opening the drivers door If you open the drivers door under the following conditions, the gear position automatically changes to (P . The vehicle is stationary with the engine running, or moving at 1 mph (2 km/h) or
slower. The transmission is in other than (P. You have unfastened the driver side seat belt.
u If you manually change the gear position from (P with the brake pedal depressed, the gear position will automatically return to (P once you release the brake pedal.
When turning off the power mode If you turn the engine off while the vehicle is stationary, and the transmission is in other than (P , the gear position automatically changes to (P .
uuWhen DrivinguShifting D
rivin g
1 If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode]
To keep the vehicle (N position, you can also follow this procedure: While the power mode is on, select (N, and then within five seconds, press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Note that the transmission may not stay in (N position while any of the following indicators is on: Transmission system indicator. Malfunction indicator lamp. Charging system indicator.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 407
If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode] With the engine running: 1. Press and hold the brake pedal. 2. Select (N, then release the button to display (Neutral) (N hold mode on the driver
information interface. 3. Press and hold (N again for two seconds. u This puts the vehicle in car wash mode which must be used when your vehicle
is pulled through a conveyor type automatic car wash where you or an attendant do not remain in the vehicle.
If the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed after car wash mode has been activated, the power mode will change to ACCESSORY and a message will be displayed on the driver information interface. u For 15 minutes the gear position remains
in (N with the power mode in ACCESSORY. After that, the position automatically changes to (P and the power mode changes to OFF.
u Manually changing to (P cancels ACCESSORY mode. The (P indicator comes on and the power mode changes to OFF. You must always shift to (P when car wash mode is no longer needed.
Continued 407
408
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 408
Restrictions on selecting a gear position You cannot select a gear position under certain circumstances that may lead to a crash.
When the transmission is in:
1. Under these circumstances: 2. If you try to change to the following:
3. The gear position remains in/changes to:
How to change the gear position
(P
The brake pedal is not depressed.
Other gear position
(P
Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake pedal.
The accelerator pedal is depressed.
(N
The vehicle is moving at low speed without the brake pedal depressed.
(N
The vehicle is moving at low speed with the accelerator pedal depressed.
(N, (D or (S The vehicle is moving forward. (R Stop your vehicle in a safe place, keep the brake pedal pressed, and select the appropriate gear position.
(R or (N The vehicle is moving backward. (D , (S
(R, (N , (D or (S The vehicle is moving. (P
uuWhen DrivinguShifting D
rivin g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 409
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 9th gears without removing your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission will switch to the sequential mode.
When the transmission is in (D : The vehicle will go into the sequential mode momentarily, and the sequential mode gear selection indicator will come on. Once you start traveling at a constant speed, the sequential mode will automatically switch off, and the sequential mode gear selection indicator will go off.
Hold the (+ paddle shifter for two seconds or push button to return to normal drive.
When the transmission is in (S The vehicle will go into the sequential mode, and the M (sequential mode) indicator and sequential mode gear selection indicator will come on. If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometer red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up to the next gear. You can cancel this mode by holding the (+ paddle shifter for two seconds or push
button. When the sequential mode is canceled, the sequential mode indicator and sequential mode gear selection indicator go off.
Sequential Mode
D/S
D/S
409Continued
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
410
D rivin
g
1Sequential Mode Operation
Each paddle shift operation makes a single gear change. To change gears continuously, release the paddle shifter before pulling it again for the next gear.
If the sequential mode gear selection indicator blinks when you try to shift up or down, this means your vehicle speed is not in its allowable gear range or the protection of transmission system is necessary. Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift down while the indicator is blinking.
Sequential Mode Gear Selection Indicator
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 410
Sequential Mode Operation
Downshifting when pulling the paddle shifter. (Changes to a lower gear)
Upshifting when pulling the paddle shifter. (Changes to a higher gear)
Paddle Shifter (Shift down)
Paddle Shifter (Shift up)
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop D
rivin g
1Auto Idle Stop
The 12-volt battery installed in this vehicle is specifically designed for a model with Auto Idle Stop. Using a 12-volt battery other than this specified type may shorten the 12-volt battery life, and prevent Auto Idle Stop from activating. If you need to replace the 12-volt battery, make sure to select the specified type. Ask a dealer for more details.
The duration of the Auto Idle Stop operation: Increases in the ECON mode, compared to when
the ECON mode is off, with climate control in use. 2 ECON Mode P. 417
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 411
Auto Idle Stop To help maximize fuel economy, the engine automatically stops when the vehicle comes to a stop, depending on environmental and vehicle operating conditions. The indicator (green) comes on at this time.
The environmental and vehicle conditions that impact Auto Idle Stop system operation are varied.
2 Auto Idle Stop Activates When: P. 412, 414
The engine then restarts once the vehicle is about to move again, and the indicator (green) goes off.
2 The Engine Automatically Restarts When P. 415
The Auto Idle Stop suspend indicator comes on and a message appears on the gauge when the Auto Idle Stop system cannot be activated.
2 Indicators P. 80 2 Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF P. 412
If the drivers door is opened while the indicator (green) comes on, a buzzer sounds to notify you that the Auto Idle Stop function is in operation.
A message associated with Auto Idle Stop appears on the driver information interface.
Auto Idle Stop Indicator (Green)
Auto Idle Stop Suspend Indicator
411Continued
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
412
D rivin
g
1Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF
If you turn off the Auto Idle Stop system while it is activated, the engine will restart.
2 Auto Idle Stop Activates When: P. 412
If you hold the Auto Idle Stop OFF button, you can disable idle stop messages.
2 Indicators P. 80
1Auto Idle Stop Activates When:
Do not open a hood, during idling stop. If the hood is opened, the engine will not restart automatically.
In this case, restart the engine with the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2 Starting the Engine P. 394
Pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button causes the engine to no longer restart automatically. Follow the standard procedure to start the engine.
2 Starting the Engine P. 394
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 412
To turn the Auto Idle Stop system off, press this button. The Auto Idle Stop system stops. u Auto Idle Stop system will stop, the
indicator will come on and a message appears on the gauge.
The Auto Idle Stop system is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.
The vehicle stops with the gear position in (D and the brake pedal depressed. When you put the transmission into (P, the Auto Idle Stop continues to operate, even if the brake pedal is released. u If you depress the brake pedal, the engine may automatically restart.
Auto Idle Stop does not activate when: The Auto Idle Stop OFF button is pressed. The drivers seat belt is not fastened. The engine is not adequately warmed up or coolant temperature is high. The transmission fluid temperature is low or high. The vehicle comes to a stop again before the vehicle speed reaches 3 mph (5
km/h) after the engine starts. The vehicle is stopped on a steep incline. A gear position other than (D .
Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF
Auto Idle Stop OFF Button
Auto Idle Stop OFF Indicator
Auto Idle Stop Activates When:
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop D
rivin g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 413
The engine is started with the hood open. u Turn off the engine. Close the hood before you restart the engine to activate
Auto Idle Stop. The battery charge is low. The internal temperature of the battery is 14F (10C) or less. The climate control system is in use, and the outside temperature is below 4F
(20C) or over 104F (40C). The climate control system is in use, and the temperature is set to Hi or Lo. is ON (indicator on). The rear fan is set to maximum speed. u Auto Idle Stop may not activate under other conditions when the rear climate
control system is in use. When the Intelligent Traction Management is set to Snow, Mud*, or Sand*.
413Continued* Not available on all models
414
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 414
Auto Idle Stop may not activate when: The vehicle is stopped by braking suddenly. The steering wheel is operated. The fan speed is high. Altitude is high. The climate control system is in use, and there is a significant difference between
the set temperature and the actual interior temperature. The climate control system is in use, and humidity in the interior is high. The rear fan is set to maximum speed. u Auto Idle Stop may not activate under other conditions when the rear climate
control system is in use.
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop D
rivin g
1The Engine Automatically Restarts When
If you are using an electronic device during Auto Idle Stop, the device may temporarily be turned off when the engine restarts.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 415
The brake pedal is released.
The engine restarts even if the brake pedal is depressed when: The Auto Idle Stop OFF button is pressed. When a steering wheel is operated. The transmission is put into (R or (S , or when it is set from (N to (D . u If you put the transmission into (P after the Auto Idle Stop activates, the Auto
Idle Stop continues to operate. In this case, the engine restarts when you depress the brake pedal.
The pressure on the brake pedal is reduced and the vehicle starts moving while stopped on an incline.
The pressure on the brake pedal is repeatedly applied and released slightly during a stop.
The battery charge becomes low. The accelerator pedal is depressed. The drivers seat belt is unlatched. is ON (indicator on). The climate control system is in use, and the difference between the set
temperature and actual interior temperature becomes significant. The climate control system is being used to dehumidify the interior. The rear fan is set to maximum speed. u Auto Idle Stop may not activate under other conditions when the rear climate
control system is in use. When the Intelligent Traction Management is set to Snow, Mud*, or Sand*.
The Engine Automatically Restarts When
Continued 415* Not available on all models
416
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 416
Briefly keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal to restart the engine. This can keep your vehicle from unexpectedly moving while on an incline.
Starting Assist Brake Function
uuWhen DrivinguECON Mode D
rivin g
1ECON Mode
While in ECON mode, the climate control system has greater temperature fluctuations.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 417
ECON Mode The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off. The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the performance of the engine, air conditioning system, and cruise control.
417
418
uuWhen Drivingu Intelligent Traction Management
D rivin
g
1Intelligent Traction Management
Refer to the Off-Highway Driving section for driving tips and safety precautions.
2 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 392
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 418
Intelligent Traction Management The Intelligent Traction Management optimizes vehicle performance to help you drive on various surfaces. The system has available modes to select from: Normal, Snow, Mud*, and Sand*. Press the mode button to select the appropriate mode. The mode you select appears on the driver information interface. When the vehicle is turned off and restarted, Intelligent Traction Management mode will revert to Normal.
AWD models
Mud Use when driving on muddy road or off- road surfaces.
Sand Use when driving on soft, sandy road or off-road surfaces.
Normal Provides balanced driving performance on most road surfaces.
Mode Button
Snow Use when driving on snowy road surfaces.
* Not available on all models
uuWhen Drivingu Intelligent Traction Management D
rivin g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 419
2WD models
Normal Provides balanced driving performance on most road surfaces.
Snow Button
Snow Use when driving on snowy road surfaces.
419
420
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
D rivin
g
1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
The VSA may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While this may not interfere with normal driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
VSA cannot enhance stability in all driving situations and does not control the entire braking system. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The system also includes a traction control function.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 420
Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System VSA helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator. You may also notice some noise from the hydraulic brake system. You will also see the indicator blink.
VSA Operation
VSA System Indicator
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System D
rivin g
1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
With the (VSA OFF) button pressed, your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but VSA traction and stability enhancement becomes less effective.
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA temporarily switched off.
When the (VSA OFF) button is pressed, the traction control function becomes less effective. This allows for the wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA off if you are not able to free it when the VSA is on.
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch VSA on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA system switched off.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after starting the engine or while driving. This is normal.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 421
This button is on the driver side control panel. To partially disable VSA functionality/ features, press and hold it until you hear a beep.
The traction control stops fully functioning, allowing the wheels to spin more freely at low speed. The VSA OFF indicator will also come on and a message on the driver information interface informs you that the mode is changed.
Traction control mode cannot be changed during Mud or Sand modes. If you are driving on mud or sand, Mud or Sand Intelligent Traction Management modes can also be used to free a stuck vehicle. On other road surfaces, change to Normal or Snow mode, then press and hold the (VSA OFF) button.
To restore VSA functionality/features, press
the (VSA OFF) button until you hear a beep.
VSA is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.
VSA On and Off
VSA OFF Indicator
AWD models
421
422
uuWhen DrivinguAgile Handling Assist
D rivin
g
1Agile Handling Assist
The agile handling assist cannot enhance stability in all driving situations. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When the VSA system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, the agile handling assist does not activate.
You may hear a sound coming from the engine compartment while the agile handling assist is activated. This is normal.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 422
Agile Handling Assist Lightly brakes each of the front and rear wheels, as needed, when you turn the steering wheel, and helps support the vehicles stability and performance during cornering.
uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information System* D
rivin g
1Blind spot information System*
Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, blind spot information system has limitations. Overreliance on blind spot information system may result in a collision.
The system is for your convenience only. Even if an object is within the alert zone, the following situations may occur. The blind spot information system alert indicator
may not come on due to obstruction (splashes, etc.) even without the Blind Spot Info Not Available driver information interface appearing.
The blind spot information system alert indicator may come on even with the message appearing.
3WARNING Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to change lanes before doing so may result in a crash and serious injury or death. Do not rely only on the blind spot information system when changing lanes.
Always look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles before changing lanes.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 423
Blind spot information System*
Is designed to detect vehicles in specified alert zones adjacent to your vehicle, particularly in harder to see areas commonly known as blind spots.
When the system detects vehicles approaching from behind in adjacent lanes, the appropriate indicator comes on for a few seconds, providing assistance when you change lanes.
How the system works
Alert zone range A: Approx. 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) B: Approx. 10 ft. (3 m) C: Approx. 10 ft. (3 m)
Radar Sensors: underneath the rear bumper corners
Alert Zone A
B
C
The transmission is in (D. Your vehicle speed is
between 20 mph (32 km/h) and 100 mph (160 km/h)
423Continued* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information System*
424
D rivin
g
1Blind spot information System*
The blind spot information system alert indicator may not come on under the following conditions: A vehicle does not stay in the alert zone for more
than two seconds. A vehicle is parked in a side lane. The speed difference between your vehicle and the
vehicle you are passing is greater than 6 mph (10 km/h).
An object not detected by the radar sensors approaches or passes your vehicle.
A vehicle running in the adjacent lane is a motorcycle or other small vehicle.
The system does not operate when in (R.
You can turn off the audible alert, or all the blind spot information system alert using the audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 327
Turn the system off when towing a trailer. The system may not work properly for the following reasons: The added mass tilts the vehicle and changes the
radar coverage. The trailer itself can be detected by the radar
sensors, causing the blind spot information system alert indicators to come on.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 424
When the system detects a vehicle Blind spot information System Alert Indicator: Located near the pillar on both sides. Comes on when: A vehicle enters the alert zone from behind
to overtake you with a speed difference of no more than 31 mph (50 km/h) from your vehicle.
You pass a vehicle with a speed difference of no more than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Blinks and a beeper sounds when: You move the turn signal lever in the direction of the detected vehicle. The beeper sounds three times.
Comes On
Blinks
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguBlind spot information System* D
rivin g
1Blind spot information System*
Blind spot information system may be adversely affected when: Objects (guard rails, poles, trees, etc.) are detected. An object that does not reflect radio waves well,
such as a motorcycle, is in the alert zone. Driving on a curved road. A vehicle is moving from a far lane to the adjacent
lane. The system picks up external electrical interference. The rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly
repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed. The orientation of the sensors has been changed. In bad weather (Heavy rain, snow, and fog).
For a proper blind spot information system operation: Always keep the rear bumper corner area clean. Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with
labels or stickers of any kind. Take your vehicle to a dealer if you need the rear
bumper corner area or the radar sensors to be repaired, or the rear bumper corner area is strongly impacted.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 425
425* Not available on all models
426
uuWhen Drivingu Intelligent Variable Torque Management (i-VTM4TM) AWD System*
D rivin
g
1 Intelligent Variable Torque Management (i-VTM4TM) AWD System*
NOTICE Do not continuously spin the front tires of your vehicle. Continuously spinning the front tires can cause transmission or rear differential damage.
The intelligent variable torque management (i-VTM4TM) AWD system may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
2 Tire and Wheel Replacement P. 534
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 426
Intelligent Variable Torque Management (i-VTM4TM) AWD System*
The intelligent variable torque management (i-VTM4TM) AWD system is a full time all wheel drive system that automatically controls and transfers varying amount of engine torque to all wheels independently according to the driving conditions.
You still need to exercise the same care when accelerating, steering, and braking that you would in a two wheel drive vehicle.
Avoid continuously driving on slippery surfaces where a wheel is likely to spin out, and do not drive if the AWD indicator starts blinking. Driving continuously under such conditions can damage the system's torque distribution unit.
If the AWD indicator blinks while driving, it indicates the differential temperature is too high. If this happens, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, shift to park, an idle the engine idle until the indicator goes out. If the indicator does not go out, take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire Fill Assist D
rivin g
1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire Fill Assist
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can trigger the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.
2 If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Comes On or Blinks P. 570
Tire pressure checked and inflated in: Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather. Cold weather can become overinflated in warmer
weather. The Low Tire Pressure/TPMS indicator will not come on as a result of overinflation.
The TPMS audibly and visually informs you of changes in tire pressure of the individual tire that you are adjusting using audible and visual indications.
If a change in tire pressure has been significant, the system beeps and the hazard lights flash continuously for five seconds when the specified tire pressure is reached. Stop filling the tire.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 427
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire Fill Assist Monitors the tire pressure while you are driving. If your vehicles tire pressure becomes significantly low, the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS indicator comes on and a message appears on the driver information interface.
Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator
427Continued
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) with Tire Fill Assist
428
D rivin
g
1Tire Pressure Monitor
The pressure displayed on the driver information interface can be slightly different from the actual pressure as measured by a gauge. If there is a significant difference between the two values, or if the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS indicator and the message on the driver information interface do not go off after you have inflated the tire to the specified pressure, have the system checked by a dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitor Problem may appear if you drive with the compact spare tire, or there is a problem with the TPMS.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 428
To select the tire pressure monitor, please follow the following steps using the buttons on the steering wheel. 1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Press the (home) button. 3. Press the / button repeatedly until
Maintenance appears. 4. Press the ENTER button and select Tire
Pressure by pressing the / button. 5. Press the ENTER button and the tire
pressure appears on the driver information interface.
The pressure for each tire is displayed in psi.
Tire Pressures Low is displayed when a tire has significantly low pressure. The specific tire is displayed on the screen.
Tire Pressure Monitor
3 4
3 4
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation D
rivin g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 429
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability.
429Continued
430
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 430
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 431
Honda Sensing
rivin g
Honda Sensing is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors: a radar sensor located behind the emblem and a front sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.
Honda Sensing has following functions.
The functions which do not require switch operations to activate Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) 2 P. 434
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System 2 P. 468
The functions which require switch operations to activate Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 2 P. 446
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 2 P. 459
431Continued
432
uuHonda Sensingu
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 432
MAIN Button Press to activate standby mode for ACC and LKAS. Or press to cancel these systems.
LKAS Button Press to activate or cancel the LKAS.
RES/+//SET Button Press RES/+ to resume the ACC or increase the vehicle speed. Press /SET to set the ACC or decrease the vehicle speed.
Interval Button Press the (interval) button to change the ACC following-interval.
CANCEL Button Press to cancel ACC.
Operation Switches for the ACC/LKAS
MAIN button
Interval Button
CANCEL Button
LKAS Button
RES/+ Button
/SET Button
uuHonda Sensingu D
rivin g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 433
You can see the current state of ACC and LKAS.
a Indicates that ACC and LKAS are ready to be activated.
b Indicates that LKAS is activated and whether or not traffic lane lines are detected.
c Indicates whether or not a vehicle is detected ahead.
dShows the set vehicle speed.
eShows the set vehicle interval.
Multi-Information Display Content
433
434
uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
D rivin
g
1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Important Safety Reminder The CMBSTM is designed to reduce the severity of an unavoidable collision. It does not prevent a collision nor stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel appropriately according to the driving conditions.
The CMBSTM may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain conditions:
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 438
For directions on the proper handling of the radar sensor, refer to the following page.
2 Radar Sensor P. 475
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 473
1How the system works
Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel alert you when your vehicle speed is between 19 and 62 mph (30 and 100 km/h) with an oncoming vehicle detected in front of you.
When the CMBSTM activates, it may automatically apply the brake. It will be canceled when your vehicle stops or a potential collision is not determined.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 434
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) The system can assist you when it determines there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of your vehicle. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when the potential for a collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.
How the system works
The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about 3 mph (5 km/h) or above and will search for a vehicle in front of you.
The radar sensor is behind the emblem.
The CMBSTM activates when: The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian
detected in front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a collision.
Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and there is a chance of a collision with an oncoming detected vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you.
The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.
When to use
uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) D
rivin g
1When the system activates
The camera in the CMBSTM is also designed to detect pedestrians. However, this pedestrian detection feature may not activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of your vehicle under certain conditions. Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection limitations from the list.
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 438
1Vibration alert on the steering wheel
Vibration alert function is disabled when the electric power steering (EPS) system indicator comes on.
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 96
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 435
When the system activates
You can change the distance (Long/Normal/Short) between vehicles at which the system's earliest collision alert will come on through audio/information screen setting options.
2 Customized Features P. 327
Vibration alert on the steering wheel When a potential collision to an oncoming detected vehicle is determined, the system alerts you with rapid vibration on the steering wheel, in addition to visual and audible alerts. u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, operate the
steering wheel, etc.).
The system provides visual, audible and tactile alerts of a possible collision, and stops if the collision is avoided. u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change
lanes, etc.)
Beep
Visual Alerts
Audible Alert Tactile Alert
Continued 435
436
uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 436
The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBSTM may not go through all of the stages before initiating the last stage.
Collision Alert Stages
Distance between vehicles
CMBSTM
The sensors detect a vehicle
Audible & Visual WARNINGS Steering Wheel Braking
Stage one
There is a risk of a collision with the vehicle ahead of you.
When in Long, visual and audible alerts come on at a longer distance from a vehicle ahead than in Normal setting, and in Short, at a shorter distance than in Normal.
If an oncoming vehicle is detected, rapid vibration is provided.
Stage two
The risk of a collision has increased, time to respond is reduced.
Visual and audible alerts.
Lightly applied
Stage three
The CMBSTM determines that a collision is unavoidable.
Forcefully applied
Your Vehicle
Vehicle Ahead
Normal ShortLong
Your Vehicle
Vehicle Ahead
Your Vehicle
Vehicle Ahead
uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) D
rivin g
1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
The CMBSTM may automatically shut off, and the CMBSTM indicator will come and stay on under certain conditions:
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 438
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 437
Press and hold the button until the beeper sounds to switch the system on or off.
When the CMBSTM is off: The CMBSTM indicator in the instrument
panel comes on. A message on the driver information
interface reminds you that the system is off.
The CMBSTM is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.
CMBSTM On and Off
Continued 437
438
uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 438
The system may automatically shut off and the CMBSTM indicator will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the CMBSTM functions.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 473
Environmental conditions Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. There is little contrast between objects and the background. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians. Reflections on the interior of the windshield. Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
Roadway conditions Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads.
CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations
uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) D
rivin g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 439
Vehicle conditions Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. The inside of the windshield is fogged. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). When tire chains are installed. The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. The camera temperature gets too high. Driving with the parking brake applied. When the radar sensor in the front grille gets dirty. The vehicle is towing a trailer.
439Continued
440
uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 440
Detection limitations A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you. The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is
too short. A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly. When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you
at high speed. The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter or other small
vehicle. When there are animals in front of your vehicle. When you drive on a curved, winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for
the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you. The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of
you is significantly large. An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you. Another vehicle suddenly comes in front of you at an intersection, etc. Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle. When driving through a narrow iron bridge. When the lead vehicle suddenly slows down.
uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) D
rivin g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 441
When there is a group of people in front of your vehicle walking together side by side.
Surrounding conditions or belongings of the pedestrian alter the pedestrians shape, preventing the system from recognizing that the person is a pedestrian.
When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about 6.6 feet (2 meters) in height.
When a pedestrian blends in with the background. When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, or when their hands are raised or
they are running. When several pedestrians are walking ahead in a group. When the camera cannot correctly identify that a pedestrian is present due to an
unusual shape (holding luggage, body position, size).
Limitations applicable to pedestrian detection only
441Continued
442
uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 442
Automatic shutoff CMBSTM may automatically shut itself off and the CMBSTM indicator comes and stays on when: The temperature inside the system is high. You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an
extended period. An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.). The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty. Once the conditions that caused CMBSTM to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g., cleaning), the system comes back on.
uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) D
rivin g
1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently).
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 443
The CMBSTM may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or when there is no vehicle ahead. Some examples of this are:
When Passing Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass.
At an intersection Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right turn.
With Little Chance of a Collision
Continued 443
444
uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 444
On a curve When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming vehicle is right in front of you.
Through a low bridge at high speed You drive under a low or narrow bridge at high speed.
uuHonda SensinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) D
rivin g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 445
Speed bumps, road work sites, train tracks, roadside objects, etc. You drive over speed bumps, steel road plates, etc., or your vehicle approaches train tracks or roadside objects [such as a traffic sign and guard rail] on a curve or, when parking, stationary vehicles and walls.
445
446
uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
D rivin
g
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ACC cannot be activated if Intelligent Traction Management setting is Snow, Sand* or Mud*.
3WARNING Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash. Use ACC only when driving on expressways or freeways and in good road and weather conditions.
3WARNING ACC has limited braking capability.
When your vehicle speed drops below 22 mph (35 km/h), ACC will automatically cancel and no longer will apply your vehicle's brakes.
Always be prepared to apply the brake pedal when conditions require.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 446
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.
When to use
Vehicle speed for adaptive cruise control: Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h)Gear positions for adaptive cruise control: In (D or (S
The radar sensor is behind the emblem.
The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.
* Not available on all models
uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) D
rivin g
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Important Reminder As with any system, there are limits to ACC. Use the brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a safe interval between your vehicle and other vehicles.
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 473
The radar sensor for ACC is shared with the Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM).
2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 434
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 447
How to activate the system
How to use
Press the MAIN button on the steering wheel.
ACC is on in the driver information interface. Adaptive cruise control is ready to use.
Continued 447
uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
448
D rivin
g
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ACC may not work properly under certain conditions. 2 ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 451
When not using ACC: Turn off adaptive cruise by pressing the MAIN button. This also will turn off the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).
When the MAIN button is pressed, ACC and Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) are both turned on or off.
You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface between mph and km/h.
2 Units P. 117
Do not use ACC under the following conditions: On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in
continuous stop and go traffic. On roads with sharp turns. On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set
vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such cases, ACC will not apply the brakes to maintain the set speed.
On roads with toll collection facilities or other objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking areas, or facilities with drive through access.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 448
Take your foot off the pedal and press the /SET button when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the /SET button, the set speed is fixed, and ACC begins.
When ACC starts operating, the vehicle icon, distance bars and set speed appear on the driver information interface.
To Set the Vehicle Speed
On when adaptive cruise control begins
Press and release
/SET Button
Set Vehicle Interval
Set Vehicle Speed
uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) D
rivin g
1When in Operation
If the vehicle detected ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if another vehicle is detected cutting in front of you, the beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface.
Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate interval from the vehicle ahead.
Beep
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 449
There is a vehicle ahead ACC monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC range. If a vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC system maintains or decelerates your vehicles set speed in order to keep the vehicles set following-interval from the vehicle ahead.
2 To Set or Change Following-interval P. 454
When a vehicle whose speed is slower than your set speed is detected in front of you, your vehicle starts to slow down.
When in Operation
ACC Range: 394 ft. (120 m)
A vehicle icon appears on the driver information interface.
Continued 449
uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
450
D rivin
g
1When in Operation
Even if the interval between your vehicle and the vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC may start accelerating your vehicle under the following circumstances: The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the
same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle. A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster
than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval between the vehicles.
You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC detecting range. Change the ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep setting.
2 Customized Features P. 327
Limitations You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe interval when using ACC. Additionally, ACC may not work properly under certain conditions.
2 ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 451
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 450
There is no vehicle ahead Your vehicle maintains the set speed without having to keep your foot on the brake or accelerator pedal. If there previously was a vehicle detected ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at the set speed, ACC accelerates your vehicle to the set speed, and then maintains it.
When you depress the accelerator pedal You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or visual alerts even if a vehicle is in ACC range. ACC stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the system resumes the set speed.
A vehicle icon with dotted-line contour appears on the driver information interface.
uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) D
rivin g
1ACC Conditions and Limitations
If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly impacted, turn off the system by pressing the MAIN button and take your vehicle to a dealer.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently).
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 451
The system may automatically shut off and the ACC indicator will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the ACC functions.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 473
Environmental conditions Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Roadway conditions Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
Vehicle conditions The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). The camera temperature gets too high. The parking brake is applied. When the front grille is dirty. The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. When tire chains are installed. The vehicle is towing a trailer.
ACC Conditions and Limitations
Continued 451
452
uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 452
Detection limitations A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you. The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short. A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly. When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle ahead of you at high
speed. The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small
vehicle. When there are animals in front of your vehicle. When you drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult
for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.
The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle in front of you is significantly large.
An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you. Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) D
rivin g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 453
When driving through a narrow metal bridge.
When the vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly. When the vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape.
When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane.
Sensor detects upper section of an empty carrier truck.
Panel truck, tanker truck, etc.
453Continued
uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
454
D rivin
g
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower than your increased set speed, ACC may not accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface between mph and km/h.
2 Units P. 117
You can set the vehicle speed using the /SET button on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with the accelerator and brake pedals.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 454
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or /SET buttons on the steering wheel.
Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
Press the (Interval) button to change the ACC following-interval. Each time you press the button, the following- interval (the interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of you) setting cycles through short, middle, long, and extra long following- interval.
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
To Set or Change Following-interval
To increase speed
To decrease speed
Interval Button
uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) D
rivin g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 455
Determine the most appropriate following-interval setting based on your specific driving conditions. Be sure to adhere to any following-interval requirements set by local regulation.
The higher vehicle's following-speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or extra long following-interval becomes. See the following examples for your reference.
Following-interval When the Set Speed is:
50 mph (80 km/h) 65 mph (104 km/h)
Short
83 feet 25 meters
1.1 sec
100 feet 31 meters
1.1 sec
Middle
110 feet 33 meters
1.5 sec
137 feet 42 meters
1.5 sec
Long
154 feet 47 meters
2.1 sec
200 feet 61 meters
2.1 sec
Extra Long
204 feet 62 meters
2.8 sec
265 feet 81 meters
2.8 sec
455Continued
uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
456
D rivin
g
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled ACC, you can resume the prior set speed while it is still displayed. Press the RES/+ button when driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC has been turned off using the MAIN button. Press the MAIN button to activate the system, then set the desired speed.
1Automatic cancellation
Even though ACC has been automatically canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed. Wait until the condition that caused ACC to cancel improves, then press the RES/+ button.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 456
To cancel ACC, do any of the following: Press the CANCEL button. Press the MAIN button. u ACC indicator goes off.
Depress the brake pedal while the vehicle is moving forward.
Automatic cancellation The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when ACC is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC to automatically cancel: Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). When the radar sensor behind the emblem gets dirty. The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected. An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding. Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods. Abrupt steering wheel movement. When the ABS, VSA, or CMBSTM is activated. When the ABS or VSA system indicator comes on. When you manually apply the parking brake. When the detected vehicle within the ACC range is too close to your vehicle. The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
To Cancel
CANCEL Button
MAIN Button
uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) D
rivin g
1To Switch ACC to Cruise Control
Always be aware which mode you are in. When you are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist you to maintain a following-interval from a vehicle ahead of you.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 457
Press and hold the (interval) button for one second. Cruise Mode Selected appears on the driver information interface for two seconds, and then the mode switches to Cruise. To switch back to ACC, press and hold the button again for one second.
When to use Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h).
Take your foot off the pedal and press the /SET button when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the /SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.
Each time you press the RES/+ or /SET button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). If you keep the RES/+ or /SET button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you release it. This speed is then set.
To Switch ACC to Cruise Control
ACC ON Cruise Control ON
To Set the Vehicle Speed
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Continued 457
uuHonda SensinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
458
D rivin
g
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed: After cruise control has been canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+ button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations: When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h). When the MAIN button is turned off.
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise control is canceled automatically.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 458
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following: Press the CANCEL button. Press the MAIN button. Depress the brake pedal. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
To Cancel
uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) D
rivin g
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Important Safety Reminders The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not an autonomous driving system and always requires driver attention and control. The system does not work if you take your hands off the steering wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 96
The LKAS is convenient when it is used on expressways or freeways.
Do not place objects on the instrument panel. Objects may reflect on the windshield and prevent correct detection of the traffic lanes.
The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.
The LKAS may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:
2 LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 465
The LKAS may not function as designed while driving in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads with sharp curves.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 459
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.
When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and resumes after the signals are off. If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS alerts activate, and torque is applied to the steering.
Front sensor camera Monitors the lane lines
Tactile and visual alerts Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel and a warning display alert you that the vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.
Steering input assist The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left and right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets closer to either of the lane lines.
459Continued
uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
460
D rivin
g
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 473
When it fails to detect lanes, the system will temporarily be canceled. When a lane is detected, the system will recover automatically.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 460
Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become stronger.
When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering wheel vibration as well as warning display.
Lane Keep Support Function
Lane Departure Warning Function
Warning Area
Warning Area
uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) D
rivin g
1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 461
The system can be used when the following conditions are met. The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and
your vehicle is in the center of the lane. The vehicle is travelling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h). You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road. The turn signals are off. The brake pedal is not depressed. The wipers are not in high speed operation.
How to activate the system 1. Press the MAIN button. u The LKAS is on in the driver information
interface. The system is ready to use.
2. Press the LKAS button. u Lane outlines appear on the driver
information interface. The system is activated.
When the System can be Used
MAIN Button
LKAS Button
Continued 461
uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
462
D rivin
g
1To Cancel
Pressing the MAIN button also turns ACC on and off.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 462
3. Keep your vehicle near the center of the lane while driving. u The lane outlines change to solid ones
once the system starts operating after detecting the left and right lane markings.
Press the MAIN or LKAS button.
The LKAS is turned off every time you stop the engine, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle.
To Cancel
MAIN Button LKAS Button
uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) D
rivin g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 463
The system operation is suspended if you:
Set the wipers to HI. u Turning the wipers off resumes the
LKAS. Decrease the vehicle speed to about 40
mph (64 km/h) or less. u Increasing the vehicle speed to about 45
mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the LKAS.
Depress the brake pedal. u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting
the lane lines again once you release the brake pedal.
Your vehicle is driving to the right or the left of the lane.
Set the wiper switch to AUTO and the wipers operate continuously. u The LKAS resumes when the wipers stop
or operate intermittently.
When the LKAS is suspended, the lane lines on the driver information interface change to lane outlines, and the beeper sounds (if activated).
Models with automatic intermittent wipers
463Continued
464
uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 464
The LKAS may be automatically suspended when: The system fails to detect lane lines. The steering wheel is quickly turned. You fail to steer the vehicle. Driving through a sharp curve. Driving at a speed in excess of approximately 90 mph (145 km/h).
Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.
The LKAS may be automatically canceled when: The camera temperature gets extremely high or low. The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty. The ABS or VSA system engages.
The beeper sounds if the LKAS is automatically canceled.
uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) D
rivin g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 465
The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in the middle of a lane under certain conditions, including the following:
Environmental conditions Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings. Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers. Reflections on the interior of the windshield. Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
LKAS Conditions and Limitations
465Continued
466
uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 466
Roadway conditions Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). Driving on a road with temporary lane markings. Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings.
The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection or crosswalk).
The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines. The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces. When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
lines (or yellow lines).
Faded lines Duplicate lines Tire tracks
Very wide or narrow traffic lane
uuHonda SensinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) D
rivin g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 467
Driving on roads with double lines.
Vehicle conditions Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc. The inside of the windshield is fogged. The camera temperature gets too high. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. The vehicle is towing a trailer.
Lane void of lines at exit or interchange
467
468
uuHonda SensinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
D rivin
g
1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, the RDM system has limitations. Overreliance on the RDM system may result in a collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within your driving lane.
The RDM system only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The RDM system may not detect all lane markings or lane or roadway departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera P. 473
The RDM system may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:
2 RDM Conditions and Limitations P. 471
There are times when you may not notice RDM functions due to your operation of the vehicle, or road surface conditions.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 468
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the roadway altogether.
The front camera behind the rearview mirror monitors left and right lane markings (in white or yellow). If your vehicle is getting too close to detected lane markings without a turn signal activated, the system, in addition to a visual alert, applies steering torque and alerts you with rapid vibrations on the steering wheel, to help you remain within the detected lane.
2 Customized Features P. 327
As a visual alert, the Lane Departure message appears on the driver information interface.
If the system determines that its steering input is insufficient to keep your vehicle on the roadway, it may apply braking. u Braking is applied only when the lane
markings are solid continuous lines. The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid crossing over detected lane markings.
If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system beeps to alert you.
How the System Works
uuHonda SensinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System D
rivin g
1How the System Activates
The RDM system may automatically shut off and the indicator comes and stays on. 2 Indicators P. 80
RDM system function can be impacted when the vehicle is: Not driven within a traffic lane. Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of
a lane. Driven in a narrow lane.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 469
The system activates when all the following conditions are met: The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h). The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road. The turn signals are off. The brake pedal is not depressed. The wipers are not in continuous operation. The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating,
braking, or steering.
How the System Activates
Continued 469
uuHonda SensinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
470
D rivin
g
1RDM On and Off
When you have selected Warning Only from the customized options using the audio/information screen, the system does not operate the steering wheel and braking.
2 Customized Features P. 327
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 470
Press the RDM button to turn the system on and off. u The indicator in the button comes on and
the message appears on the driver information interface when the system is on.
RDM On and Off
RDM Button
Indicator
uuHonda SensinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System D
rivin g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 471
The system may not properly detect lane markings and the position of your vehicle under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.
Environmental conditions Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings. Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers. Reflections on the interior of the windshield. Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
RDM Conditions and Limitations
471Continued
472
uuHonda SensinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 472
Roadway conditions Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). Driving on a road with temporary lane markings. Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings. The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection
or crosswalk). The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing. The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines. The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces. When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
lines (or yellow lines). Driving on roads with double lines.
Vehicle conditions Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc. The inside of the windshield is fogged. The camera temperature gets too high. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. When tire chains are installed. The vehicle is towing a trailer.
uuHonda SensinguFront Sensor Camera D
rivin g
1Front Sensor Camera
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the windshield, the hood, or the front grille that could obstruct the cameras field of vision and cause the system to operate abnormally. Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield within the cameras field of vision can cause the system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the windshield with a genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs within the cameras field of vision or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may also cause the system to operate abnormally. After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.
Do not place an object on the top of the instrument panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent the system from detecting lane lines properly.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 473
Front Sensor Camera The camera, used in systems such as LKAS, RDM, ACC, and CMBSTM, is designed to detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate its functions.
This camera is located behind the rearview mirror.
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the cameras sensing system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it.
Camera Location and Handling Tips
Front Sensor Camera
473Continued
uuHonda SensinguFront Sensor Camera
474
D rivin
g
1Front Sensor Camera
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message appears: Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed towards the camera.
Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area around the camera.
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Clean Front Windshield message appears: Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the
windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 474
uuHonda SensinguRadar Sensor D
rivin g
1Radar Sensor
Avoid strong impacts to the radar sensor cover.
For the CMBSTM to work properly:
Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.
Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a mild detergent.
Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or replace the radar sensor cover.
If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly impacted, turn off the system by using the collision mitigation braking systemTM (CMBSTM) OFF button and take your vehicle to a dealer.
2 CMBSTM On and Off P. 437
If the vehicle is involved in any of the following situations, the radar sensor may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer: Your vehicle is involved in a frontal collision Your vehicle drives through deep water or is
submerged in deep water Your vehicle strongly strikes a bump, curb, chock,
or embankment that could jar the radar sensor
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 475
Radar Sensor The radar sensor is located behind the emblem.
Radar Sensor
475
476
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 476
Braking
1Parking Brake
NOTICE Release the parking brake fully before driving. The rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive with the parking brake applied.
If you start driving without fully releasing the parking brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning, and Release Parking Brake appears on the driver information interface.
Always apply the parking brake when parking.
Brake System
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking. To apply: Depress the parking brake pedal down with your foot.
To release: 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Depress the parking brake.
Parking Brake
uuBrakinguBrake System D
rivin g
1Foot Brake
Check the brakes after driving through deep water, or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by high frequency vibration of the brake pads against the rotating brake disc.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a lower gear.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 477
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard.
2 Brake Assist System P. 479 2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 478
Foot Brake
477
478
uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)
D rivin
g
1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
NOTICE The ABS may not function correctly if you use a tire of the incorrect size or type.
If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While normal braking will not be affected, there is a possibility that the ABS will not be operating. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS is not designed for the purpose of reducing the time or distance it takes for a vehicle to stop: It is designed to limit brake lockup which can lead to skidding and loss of steering control.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more distance to stop than a vehicle without the ABS: You are driving on rough or uneven road surfaces,
such as gravel or snow. The tires are equipped with snow chains.
The following may be observed with the ABS system: Motor sounds coming from the engine compartment when the brakes are applied, or when system checks are being performed after the engine has been started and while the vehicle accelerates. Brake pedal and/or the vehicle body vibration when
ABS activates. These vibrations and sounds are normal to ABS systems and are no cause for concern.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 478
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you can.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as stomp and steer.
ABS operation The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Depress the brake pedal and keep holding the pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
ABS may activate when you depress the brake pedal when driving on: Wet or snow covered roads. Roads paved with stone. Roads with uneven surfaces, such as potholes, cracks, manholes, etc.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.
ABS
uuBrakinguBrake Assist System D
rivin g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 479
Brake Assist System Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.
Brake assist system operation Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.
479
480
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 480
Parking Your Vehicle
1Parking Your Vehicle
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects, such as dry grass, oil, or timber. Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
3WARNING The vehicle can roll away if left unattended without confirming that Park is engaged.
A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death.
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal until you have confirmed that (P is shown on the gear position Indicator.
1When Stopped
NOTICE The following can damage the transmission: Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously. Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal. Changing into (P before the vehicle stops
completely.
When Stopped 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Change the gear position to (P . 4. Turn off the engine.
Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline.
uuParking Your VehicleuWhen Stopped D
rivin g
1When Stopped
In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from moving. If you do not take either precaution, the vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 481
481
482
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*
D rivin
g
1Parking Sensor System*
Even when the system is on, always confirm if there is no obstacle near your vehicle before parking.
The system may not work properly when: The sensors are covered with snow, ice, mud, or
dirt. The vehicle is on uneven surface, such as grass,
bumps, or a hill. The vehicle has been out in hot or cold weather. The system is affected by devices that emit
ultrasonic waves. Driving in bad weather.
The system may not sense: Thin or low objects. Sonic-absorptive materials, such as snow, cotton,
or sponge. Objects directly under the bumper.
Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 482
Parking Sensor System*
The corner and center sensors monitor obstacles near your vehicle, and the beeper and audio/information screen let you know the approximate distance between your vehicle and the obstacle.
The sensor location and range
Within about 26 in (65 cm) or less
Front Corner Sensors Rear Corner Sensors
Rear Center Sensors
Within about 45 in (115 cm) or less
* Not available on all models
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System* D
rivin g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 483
Parking sensor system on and off With the power mode in ON, press the parking sensor system button to turn on or off the system. The indicator in the button comes on when the system is on.
The front corner, rear center and rear corner sensors start to detect an obstacle when the transmission is in (R, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The front corner sensors start to detect an obstacle when the transmission is not in (P, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
483Continued
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*
484
D rivin
g
1Screen Operation
The split screen tab disappears, and the split view returns to the last camera view mode under the following conditions: If the parking sensor system is turned off. If there is a malfunction in the system.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 484
Screen Operation You can switch between split view off and split view on by touching the split screen tab.
Split Screen Tab
Split View Off
Split View On
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System* D
rivin g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 485
When the distance between your vehicle and obstacles becomes shorter
*1: At this stage, only the center sensors detect obstacles.
Length of the intermittent beep
Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle Indicator Audio/information screen
Corner Sensors Rear Center Sensors
Moderate About 45-30 in
(115-75 cm) Blinks in Yellow*1
Short About 30-26 in
(75-65 cm)
Very short About 26-14 in
(65-35 cm) About 26-14 in
(65-35 cm) Blinks in Amber
Continuous About 14 in
(35 cm) or less About 14 in
(35 cm) or less Blinks in Red
Indicators light where the sensor detects an obstacle
485Continued
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*
486
D rivin
g
1Turning off All Rear Sensors
When you set the gear position to (R, the indicator in the parking sensor system button blinks as a reminder that the rear sensors have been turned off.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 486
1. Make sure that the parking sensor system is not activated. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
2. Press and hold the parking sensor system button, and set the power mode to ON. 3. Keep pressing the button for 10 seconds. Release the button when the indicator
in the button flashes. 4. Press the button again. The indicator in the button goes off. u The beeper sounds twice. The rear sensors are now turned off.
To turn the rear sensors on again, follow the above procedure. The beeper sounds three times when the rear sensors come back on.
Turning off All Rear Sensors
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor* D
rivin g
1Cross Traffic Monitor*
3CAUTION Cross Traffic Monitor cannot detect all approaching vehicles and may not detect an approaching vehicle at all.
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to back up the vehicle before doing so may result in a collision.
Do not solely rely on the system when reversing; always also use your mirrors, and look behind and to the sides of your vehicle before reversing.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 487
Cross Traffic Monitor*
Monitors the rear corner areas using the radar sensors when reversing, and alerts you if a vehicle approaching from a rear corner is detected.
The system is convenient when you are backing out of a parking space.
487Continued* Not available on all models
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*
488
D rivin
g
1Cross Traffic Monitor*
Cross Traffic Monitor may not detect or may delay alerting an approaching vehicle, or may alert without an approaching vehicle under the following conditions: An obstacle, such as another vehicle and a wall,
near your vehicle's rear bumper, is blocking the radar sensor's scope.
Your vehicle is moving at the speed of about 3 mph (5 km/h) or higher.
A vehicle is approaching at the speed other than between about 6 and 16 mph (10 and 25 km/h).
The system picks up external interference such as other radar sensors from another vehicle or strong radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby.
Either corner of the rear bumper is covered with snow, ice, mud or dirt.
When there is bad weather. Your vehicle is on an incline. Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear. Your vehicle is reversing towards a wall, a pole, a
vehicle, and so on.
The rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed. Have a vehicle checked by a dealer.
For proper operation, always keep the rear bumper corner area clean. Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels or stickers of any kind.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 488
The system activates when: The power mode is in ON. The Cross Traffic Monitor is turned on.
2 Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off P. 490
The transmission is in (R. Your vehicle is moving at 3 mph (5 km/h) or
lower.
When a vehicle is detected approaching from a rear corner, Cross Traffic Monitor alerts you with a buzzer and a displayed warning.
The system will not detect a vehicle that approaches from directly behind your vehicle, nor will it provide alerts about a detected vehicle when it moves directly behind your vehicle.
The system does not provide alerts for a vehicle that is moving away from your vehicle, and it may alert for pedestrians, bicycles, or stationary objects.
How the System Works
Radar sensors: Underneath the rear bumper corners
* Not available on all models
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor* D
rivin g
1When the System Detects a Vehicle
If the on the lower right changes to in amber when the transmission is in (R, mud, snow or ice, etc. may have accumulated in the vicinity of the sensor. The system is temporarily canceled. Check the bumper corners for any obstructions, and thoroughly clean the area if necessary.
If the comes on when the transmission is in (R, there may be a problem with the Cross Traffic Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
If the display remains the same with the transmission in (R, there may be a problem with the rear camera system and the Cross Traffic Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 489
An arrow icon appears on the side a vehicle is approaching on the audio/information screen.
When the System Detects a Vehicle
Normal View Wide View
Arrow Icon
Top Down View
Continued 489
490
uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 490
You can switch on and off the system using the audio/information screen. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Camera. 4. Select Rear Camera. 5. Select Cross Traffic Monitor. 6. Select ON or OFF.
The system can also be turned on and off on the audio/information screen by pressing the CTM icon.
Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off
Icon
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 491
Multi-View Rear Camera
rivin g
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do not rely on the rearview display which does not give you all information about conditions at the back of your vehicle.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.
You can change the Fixed, Dynamic, Both and OFF settings.
2 Customized Features P. 327
Fixed: Guidelines appear when you put the transmission into (R. Dynamic: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel direction. Both: Guidelines appear when you put the transmission into (R and Guidelines move according to the steering wheel direction. OFF: Guidelines do not appear.
About Your Multi-View Rear Camera The audio/information screen can display your vehicles rear view. The display automatically changes to a rear view when the gear position is changed to (R .
Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area
Guidelines
Bumper
Camera
Approx. 20 inches (50 cm) Tailgate Open Range
Approx. 39 inches (1 m)
Wide View Mode
Normal View Mode
Top Down View Mode
491Continued
uuMulti-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera
492
D rivin
g
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
You can change the Last Used, Normal View and Wide View settings.
2 Customized Features P. 327
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 492
You can view three different camera modes on the audio/information screen. Select the appropriate icon to switch the angle.
: Wide view mode : Normal view mode : Top down view mode
If you were last using Wide view mode or Normal view mode, the same view mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into (R .
If you were using Top down view mode before you turned off the power system, Wide view mode will be activated the next time you set the power mode to ON and put the transmission into (R .
If you were using Top down view mode and 10 seconds elapsed after you took the transmission out of (R , Wide view mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into (R .
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 493
Refueling
rivin g
1Fuel Information
NOTICE We recommend quality gasoline containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact a dealer for service. Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline.
Fuel Information Fuel recommendation
Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise that can lead to engine damage.
Top tier detergent gasoline Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda endorses the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline where available to help maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive manufacturers to meet the needs of todays advanced engines.
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards at the retail location. This fuel is guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic additives in gasoline, help avoid buildup of deposits in your engine and emission control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
Fuel tank capacity: 19.5 US gal (73.8 L)
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
493
494
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
D rivin
g
1How to Refuel
The fuel filler opening is designed to accept only service station filler nozzles for refueling. Use of smaller diameter tubes (e.g., those used to siphon fuel for other uses) or other non-service station devices can damage the area in and around the filler opening.
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result of changes in air temperature.
Do not continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed the full tank capacity.
3WARNING Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flames away.
Handle fuel only outdoors. Wipe up spills immediately.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 494
How to Refuel Your fuel tank is not equipped with a fuel filler cap. You can insert the filler nozzle directly into the filler neck. The tank seals itself again when you pull out the filler nozzle.
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station pump on the left side of the vehicle in the rear.
2. Turn off the engine. 3. Press the fuel fill door release button. u The fuel fill door opens.
Press
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel D
rivin g
1How to Refuel
If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is not full, there may be a problem with the pumps fuel vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
If you repeatedly fill the tank with less than the specified minimum amount of fuel, the malfunction indicator lamp may come on. If this happens, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
If you have to refuel your vehicle from a portable container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.
2 Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container P. 579
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 495
4. Place the end of the filler nozzle on the lower part of filler opening, then insert it slowly and fully. u Make sure that the end of the filler
nozzle goes down along with the filler pipe.
u Keep the filler nozzle level. u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will
click off automatically. u If you do not fill up the tank to full,
always add a minimum of 3.5 US gal (13.3 L) of fuel.
u After filling, wait about five seconds before removing the filler nozzle.
5. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
495
496
D rivin
g
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 496
Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions
1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions
Direct calculation is the recommended method to determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are established following a simulated test. For more information on how this test is performed, please visit https://www.nrcan.gc.ca and search for fuel consumption testing in the search field at the top of the page.
Miles driven Gallons of fuel
Miles per Gallon
100 Liter Kilometers L per 100 km
Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO2 emissions is dependent on several factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle. Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the driver information interface. Use engine oil with the viscosity recommended.
2 Recommended Engine Oil P. 510
Maintain the specified tire pressure. Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo. Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicles underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.
Maintenance and Fuel Economy
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 497
Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.
Before Performing Maintenance Inspection and Maintenance ............ 498 Safety When Performing Maintenance..... 499 Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service ........................................... 500
Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 501 Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood..... 507 Opening the Hood ........................... 508 Engine Compartment Cover............. 509 Recommended Engine Oil ................ 510 Oil Check......................................... 511 Adding Engine Oil ............................ 512
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ..... 513 Engine Coolant ................................ 515 Transmission Fluid............................ 517 Brake Fluid....................................... 518 Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 518
Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 519 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades .......................................... 524
Checking and Maintaining Tires Checking Tires ................................. 528 Tire and Loading Information Label .. 529 Tire Labeling .................................... 529 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) .. 531
Wear Indicators ............................... 533 Tire Service Life................................ 533 Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 534 Tire Rotation.................................... 535 Winter Tires ..................................... 536
Battery............................................... 537 Remote Transmitter Care................. 539 Climate Control System Maintenance .....540 Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 542 Exterior Care.................................... 544
Accessories and Modifications ........ 547
497
498
M ain
ten an
ce
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 498
Before Performing Maintenance
1Inspection and Maintenance
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individuals using parts that are certified to EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the maintenance main items marked with # will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the driver information interface.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 504
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a subscription to the Service Express website at www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 592
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first. After performing maintenance, update the records in the separate maintenance booklet.
U.S. models
Inspection and Maintenance For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. (Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect.)
Routine inspections Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when refueling.
2 Maintenance P. 26
Periodic inspections Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Checking the Brake Fluid P. 518
Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects. 2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 528
Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly. 2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 519
Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months. 2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 524
Types of Inspection and Maintenance
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance M
ain ten
an ce
1Safety When Performing Maintenance
3WARNING Improperly maintaining this vehicle or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations according to the schedules in this owners manual.
3WARNING Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owners manual.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 499
Safety When Performing Maintenance Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether you should perform a given task.
To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood. u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them, causing a fire.
To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline. Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the 12-volt
battery or compressed air. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you. u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.
The vehicle must be in a stationary condition. u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the engine is off. Be aware that hot parts can burn you. u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before
touching vehicle parts. Be aware that moving parts can injure you. u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts. u Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop function is activated.
Maintenance Safety
Vehicle Safety
499
500
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
M ain
ten an
ce
1Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
NOTICE Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may damage the engine cover and component parts.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 500
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 501
Maintenance MinderTM
ain ten
an ce
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages appear on the driver information interface every time you set the power mode to ON. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.
501
502
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
M ain
ten an
ce
1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage.
There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you can view on the driver information interface.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 504
Displayed Engine Oil Life (%)
Calculated Engine Oil Life (%)
100 100 to 91 90 90 to 81 80 80 to 71 70 70 to 61 60 60 to 51 50 50 to 41 40 40 to 31 30 30 to 21 20 20 to 16 15 15 to 11 10 10 to 6 5 5 to 1 0 0
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 502
To Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the engine oil, appear on the driver information interface. You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time. 1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Press the ENTER button repeatedly until home screen appears. 3. Select Maintenance by pressing the / button repeatedly and press
ENTER. 4. Select Oil Life by pressing the / button and press ENTER. 5. The engine oil life appears on the screen.
Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
3 4
3 4
ENTER Button
Engine Oil Life
(Back) Button
Home Screen
Button3
Button4
(Home) Button
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM M
ain ten
an ce
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 503
The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.
Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver Information Interface
Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information
Maintenance Due Soon 15% The remaining engine oil life is 15 to 6 percent. Once you switch the display by pressing the , or button, this message will go off.
The engine oil is approaching the end of its service life, and the maintenance items should be inspected and serviced soon.
Maintenance Due Now 5% The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1 percent. Press the , or button to switch to another display.
The engine oil has almost reached the end of its service life, and the maintenance items should be inspected and serviced as soon as possible.
Maintenance Past Due Negative Distance The remaining engine oil life has passed its service life, and a negative distance appears after driving over 10 miles (U.S. models) or 10 km (Canadian models). Press the , or
button to switch to another display.
The engine oil life has passed. The maintenance items must be inspected and serviced immediately.
503Continued
504
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
M ain
ten an
ce
1Maintenance Service Items
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
us areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of tress to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions,
fluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). der message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is
ake fluid every 3 years.
Maintenance Sub Items te tires
lace air cleaner element*2
lace dust and pollen filter*3
ect drive belt lace transmission fluid and transfer fluid*
lace spark plugs lace timing belt and inspect water pump*4
ect valve clearance lace engine coolant lace rear differential fluid*, *5
lace brake fluid*6
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 504
Maintenance Service Items
Maintenance Minder Message System Message Indicator
Sub ItemsMain Item
U.S. models
*1: If the message Maintenance Due Now does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 589. *2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). *3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). *4: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110F, 43C), in very low temperatures (under
-20F, -29C), replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.) /100,000 km (Canada).
CODE Maintenance Main Items A Replace engine oil*1
B Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter Inspect front and rear brakes Check parking brake adjustment Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots Inspect suspension components Inspect driveshaft boots Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA) Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect exhaust system#
Inspect fuel lines and connections#
*5: Driving in mountaino mechanical (Shear) s recommended by the have the differential
*6: If a Maintenance Min reset, change the br
CODE 1 Rota 2 Rep
Rep Insp
3 Rep 4 Rep
Rep Insp
5 Rep 6 Rep 7 Rep
* Not available on all models
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM M
ain ten
an ce
1Maintenance Service Items
Adjust the valves during services A, 0, 9, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
Maintenance Sub Items te tires ace air cleaner element*2
ace dust and pollen filter*3
ect drive belt ace transmission fluid and transfer fluid ace spark plugs ace timing belt and inspect water pump*4
ect valve clearance ace engine coolant ace rear differential fluid*5
ace brake fluid*6
ice front and rear brakes ck parking brake adjustment ect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots ect suspension components ect driveshaft boots ect brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA) ect all fluid levels and condition of fluids ect exhaust system#
ect fuel lines and connections#
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 505
Canadian models
*1: If the message Maintenance Due Now does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 24,000 km (15,000 miles). *3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 24,000 km (15,000 miles). *4: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 43C, 110F), in very low temperatures (under
-29C, -20F), replace every 100,000 km (60,000 miles). *5: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of
mechanical (Shear) stress to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the differential fluid changed at 12,000km (7,500 miles), then every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).
*6: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 589.
CODE Maintenance Main Items A Replace engine oil*1
0 Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
CODE 1 Rota 2 Repl
Repl Insp
3 Repl 4 Repl
Repl Insp
5 Repl 6 Repl 7 Repl 9 Serv
Che Insp Insp Insp Insp Insp Insp Insp
505Continued
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
506
M ain
ten an
ce
1Resetting the Display
NOTICE Failure to reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after a maintenance service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after completing the required maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service, reset the Maintenance MinderTM display yourself.
You can also reset the Maintenance MinderTM display using the audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 327
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 506
Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the maintenance service.
1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Display the engine oil life.
2 Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information P. 502
3. Press and hold the ENTER button for about 10 seconds to enter the reset mode.
4. Press the / button to select a maintenance item to reset, or to select All Due Items (You can also select Cancel to end the process).
5. Press the ENTER button to reset the selected item. 6. Repeat from step 5 for other items you wish to reset.
Resetting the Display
Button3
ENTER Button Button4
3 4
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 507
Maintenance Under the Hood
ain ten
an ce
Brake Fluid (Black Cap)
Battery
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
Washer Fluid
Radiator Cap
Engine Coolant Reserve Tank
Engine Oil Dipstick (Orange)
Engine Oil Fill Cap
507
508
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
M ain
ten an
ce
1Opening the Hood
NOTICE Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised. The hood will strike the wipers, resulting in possible damage to the hood and/or the wipers.
NOTICE Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may damage the engine cover and component parts.
When closing the hood, check that the hood is securely latched.
If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop function is activated.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 508
Opening the Hood 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set
the parking brake. 2. Pull the hood release handle under the
driver's side lower corner of the dashboard. u The hood will pop up slightly.
3. Pull up the hood latch lever (located under the front edge of the hood to the center) and raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever.
4. Remove the support rod from the clamp using the grip. Mount the support rod in the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the hood. Remove your hand at a height of approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the hood close.
Hood Release Handle
Pull
Lever
Support Rod
Grip
Clamp
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Compartment Cover M
ain ten
an ce
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 509
Engine Compartment Cover The component parts in the engine compartment are protected by a cover. You may need to remove the cover when you perform certain maintenance work. Pull up on the engine compartment cover, remove it from the pin holders.
Engine Compartment Cover
509
510
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil
M ain
ten an
ce
1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact, they may adversely affect the engine performance and durability.
The following seal indicates the oil is energy conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum Institutes latest requirements.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 510
Recommended Engine Oil Use a genuine engine oil or another commercial engine oil of suitable type and viscosity (for the ambient temperature) as shown in the image that follows.
Oil is a major contributor to your engines performance and longevity. If you drive the vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged.
*1:Formulated to improve fuel economy.
Synthetic oil You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal and is the specified viscosity grade.
Genuine Engine Oil Commercial Engine Oil
Honda Genuine Motor Oil Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the container.
Ambient Temperature Ambient Temperature
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check M
ain ten
an ce
1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly add oil, being careful not to overfill.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 511
Oil Check We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel. Park the vehicle on level ground. Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange). 2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel. 3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.
4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
Lower Mark
Upper Mark
511
512
uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil
M ain
ten an
ce
1Adding Engine Oil
NOTICE Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark. Overfilling the engine oil may result in leaks and engine damage.
If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil may damage the engine compartment components.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 512
Adding Engine Oil 1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap. 2. Add oil slowly. 3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely. 4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.
Engine Oil Fill Cap
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter M
ain ten
an ce
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE You may damage the environment if you do not dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away into a garbage can or onto the ground.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 513
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the engines lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the driver information interface.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, and then turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil fill cap.
3. Remove the drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine, and drain the oil into a suitable container.
Drain Bolt
Washer
513Continued
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
514
M ain
ten an
ce
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The low oil pressure indicator should go off within five seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check your work.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 514
4. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the remaining oil.
5. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to the engine contact surface. u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
6. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the contact surface of the oil filter base, and install a new oil filter. u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to
the oil filter rubber seal. 7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt. u Tightening torque:
29 lbfft (39 Nm, 4.0 kgfm) 8. Pour the recommended engine oil into the
engine. u Engine oil change capacity (including
filter): 5.7 US qt (5.4 L)
9. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and start the engine.
10. Run the engine for a few minutes, and then check that there is no leak from the drain bolt or oil filter.
11. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes, and then check the oil level on the dipstick. u If necessary, add more engine oil.
Oil Filter
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant M
ain ten
an ce
1Engine Coolant
NOTICE Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at temperatures as low as about -31F (-35C). If your vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for details.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicles cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or with the engine components.
3WARNING Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 515
Engine Coolant
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
2. Remove the engine compartment cover. 2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 509
3. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve tank. u If the coolant level is below the MIN
mark, add the specified coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.
4. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
Reserve Tank
MAX
MIN
Reserve Tank
515Continued
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
516
M ain
ten an
ce
1Radiator
NOTICE Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can damage components in the engine compartment.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 516
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
2. Remove the engine compartment cover. 2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 509
3. Turn the radiator cap 1/8 turn counter- clockwise and relieve any pressure in the cooling system. Do not push the cap down when turning.
4. Push down and turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise to remove it.
5. The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
6. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it fully.
Radiator
Radiator Cap
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid M
ain ten
an ce
1Automatic Transmission Fluid
Do not mix Honda ATF-TYPE 3.1 (or higher) with other transmission fluids. Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF- TYPE 3.1 (or higher) may adversely affect the operation and durability of your vehicles transmission, and damage the transmission. Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to Honda ATF-TYPE 3.1 (or higher) is not covered by Hondas new vehicle limited warranty.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 517
Transmission Fluid
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Do not attempt to check or change the automatic transmission fluid yourself.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda ATF-TYPE 3.1 or higher
517
518
uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid
M ain
ten an
ce
1Brake Fluid
NOTICE Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicles braking system and can cause extensive damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark, have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn brake pads as soon as possible.
1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze can damage your vehicles paint. A vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump. Use only commercially available windshield washer fluid. Avoid prolonged use of hard water to prevent lime scale buildup.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 518
Brake Fluid
The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reserve tank.
Refilling Window Washer Fluid
Open the cap and check the amount of window washer fluid. If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
If the washer fluid is low, a message appears on the driver information interface.
Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Checking the Brake Fluid
Brake Reservoir
MIN
MAX
Models without washer level sensor
Models with washer level sensor
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 519
Replacing Light Bulbs
ain ten
an ce
1Headlight Bulbs
NOTICE Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
Low beam headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
Headlight Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the engine compartment cover. 2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 509
2. Remove the clips. 3. Remove the air intake duct.
High beam headlight: 60 W (HB3 for halogen bulb type)
Low beam headlight: LED type
High Beam Headlights
Clips
Air Intake Duct
Driver side
519Continued
uuReplacing Light BulbsuDaytime Running Lights and Parking Lights
520
M ain
ten an
ce
1Headlight Bulbs
Remove the clip using a Phillips-head screwdriver.
Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push until it is flat.
Center pin
Push until the pin is flat.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 520
4. Push the tab to remove the coupler. 5. Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to
remove. 6. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it clockwise. 7. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
Daytime Running Lights and Parking Lights Daytime running lights and parking lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Front Side Marker Lights Front side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Tab Coupler
Bulb
Both sides
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal Light Bulbs M
ain ten
an ce
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 521
Front Turn Signal Light Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the screws, pull the inner fender back.
2. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it.
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Fog Lights*
Fog lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Front Turn Signal Light: 28/8W (Amber)
Screws
Socket
Bulb
521* Not available on all models
522
uuReplacing Light BulbsuSide Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights*
M ain
ten an
ce
1Brake/Taillight, Rear Side Marker Light, and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs
Brake/taillights and rear side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 522
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights*
Side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Brake/Taillight, Rear Side Marker Light, and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the bolts.
2. Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar.
3. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it. Remove the old bulb.
4. Insert a new bulb and turn clockwise. 5. Slide the light assembly onto the guide on
the body. 6. Align the pins with the body grommets,
then push in until they fully seat.
Brake/Taillight: LED
Rear Side Marker Light: LED
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21W (Amber)
Bolts
Bulb Socket
* Not available on all models
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBack-Up Lights M
ain ten
an ce
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 523
Back-Up Lights When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it. Remove the old bulb.
2. Insert a new bulb and turn clockwise.
Rear License Plate Lights Rear license plate lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
High-Mount Brake Light High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Back-Up Lights: 21 W
Socket
Bulb
523
524
M ain
ten an
ce
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 524
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
1Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE Avoid dropping the wiper arm onto the windshield, it may damage the wiper arm and/or the windshield.
Checking Wiper Blades If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks, become noisy, and the hard surfaces of the blade may scratch the window glass.
Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber 1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the
passenger side.
2. Place a cloth on the edge of the lock tab. Push the lock tab up with a flat-tip screw driver.
3. Slide the blade from the wiper arm.
Lock Tab
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Front Wiper Blade Rubber M
ain ten
an ce
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 525
4. Slide the wiper blade out of the holder by pulling the tabbed end out.
5. Remove the retainers from the wiper blade that has been removed, and mount to a new wiper blade. u Correctly align the wiper blade
protrusion and the retainer grooves.
6. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder from the bottom end. u The tab on the holder should fit in the
indent of the wiper blade. 7. Slide the holder onto the wiper arm, then
push down the lock tab. 8. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,
then the driver side.
Blade
Retainer
Blade
525
526
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
M ain
ten an
ce
1Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE Avoid dropping the wiper arm, it may damage the rear window.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 526
Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber 1. Raise the wiper arm off. 2. Pivot the bottom end of the wiper blade up
until it comes off from the wiper arm.
3. Slide the blade out of the holder.
4. Remove the retainers from wiper blade and mount it to a new rubber blade.
Wiper Blade
Wiper Arm
Blade
Retainer
Rubber
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber M
ain ten
an ce
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 527
5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder. u Make sure it is engaged correctly, then
install the wiper blade assembly onto the wiper arm.
527
528
M ain
ten an
ce
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 528
Checking and Maintaining Tires
1Checking Tires
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If necessary, add or release air until the specified pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as 46 psi (3040 kPa, 0.30.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if checked when cold.
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. New tires and any that have been removed and reinstalled should be properly balanced
3WARNING Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance.
Checking Tires To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
Inflation guidelines Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort. Refer to the drivers doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards, and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1-2 psi (10-20 kPa, 0.1-0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.
Inspection guidelines Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems. Look for: Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord. Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks. Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment. Excessive tread wear.
2 Wear Indicators P. 533
Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label M
ain ten
an ce
1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the drivers doorjamb contains: a The number of people your vehicle can carry. b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight. c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare. d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.
1Tire Sizes
Following is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means. P235/60R18 102V P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle). 235: Tire width in millimeters. 60: Aspect ratio (the tires section height as a percentage of its width). R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial). 18: Rim diameter in inches. 102: Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry). V: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating).
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 529
Tire and Loading Information Label The label attached to the drivers doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading information.
Tire Labeling The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described as shown.
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.
Label Example
Example Tire Size Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Maximum Tire Load
Maximum Tire Pressure
Tire Size
Tire Sizes
529Continued
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling
530
M ain
ten an
ce
1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209 DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. B97R: Manufacturers identification mark. FW6X: Tire type code. 22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year Week
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 530
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
Cold Tire Pressure The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Load Rating Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure. Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can hold. Maximum Load Rating Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Recommended Inflation Pressure The cold tire inflation pressure recommended by the manufacturer. Treadwear Indicators (TWI) Means the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Glossary of Tire Terminology
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) M
ain ten
an ce
1Uniform Tire Quality Grading
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 531
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
531Continued
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
532
M ain
ten an
ce
1Traction
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
1Temperature
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 532
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Traction
Temperature
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators M
ain ten
an ce
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 533
Wear Indicators The groove where the wear indicator is located is about 1/16 inch (about 1.6 mm) shallower than elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire. Worn out tires have poor traction on wet roads.
Tire Service Life The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.
Example of a Wear Indicator mark
533
534
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement
M ain
ten an
ce
1Tire and Wheel Replacement
3WARNING Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owners manual.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 534
Tire and Wheel Replacement Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire's sidewall). Using tires of a different size or construction can cause certain vehicle systems such as the ABS and Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isnt possible, replace the front or rear tires in pairs.
Whenever you have a tire replaced or reset, make sure that the rubber valve stem is replaced and that the TPMS sensor is transferred from the old valve stem to the new one. If you replace a wheel, make sure that the wheels specifications match those of the original wheels.
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation M
ain ten
an ce
1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be rotated front to back (not from one side to the other). Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation indication mark facing forward, as shown below.
Front
Rotation Mark
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 535
Tire Rotation Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the driver information interface helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.
Tires without rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here.
Tires with rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here.
Front
Front
535
536
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires
M ain
ten an
ce
1Winter Tires
NOTICE Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicles brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain manufacturers instructions regarding vehicle operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware that these tires are not designed for winter driving conditions. For more information, contact a dealer.
3WARNING Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 536
Winter Tires If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires: Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires. Mount the tires to all four wheels. For tire chains: Install them on the front tires only. Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
Follow the chain manufacturers instruction when installing. Mount them as tightly as you can.
Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension. Drive slowly.
Cable-type: SCC Super Z LT ZT735
Cable-type: SCC Super Z6 SZ435
Models with 245/60R18 tires
Models with 265/45R20 tires
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 537
Battery
ain ten
an ce
1Battery
WARNING: Battery post, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling.
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals by applying a baking powder and water solution. Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion.
When replacing the battery, the replacement must be of the same specifications. Consult a dealer for more information.
3WARNING The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you.
When conducting any battery maintenance, wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do it.
Checking the Battery The condition of the battery is monitored by a sensor located on the negative terminal of the battery. If there is a problem with this sensor, the driver information interface will display a warning message. If this happens, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Check the battery terminals for corrosion monthly.
To access the battery terminals: 1. Remove the engine compartment cover.
2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 509
2. Remove the clips using a Phillips-head screwdriver, then remove the air intake duct.
2 High Beam Headlights P. 519
If your vehicles battery is disconnected or goes dead: The audio system is disabled.
2 Audio System Theft Protection P. 225
The clock resets*. 2 Clock P. 124
537* Not available on all models
538
uuBatteryuCharging the AGM Battery
M ain
ten an
ce
1Battery
The battery installed in this vehicle is specifically designed for a model with Auto Idle Stop. Using a battery other than this specified type may shorten the battery life, and prevent Auto Idle Stop from activating. If you need to replace the battery, make sure to select the specified type and size. Ask a dealer for more details.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 538
Charging the AGM Battery AGM labeled batteries like those installed in your vehicle require a compatible charger to be properly charged. Damage to the battery can result if the battery is charged improperly or with the wrong equipment. For more information on how to charge your vehicles AGM battery, consult a dealer.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 539
Remote Transmitter Care
ain ten
an ce
1Replacing the Remote Battery
NOTICE An improperly disposed of battery can damage the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or at a dealer.
3WARNING CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD The battery that powers the remote transmitter can cause severe internal burns and can even lead to death if swallowed. Keep new and used batteries away from children. If you suspect that a child has swallowed the battery, seek medical attention immediately.
Replacing the Remote Battery If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.
1. Remove the built-in key.
2. Remove the upper half of the cover by carefully prying on the edge with a coin. u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent
scratching the keyless remote. u Remove carefully to avoid losing the
buttons. 3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
Battery type: CR2032
Battery
539
540
M ain
ten an
ce
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 540
Climate Control System Maintenance
1Climate Control System Maintenance
NOTICE Vented refrigerant is harmful to the environment. To avoid refrigerant from venting, never replace the evaporator with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.
Refrigerant in your vehicles air conditioning system is flammable and can be ignited during servicing if proper procedures are not followed.
The air conditioner label is found under the hood: 2 Safety Labels P. 78 2 Specifications P. 582
Canadian models
Caution
Flammable Refrigerant
Requires Registered Technician to Service
Air Conditioning System
:
:
:
:
Air Conditioning To ensure proper and safe operation, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE J2845) recommends that the refrigerant system only be serviced by trained and certified technicians.
Never repair or replace the air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.
New replacement mobile air conditioning evaporators must be certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.
uuClimate Control System MaintenanceuDust and Pollen Filter M
ain ten
an ce
1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the climate control system deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 541
Dust and Pollen Filter The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.
541
542
M ain
ten an
ce
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 542
Cleaning
1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or cause a fire inside the vehicle. If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles, and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles. Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as benzene or gasoline.
After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them away using a dry cloth. Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts or textiles for long periods of time without washing.
1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window. Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a soft cloth so as not to damage them.
Be careful not to spill fluids, such as water or glass cleaner, on or around the cover of both the front sensor camera and the rainfall/light sensor*.
Interior Care Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt. Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts. Let the belts air dry. Wipe the loops of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
Cleaning Seat Belts
Loop
Cleaning the Window
* Not available on all models
uuCleaninguInterior Care M
ain ten
an ce
1Floor Mats
If you use any floor mats that were not originally provided with your vehicle, make sure they are designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and are securely anchored by the floor anchors. Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere with the front seat functions.
1Maintaining Genuine Leather*
It is important to clean or wipe away dirt or dust as soon as possible. Spills can soak into leather resulting in stains. Dirt or dust can cause abrasions in the leather. In addition, please note that some dark colored clothing can rub onto the leather seats resulting in discoloration or stains.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 543
The front and rear floor mats hook over floor anchors, which keep them from sliding forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn the anchor knobs to the unlock position. When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn the knobs to the lock position.
Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mats.
To properly clean leather: 1. Use a vacuum or soft dry cloth first to remove any dirt or dust. 2. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a solution comprised of 90%
water and 10% neutral soap. 3. Wipe away any soap residue with a clean damp cloth. 4. Wipe away residual water and allow leather to air dry in the shade.
Floor Mats
Lock
Unlock
Maintaining Genuine Leather*
543* Not available on all models
544
uuCleaninguExterior Care
M ain
ten an
ce
1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can cause a malfunction.
Do not spray water onto the capless unit when the fuel fill door is open. It can cause damage to the fuel system or engine.
When using an automated car wash that pulls the vehicle through with a conveyor, make sure the transmission in (N position.
2 If you want to keep the transmission in (N position [car wash mode] P. 407
Air Intake Vents
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 544
Exterior Care Dust off the vehicle body after you drive. Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following conditions: If driving on roads with road salt. If driving in coastal areas. If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
Fold in the door mirrors. For models equipped with automatic intermittent wipers, turn the wipers off. Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash.
Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body. Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior. Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,
use low pressure water and a mild detergent.
Washing the Vehicle
Using an Automated Car Wash
Using High Pressure Cleaners
uuCleaninguExterior Care M
ain ten
an ce
1Applying Wax
NOTICE Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe away spills immediately.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when you want to repair the painted surface of the parts made of resin.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 545
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicles paint from the elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicles paint to the elements, so reapply as necessary.
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and clean water.
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road contaminants. When necessary, as early as possible use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away these contaminants. Do not use a stiff brush or harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners). These can damage the protective finish on aluminum alloy wheels, resulting in corrosion. Depending on the type of finish, the wheels also may lose their luster or appear burnished. To avoid water stains, wipe the wheels dry with a cloth while they are still wet.
Applying Wax
Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Cleaning the Window
Maintaining Aluminum Wheels
Continued 545
546
uuCleaninguExterior Care
M ain
ten an
ce
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 546
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash. Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights. Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame surfaces. This also is not a malfunction. However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Fogged Exterior Light Lenses
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 547
Accessories and Modifications
ain ten
an ce
1Accessories and Modifications
Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to ensure proper operation on your vehicle.
3WARNING Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicles handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding accessories and modifications.
Accessories When installing accessories, check the following: Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions. Do not install any accessories over areas marked SRS Airbag, on the sides or backs
of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows. Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the vehicles airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags deploy.
Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 572
Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
547
548
uuAccessories and ModificationsuModifications
M ain
ten an
ce
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 548
Modifications Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar effect.
Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance. Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle to no longer meet federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.
The on-board diagnostic port (OBD-II/SAE J1962 connector) installed on this vehicle is intended to be used with automobile system diagnostic devices or with other devices that Honda has approved. Use of any other type of device may adversely affect the vehicle's electronic systems or allow them to be compromised, possibly resulting in a system malfunction, drained battery, or other unexpected problems.
Do not modify or attempt to repair any of the electrical components.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 549
Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.
Tools Types of Tools .................................. 550
If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 551
Engine Does Not Start Checking the Engine........................ 559 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak .. 560 Emergency Engine Stop ................... 561
If the Battery Is Dead ....................... 562 Overheating
How to Handle Overheating............. 565
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking If the Engine Oil Low Warning Appears ........567 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On ................................................. 568
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks ................................... 568
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On ................................................. 569
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On ....................... 569
If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Comes On or Blinks........................ 570
If the Transmission Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message ............ 571
Fuses Fuse Locations ................................. 572 Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 576
Emergency Towing........................... 577 If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door ..578 Refueling
Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container ...................................579
If You Cannot Open the Tailgate .... 580
549
550
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 550
Tools
1Types of Tools
The tools are stored in the cargo area.
Types of Tools
Wheel Nut Wrench/Jack Handle
Jack
Jack Handle Bar
Funnel
Storage Bag
Spare Tire
Tool Case Cargo Bin
Cargo Bin
Tool Case
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 551
If a Tire Goes Flat
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1Changing a Flat Tire
Follow compact spare precautions: Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact spare. It should be set to the specified pressure. Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with a full-size tire as soon as possible.
The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are specifically for this model. Do not use them with another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.
Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire. If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear. Mount the tire chains on the front tire.
Do not use a puncture-repairing agent on a flat tire, as it can damage the tire pressure sensor.
Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level, non-slippery surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Put the transmission into (P . 3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).
551Continued
uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
552
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
1Changing a Flat Tire
NOTICE Do not use the jack if it doesnt work properly. Call your dealer or a professional towing service.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 552
1. Push the rear edge of the handle on the cargo floor lid and open the lid.
2. Lift the secondary lid, then remove the hook from the bottom of the lid.
3. Attach the hook onto the weather seal lip.
Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
Handle
Hook
Seal Lip
uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 553
4. Unlock the cargo bin by turning the two locks. Remove the cargo bin from the vehicle.
5. Unscrew the spare tire bolt and slide the tire to the rear of the vehicle. Remove the spare tire from vehicle.
6. Pull out the wheel nut wrench, jack handle bar, storage bag, and jack from the tool case.
Locks
Spare Tire Bolt
Wheel Nut Wrench/ Jack Handle
Jack
Jack Handle Bar Storage Bag
553Continued
554
uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 554
7. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.
8. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up) under the vehicle body, near the tire that needs to be replaced.
9. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn using the wheel nut wrench.
Wheel Blocks
The tire to be replaced.
uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1How to Set Up the Jack
Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle. Other jacks may not support the weight (load) or may not fit the jacking point.
The following instructions must be followed to use the jack safely: Do not use while the engine is running. Use only where the ground is firm and level. Use only at the jacking points. Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack. Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.
3WARNING The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 555
1. Place the jack under the jacking point closest to the tire to be changed.
2. Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in the image until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point. u Make sure that the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar and the jack handle, until the tire is off the ground.
How to Set Up the Jack
Jacking Points
Jack Handle Bar Wheel Nut Wrench as Jack Handle
Continued 555
uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
556
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
1Replacing the Flat Tire
Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra torque using your foot or a pipe.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 556
1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.
2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire. 4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, then stop rotating.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack. Tighten the wheel nuts in the order indicated in the image. Go around, tightening the nuts, two to three times in this order. Wheel nut torque: 94 lbfft (127 Nm, 13 kgfm)
Replacing the Flat Tire
uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1Storing the Flat Tire
3WARNING Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and can seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 557
1. Put the flat tire in the storage bag provided with your vehicle. u The storage bag is in the tool case.
2. Knot the top of the storage bag. 3. Securely put the jack, jack handle bar and
wheel nut wrench back in the tool case.
4. Bore through the bag, and pass the holding belt through the hole of the bag and the wheel of the flat tire as shown.
5. Place the flat tire in the cargo area, and thread the belt through the rear anchor as shown.
6. Pass the belt through the ring, and tighten the belt to secure the flat tire in place.
Storing the Flat Tire
Belt
Rear Anchor
Continued 557
uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
558
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
1TPMS with Tire Fill Assist and the Compact Spare Tire
The system cannot monitor the pressure of the spare tire. Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure that it is correct.
Use the TPMS specific wheels. Each is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 558
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on. Tire Pressure Monitor Problem appears on the driver information interface, but this is normal.
If you replace the tire with a specified regular tire, the warning message on the driver information interface and the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will go off after a few miles (kilometers).
TPMS with Tire Fill Assist and the Compact Spare Tire
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 559
Engine Does Not Start
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
cklist on interface. ton message appears
560 g range. ange P. 158
again. 2 Starting the Engine P. 394
g, the engine cannot be started.
Gauge P. 107
dealer.
1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an assisting vehicle or booster battery to jump start it.
2 If the Battery Is Dead P. 562
Checking the Engine If the engine does not start, check the starter.
Starter condition Che Starter doesnt turn or turns over slowly. The battery may be dead. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly.
Check for a message on the driver informati If the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start But
2 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak P. uMake sure the keyless remote is in its operatin
2 ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating R
The starter turns over normally but the engine doesnt start. There may be a problem with a fuse. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly.
Review the engine start procedure. Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine Check the immobilizer system indicator. When the immobilizer system indicator is blinkin
2 Immobilizer System P. 151
Check the fuel level. There should be enough fuel in the tank. 2 Fuel
Check the fuses. Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 576
If the problem continues: 2 Emergency Towing P. 577
559
560
uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 560
If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak If the beeper sounds, the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears on the driver information interface, the ENGINE START/STOP button flashes, and the engine wont start, start the engine as follows:
1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/ STOP button with the H logo on the keyless remote while the ENGINE START/STOP button is flashing. The buttons on the keyless remote should be facing you. u The ENGINE START/STOP button
flashes for about 30 seconds.
2. Depress the brake pedal and press the ENGINE START/STOP button within 10 seconds after the beeper sounds and the ENGINE START/STOP button changes from flashing to on. u If you dont depress the pedal, the mode
will change to ACCESSORY.
uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1Emergency Engine Stop
Do not press the ENGINE START/STOP button while driving unless it is absolutely necessary for the engine to be turned off. If you press the ENGINE START/STOP button while driving, the beeper sounds.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 561
Emergency Engine Stop The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the following operations: Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds. Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times.
The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a safe place.
The gear position automatically changes to (P after the vehicle comes to a complete stop. Then, the power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.
The gear position automatically changes to (P after the vehicle comes to a complete stop. Then, press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake pedal to change the mode VEHICLE OFF.
U.S. models
Canadian models
561
562
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 562
If the Battery Is Dead
1If the Battery Is Dead
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable ends to touch each other while attaching or detaching the jumper cables.
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and may prevent the engine from starting.
3WARNING A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery.
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine, then open the hood.
1. Pull up on the engine compartment cover, remove it from the pin holders.
2. Remove the holding clips and the air intake duct.
Jump Starting Procedure
Pin
Engine Compartment Cover
Air Intake Duct Clip
uu If the Battery Is Deadu H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 563
3. Pull up on the engine cover, remove it from the pins. u Start on the passenger side and lift the
outermost edge of the cover. u Move towards the driver side while
applying uniform upward pressure. 4. Connect the first jumper cable to your
vehicles battery + terminal.
5. Connect the other end of the first jumper cable to the booster battery + terminal. u Use a 12-volt booster battery only. u When using an automotive battery
charger to boost your 12-volt battery, select a lower charging voltage than 15- volts. Check the charger manual for the proper setting.
6. Connect the second jumper cable to the booster battery - terminal.
7. Connect the other end of the second jumper cable to the engine hanger as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part.
8. If your vehicle is connected to another vehicle, start the assisting vehicles engine and increase its rpm slightly.
9. Attempt to start your vehicles engine. If it turns over slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
Pin
Engine Cover
Booster Battery
563Continued
564
uu If the Battery Is Deadu
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 564
Once your vehicles engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following order:
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicles ground. 2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery -
terminal. 3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicles battery + terminal. 4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal.
Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.
What to Do After the Engine Starts
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 565
Overheating
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1How to Handle Overheating
NOTICE Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge needle at the mark may damage the engine.
Continuing to drive with the Stop Driving When Safe. Engine Temperature Too Hot message on the driver information interface may damage the engine.
3WARNING Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
H
How to Handle Overheating Overheating symptoms are as follows: The temperature gauge needle is at the mark or the engine suddenly loses
power. Stop Driving When Safe. Engine Temperature Too Hot message appears on
the driver information interface. Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
First thing to do 1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place. 2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights. u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood. u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.
Then, open the hood.
H
565Continued
uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating
566
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
1How to Handle Overheating
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only. Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze as soon as possible.
3WARNING Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 566
Next thing to do 1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
stop the engine once the temperature gauge needle comes down. u If the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine. 2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling system components for leaks. u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is
low, remove the engine compartment cover then add coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.
2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 509
u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, check that the radiator is cool. Cover the radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to the base of the filler neck, and put the cap back on.
Last thing to do Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge. If the temperature gauge needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone down, contact a dealer for repairs.
Reserve Tank
MAXMIN
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 567
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1If the Engine Oil Low Warning Appears
NOTICE Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately.
If the Engine Oil Low Warning Appears Reasons for the warning to appear Appears when the engine oil pressure is low.
What to do as soon as the warning appears
1. Immediately park the vehicle on level ground in a safe place.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
What to do after parking the vehicle 1. Stop the engine and let it sit for
approximately three minutes. 2. Open the hood and check the oil level. u Add oil as necessary.
2 Oil Check P. 511
3. Start the engine and check the Engine Oil Low warning. u The warning disappears: Start driving
again. u The warning does not disappear within
10 seconds: Immediately stop the engine and contact a dealer for repairs.
567
568
uu Indicator, Coming On/Blinkingu If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge the battery.
1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on, the emissions control system and the engine could be damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at 31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle inspected.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 568
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when the battery is not being charged. What to do when the indicator comes on Turn off the climate control system, rear defogger, and other electrical systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs.
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system. Blinks when engine misfiring is detected. What to do when the indicator lamp comes on Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a dealer. What to do when the indicator lamp blinks Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least 10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.
uu Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
Have your vehicle repaired immediately. It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift the gears.
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution system is not working. This can result in vehicle instability under sudden braking. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 569
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On Reasons for the indicator to come on The brake fluid is low. There is a malfunction in the brake system. What to do when the indicator comes on while driving Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure. If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop. If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system. If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.
What to do when the indicator comes on Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine. If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
U.S.
Canada
569
570
uu Indicator, Coming On/Blinkingu If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Comes On or Blinks
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
1If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
TPMS with Tire Fill Assist provides visual and audible assistance during tire pressure adjustment. With the power mode in ON, while you adjust tire pressure up or down, the system alerts you as follows: Below recommended pressure: The beeper sounds and exterior lights flash once every five seconds. At recommended pressure: The beeper sounds and exterior lights flash rapidly for ~ five seconds. Above recommended pressure: The beeper sounds and lights flash twice every two seconds.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 570
If the Low Tire Pressure/Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Comes On or Blinks
Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink A tire pressure is significantly low. If there is a problem with the TPMS with Tire Fill Assist or the compact spare tire is installed, the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on. What to do when the indicator comes on Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on the driver side doorjamb. What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire. The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers).
uu Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Transmission Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1 If the Transmission Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message
You may not be able to start the engine.
Make sure to set the parking brake when parking your vehicle.
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
2 Emergency Towing P. 577
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 571
If the Transmission Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message Reasons for the indicator to blink The transmission is malfunctioning.
What to do when the indicator blinks Immediately have your vehicle inspected by
a dealer. Change the gear position to (N after
starting the engine. u Check if the (N position in the
instrument panel and the indicator on the (N button light/blink.
u The engine cannot be turned on unless the parking brake is set.
2 Starting the Engine P. 394
571
572
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 572
Fuses
Fuse Locations If any electrical devices are not working, set Circuit protected and fuse rating
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number. Located near the passenger's side damper house. Push the tabs to open the box.
Engine Compartment Fuse Box Type A
Tab
* Not available on all models
Circuit Protected Amps
1
(70 A) REAR BLOWER 30 A ABS/VSA MTR 40 A ABS/VSA FSR 20 A MAIN FAN 30 A MAIN FUSE 150 A
2
SUB FAN 30 A WIP MTR 30 A WASHER 20 A
PREMIUM AMP* (20 A) ENGINE MOUNT 30 A FRONT BLOWER 40 A A/C INVERTER* (30 A)
STANDARD AMP* (30 A) REAR DEF 40 A
(30 A) PREMIUM AMP* (20 A)
3
4 PARKING LIGHT 10 A 5 CRUISE CANCEL SW 7.5 A 6 STOP LIGHT 10 A 7 FI SUB VSS 10 A
8 L H/L LO 10 A 9
10 R H/L LO 10 A 11 IGPS 7.5 A 12 INJECTOR 20 A 13 H/L LO MAIN 20 A 14 VBUM 10 A 15 FRONT FOG* (10 A) 16 HAZARD 15 A
17 PASSENGER P/ SEAT(RECLINE)* (20 A)
18 PASSENGER P/SEAT(SLIDE)* (20 A) 19 20 MG CLUTCH 7.5 A 21 MAIN RLY 15 A 22 FI SUB 15 A 23 IG COIL 15 A 24 DBW 15 A 25 SMALL/STOP MAIN 20 A 26 BACK UP 10 A 27 HTD STRG WHEEL* (15 A) 28 HORN 10 A 29 RADIO/USB 15 A
Circuit Protected Amps
uuFusesuFuse Locations H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 573
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number. Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push the tabs to open the box.
Engine Compartment Fuse Box Type B
Tab
* Not available on all models
Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected Amps
1
(40 A) 4WD* (20 A)
IG MAIN 30 A IG MAIN2 30 A
P/TAILGATE MOTOR* (40 A) F/B MAIN2 60 A F/B MAIN 60 A
EPS 60 A 2 TRAILER MAIN (30 A) 3 TRAILER E-BRAKE (20 A) 4 BATTERY SENSOR 7.5 A 5 H/L HI MAIN 20 A 6 P/TAILGATE CLOSER* (20 A) 7 CTR ACC SOCKET 20 A 8 REAR ACC SOCKET* (20 A) 9 FRONT WIPER DEICER* (15 A)
10 ACC/IG2_MAIN 10 A 11 TRAILER CHARGE (20 A) 12 IDLE STOP ST CUT (30 A) 13 IDLE STOP (30 A) 14 IDLE STOP (30 A)
15 ELECTRONIC GEAR
SELECTOR (15 A)
16 REAR HEATED SEAT* (20 A) 17 ST CUT FEED BACK 7.5 A
573Continued
574
uuFusesuFuse Locations
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 574
Located under the dashboard.
Fuse locations are shown on the label on the outer side of the side panel cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number.
Interior Fuse Box Type A
Fuse Box
Fuse Label
* Not available on all models
Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected Amps 1 DRIVER P/WINDOW 20 A 2 DOOR LOCK 20 A 3 SMART 7.5 A 4 PASSENGER P/WINDOW 20 A 5 FRONT ACC SOCKET 20 A 6 FUEL PUMP 20 A 7 ACG 15 A 8 FRONT WIPER 7.5 A 9 IG1 SMART 7.5 A 10 SRS 10 A 11 DRIVER REAR P/WINDOW 20 A 12
13 PASSENGER REAR P/
WINDOW 20 A
14 FUEL LID 20 A 15 DRIVER P/SEAT(RECLINE)* (20 A) 16 (7.5 A) 17 FRONT SEAT HEATER* (20 A) 18 INTR LT 7.5 A
19 DRIVER REAR DOOR
UNLOCK 10 A
20 PASSENGER SIDE DOOR
UNLOCK 10 A
21 DRL 7.5 A 22 KEY LOCK 7.5 A 23 A/C 7.5 A
24 IG1a FEED BACK 7.5 A 25 INST PANEL LIGHTS 7.5 A 26 LUMBAR SUPPORT* (10 A) 27 PARKING LIGHTS 7.5 A 28 OPTION 10 A 29 BACK LT 7.5 A 30 REAR WIPER 10 A 31 ST MOTOR 7.5 A 32 SRS 7.5 A
33 PASSENGER SIDE DOOR
LOCK 10 A
34 DRIVER DOOR LOCK 10 A 35 DRIVER DOOR UNLOCK 10 A 36 DRIVER P/SEAT(SLIDE)* (20 A) 37 PASSENGER H/L HI 10 A 38 DRIVER H/L HI 10 A 39 IG1b FEED BACK 7.5 A 40 ACC 7.5 A 41 DRIVER REAR DOOR LOCK 10 A 42
Circuit Protected Amps
uuFusesuFuse Locations H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 575
Located under the dashboard.
Fuse locations are shown on the image. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number.
Interior Fuse Box Type B
Fuse Box
Fuse Label
Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected Amps A METER 10 A B ABS/VSA 7.5 A C ACG 7.5 A D MICU 7.5 A E AUDIO 15 A F BACK UP 10 A G ACC 7.5 A
575
576
uuFusesu Inspecting and Changing Fuses
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system.
Use the charts to locate the fuse in question and confirm the specified amperage on the fuse label.
2 Fuse Locations P. 572 Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified amperage.
There is a fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse box.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 576
Inspecting and Changing Fuses 1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK). Turn the headlights and all accessories off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover. 3. Check the large fuse in the engine
compartment. u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and replace it with a new one.
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine compartment and the vehicle interior. u If there is a blown fuse, remove it with
the fuse puller and replace it with a new one.
Combined Fuse
Blown Fuse
Fuse Puller
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 577
Emergency Towing
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1Emergency Towing
NOTICE Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicles weight.
Improper towing such as towing behind a motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the transmission.
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift from side to side or break.
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
Flatbed equipment The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck. This is the best way to transport your vehicle.
Wheel lift equipment The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to tow your vehicle.
All models
2WD models
577
578
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 578
If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
1What to Do If Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked.
1. Open the tailgate. 2. Wrap a cloth around the built-in key. Put it
into the cover slot as shown in the image, and remove the cover.
3. Pull the release lever toward you. u The release lever unlocks the fuel fill door
when it is pulled.
What to Do If Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
Cover
Release Lever
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 579
Refueling
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
NOTICE Do not insert the nozzle of a portable fuel container or any funnel other than the one provided with your vehicle. Doing so can damage the fuel system. Do not try to pry open or push open the sealed fuel tank with foreign objects. This can damage the fuel system and its seal.
Make sure the fuel in the portable fuel container is gasoline before you refuel.
3WARNING Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flames away.
Handle fuel only outdoors. Wipe up spills immediately.
Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container If you have run out of fuel and need to refuel your vehicle from a portable fuel container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.
1. Turn off the engine. 2. Press the fuel fill door release button. u The fuel fill door opens.
3. Take the funnel out of the cargo bin in the cargo area.
2 Types of Tools P. 550
4. Place the end of the funnel on the lower part of filler opening, then insert it slowly and fully. u Make sure that the end of the funnel
goes down along with the filler pipe.
5. Fill the tank with fuel from the portable fuel container. u Pour fuel carefully so you do not spill any.
6. Remove the funnel from the filler neck. u Wipe up any fuel from the funnel before
storing it. 7. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
Funnel
Cargo Floor Lid
Funnel
579
580
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 580
If You Cannot Open the Tailgate
1What to Do If Unable to Open the Tailgate
Following up: After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked.
When you open the tailgate from inside, make sure there is enough space around the tailgate, and it does not hit anyone or any object.
If you cannot open the tailgate, use the following procedure: 1. Use a flat-tip screwdriver and remove the
cover on the inside of the tailgate. u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth
to prevent scratches.
2. To open the tailgate, push the tailgate while pushing the lever to the right using a flat-tip screw driver.
What to Do If Unable to Open the Tailgate
Cover
Lever
Models with power tailgate
Screwdriver
Lever
Models without power tailgate
Screwdriver
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 581
Information
This chapter includes your vehicles specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.
Specifications .................................... 582 Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number ......................................... 584
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 585 Reporting Safety Defects ................. 586
Emissions Testing Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 587
Warranty Coverages ........................ 589 Authorized Manuals......................... 592 Customer Service Information......... 593
581
582
In fo
rm atio
n
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 582
Specifications
Vehicle Specifications
*1: 2WD models *2: AWD models
Model Passport No. of Passengers: Front 2 Rear 3 Total 5 Weights: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
See the certification label on the driver's doorjamb
Gross Axle Weight Rating (Front)
See the certification label on the driver's doorjamb
Gross Axle Weight Rating (Rear)
See the certification label on the driver's doorjamb
Gross Combined Weight Rating
U.S.: 8,025 lbs (3,640 kg)*1
9,755 lbs (4,425 kg)*2
Canada: 4,425 kg
* Not available on all models
Air Conditioning
Engine Specifications
Fuel
Washer Fluid
Refrigerant Type HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) Charge Quantity 21.3 23.1 oz (605 655 g) Lubricant Type RL85HM (POE) Quantity 7.75 9.33 cu-in (127 153 cm3)
Displacement 211.8 cu-in (3,471 cm3) Spark Plugs NGK DILZKR7B11G
Type Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number of 87 or higher
Fuel Tank Capacity 19.5 US gal (73.8 L)
Tank Capacity U.S.: 4 US qt (3.8 L) Canada: 5.6 US qt (5.3 L)
Light Bulbs Headlights (Low Beam) LED Headlights (High Beam) 60 W (HB3) Fog Lights* LED Front Turn Signal Lights 28/8 W (Amber) Front Side Marker Lights LED Parking/Daytime Running Lights LED Side Turn Signal Lights (on Door Mirrors)* LED
Brake/Taillights LED Rear Side Marker Lights LED Back-Up Lights 21 W Rear Turn Signal Lights 21 W (Amber) High-Mount Brake Light LED Rear License Plate Lights LED Interior Lights
Front Map Lights 5 W Rear Map Lights 5 W Ambient Lights LED Vanity Mirror Lights* 1.4 W Door Courtesy Lights* 3.8 W Door Inner Handle Lights* LED Door Pocket Lights* LED Beverage Holder Light* LED Foot Lights* LED Console Compartment Light 1.4 W Glove Box Light 1.4 W Cargo Area Lights 8 W
uuSpecificationsu In
fo rm
atio n
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 583
Brake Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Rear Differential Fluid*
Transfer Assembly Fluid*
Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Specified Honda ATF Type-3.1 or higher Capacity Change 3.5 US qt (3.3 L)
Specified Honda DPSF-II Capacity Change 1.92 US qt (1.82 L)
Specified Honda HGO-1 Capacity Change 0.45 US qt (0.43 L)
* Not available on all models
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Recommended Honda Genuine Motor Oil 0W-20 API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Capacity
Change 5.4 US qt (5.1 L) Change including filter
5.7 US qt (5.4 L)
Specified Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity 1.96 US gal (7.40 L) (change including the remaining 0.22 US gal (0.82 L) in the reserve tank)
Tire
*1: Original tire size is mentioned on the tire information label on the drivers doorjamb.
*2: Models with 245/60R18 *3: Models with 265/45R20
Regular Size*1
245/60R18 105H 265/45R20 104H
Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
35 (240 [2.4])*2
37 (255 [2.6])*3
Compact Spare
Size T165/80D17 104M Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
60 (420 [4.2])
Wheel Size Regular
18 x 8J*2
20 x 8 1/2J*3
Compact Spare 17 x 4T
583
584
In fo
rm atio
n
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 584
Identification Numbers
1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number
The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is located under the cover.
Cover
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. The locations of your vehicles VIN, engine number, and transmission number are shown as follows:
Vehicle Identification Number
Engine Number
Certification Label/Vehicle Identification Number
Automatic Transmission Number
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 585
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
fo rm
atio n
Each radio frequency device installed in the vehicle conforms to the requirements and standards of the regulation listed below:
As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
585
586
In fo
rm atio
n
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 586
Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov.
In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canadas Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 587
Emissions Testing
fo rm
atio n
1Testing of Readiness Codes
The readiness codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you may be requested to return at a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see a dealer.
Testing of Readiness Codes Your vehicle has readiness code as part of the onboard self diagnostic system. Some states use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicles emissions components are working properly. The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, set the power mode to ON, without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready, prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:
1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full. 2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more. 3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40F and 95F (4C and 35C). 4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20
seconds. 5. Keep the vehicle in (P . Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there
for about 3 minutes. 6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
587Continued
588
uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
In fo
rm atio
n
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 588
7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in (D . Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 589
Warranty Coverages
fo rm
atio n
U.S. Owners Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty covers your new vehicle, except for the emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty these two warranties cover your vehicles emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty all exterior body panels are covered against rusting from the inside out for the specified time period, regardless of mileage.
Accessory Limited Warranty Honda accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty covers all Honda replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship.
589Continued
590
uuWarranty Coveragesu
In fo
rm atio
n
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 590
Replacement Battery Limited Warranty provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from your dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty provides coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicles original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
Statement on Warranty Coverage for Aftermarket and Recycled Parts The Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. s.2301 et seq., makes it illegal for motor vehicle manufacturers to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage solely because an aftermarket or recycled part has been used to repair the vehicle or someone other than the authorized service provider performed service on the vehicle. This provision does not apply to a new motor vehicle purchased solely for commercial or industrial use.
uuWarranty Coveragesu In
fo rm
atio n
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 591
Under federal law, a manufacturer may deny warranty coverage and charge for repairs to a vehicle if it is discovered that an aftermarket or recycled part installed on the vehicle is defective or was installed incorrectly and caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty. The Federal Trade Commission requires that a manufacturer demonstrate that an aftermarket or recycled part or service performed by a person other than an authorized service provider caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty before denying warranty coverage. Additionally, federal law allows a manufacturer to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage if the manufacturer provides the article or service to consumers free of charge under the warranty or the manufacturer has secured a waiver from the Federal Trade Commission.
Canadian Owners Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
EPA Contact Information An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting:
Director, Light-Duty Vehicle Center, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Attention: Warranty Claim 2000 Traverwood Drive, Ann Arbor, MI 48105; complianceinfo@epa.gov
591
592
In fo
rm atio
n
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 592
Authorized Manuals
Service Express For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.
For U.S. Owners Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by phone at 1 (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.
For Canadian Owners Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 593
Customer Service Information
fo rm
atio n
1Customer Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following information: Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number P. 584
Date of purchase Odometer reading of your vehicle Your name, address, and telephone number A detailed description of the problem Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals who should be able to deal with any problems you may encounter with your vehicle. If, however, you are faced with a problem that they cannot resolve to your satisfaction, contact Honda Customer Services.
U.S. Owners American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Service Mail Stop CHI-5 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746 Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009
Canadian Owners Honda Canada Inc. Customer Relations 180 Honda Boulevard Markham, ON L6C 0H9 Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 Fax: 1-877-939-0909 E-mail: Honda_cr@ch.honda.com
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands Bella International P.O. Box 190816 San Juan, PR 00919-0816 Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546
593
594
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 594
t blank.
Index
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 595
Index
In d
ex
A AAC ................................................... 276, 279 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .................. 478 AC Power Outlet ...................................... 200 Accessories and Modifications ................ 547 Accessory Power Sockets ......................... 199 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ................ 446 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (Amber)..................................................... 93
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (Green) ...................................................... 93
Additives Coolant .................................................. 515 Engine Oil ............................................... 510 Washer ................................................... 518
Additives, Engine Oil ............................... 510 Adjusting
Armrest .................................................. 191 Front Seats.............................................. 181 Head Restraints............................... 188, 189 Mirrors.................................................... 179 Rear Seats............................................... 185 Steering Wheel ....................................... 178
Agile Handling Assist ............................... 422 Air Conditioning System (Climate Control System) ....................... 213 Changing the Mode................................ 213 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows .............................................. 214
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 541 Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode................... 214
Sensor ..................................................... 219 Synchronization Mode............................. 216 Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 213
Air Pressure ....................................... 529, 583 Airbags ........................................................ 47
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 53 After a Collision......................................... 51 Airbag Care............................................... 61 Event Data Recorder .................................... 0 Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 50 Indicator .............................................. 58, 84 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 59 Sensors...................................................... 47 Side Airbags .............................................. 55 Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 57
All-wheel drive (AWD) Indicator ............... 91 AM/FM Radio ............................................ 260 Android Auto............................................ 298 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 478
Indicator .................................................... 83 Apple CarPlay ........................................... 295 Armrest ..................................................... 191 AT&T Hotspot ........................................... 293 Audio Remote Controls............................ 226 Audio System .................................... 222, 228
Adjusting the Sound................................ 254 AM/FM Radio .......................................... 260 Android Auto .......................................... 298 Apple CarPlay.......................................... 295 AT&T Hotspot.......................................... 293 Audio/Information Screen........................ 229
Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 224 Changing the Screen Brightness .............. 255 Display Setup .......................................... 255 Error Messages........................................ 302 File Manager ........................................... 248 General Information ................................ 305 HD Subchannel ....................................... 262 Home Screen........................................... 234 HondaLink ........................................... 287 How to Delete a File ................................ 251 How to Transfer a File ............................. 248 How to Update Wirelessly ....................... 242 How to Update with a USB Device........... 246 iPod ........................................................ 273 Limitations for Manual Operation ............ 256 MP3/WMA/AAC.............................. 276, 279 My Honda Music ..................................... 279 Playing AM/FM Radio .............................. 260 Playing Bluetooth Audio ........................ 283 Playing SiriusXM Radio .......................... 263 Playing Social Playlist ............................... 285 Reactivating ............................................ 225 Remote Controls ..................................... 226 Security Code.......................................... 225 Selecting an Audio Source....................... 256 Siri Eyes Free ........................................... 294 Status Area ............................................. 239 System Updates....................................... 242 Theft Protection ...................................... 225 Updating Apps ........................................ 240 USB Flash Drives .............................. 276, 306
595
596
In d
ex
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 596
USB Port .................................................. 223 Wallpaper Setup ...................................... 232 Wi-Fi Connection..................................... 292
Audio/Information Screen........................ 229 Authorized Manuals................................. 592 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................. 140
Customize ............................................... 341 Auto High-Beam ....................................... 167
Indicator .................................................... 84 Auto Idle Stop........................................... 411
OFF Button .............................................. 412 Auto Idle Stop Indicator (Green) ............... 89 Auto Idle Stop OFF Indicator ..................... 89 Auto Idle Stop Suspend Indicator.............. 89 Auto Idle Stop System Indicator (Amber) ..................................................... 89
Automatic Intermittent Wipers ............... 171 Automatic Lighting .................................. 163 Automatic Transmission ........................... 402
Creeping ................................................. 402 Fluid ........................................................ 517 Kickdown ................................................ 402 Operating the Shift Button....................... 405 Shifting.................................................... 403
Auxiliary Input Jack .................................. 224 Average Fuel Economy............................. 113
B Back-Up Light ........................................... 523 Battery ...................................................... 537
Charging System Indicator................. 81, 568 If the Battery Is Dead ............................... 562 Maintenance (Checking the Battery)........ 537
Belts (Seat) .................................................. 37 Beverage Holders ..................................... 197 Blind Spot Information System................ 423 Bluetooth Audio ..................................... 283 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink ................... 349 Booster Seats (For Children) ...................... 76 Brake System ............................................ 476
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................... 478 Brake Assist System ................................. 479 Fluid........................................................ 518 Foot Brake............................................... 477 Indicator............................................ 80, 569 Parking Brake .......................................... 476
Brightness Control (Instrument Panel).... 175 Bulb Replacement .................................... 519
Back-Up Lights ........................................ 523 Brake lights ............................................. 522 Daytime Running Lights........................... 520 Fog Lights ............................................... 521 Front Side Marker Lights.......................... 520 Front Turn Signal Lights........................... 521 Headlights............................................... 519 High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 523 Parking Lights.......................................... 520 Rear License Plate Lights.......................... 523
Rear Side Marker Lights .......................... 522 Rear Turn Signal Lights............................ 522 Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights.................................................... 522
Taillights ................................................. 522 Bulb Specifications ................................... 582
C Car Wash Mode........................................ 407 Carbon Monoxide Gas ............................... 77 Carrying Cargo ................................. 377, 379 Certification Label ................................... 584 Changing Bulbs ........................................ 519 Charging System Indicator ................ 81, 568 Child Safety ................................................ 62
Childproof Door Locks ............................ 139 Child Seat ................................................... 62
Booster Seats ............................................ 76 Child Seat for Infants ................................ 64 Child Seat for Small Children .................... 65 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/ Shoulder Seat Belt ................................... 70
Larger Children ......................................... 75 Rear-facing Child Seat............................... 64 Selecting a Child Seat ............................... 66
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 139 Cleaning the Exterior............................... 544 Cleaning the Interior ............................... 542 Climate Control System ........................... 213
Changing the Mode................................ 213
In d
ex
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 597
Defrosting the Windshield and Windows .............................................. 214
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 541 Recirculation and Fresh Air Mode............ 214 Sensors ................................................... 219 Synchronization Mode ............................ 216 Using Automatic Climate Control............ 213
Clock ......................................................... 124 Coat Hook ................................................ 204 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ................................................. 434
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Indicator ............................. 93, 94
Compact Spare Tire.......................... 551, 583 Console Compartment............................. 195 Controls .................................................... 123 Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 515
Adding to the Radiator ........................... 516 Adding to the Reserve Tank .................... 515 Overheating............................................ 565 Temperature Gauge................................ 107
Creeping (Automatic Transmission)........ 402 Cross Traffic Monitor ............................... 487 Cup Holders .............................................. 197 Customer Service Information ................ 593 Customized Features ............................... 327
D Daytime Running Lights .......................... 166 Dead Battery ............................................ 562
Defaulting All the Settings ...................... 345 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows ................................................. 214
Detachable Anchor..................................... 44 Devices that Emit Radio Waves ............... 585 Dimming
Headlights ............................................... 162 Rearview Mirror ....................................... 179
Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................. 511 Directional Signals (Turn Signal) ............. 161 Door Mirrors ............................................. 180 Doors ......................................................... 126
Auto Door Locking .................................. 140 Auto Door Unlocking............................... 140 Door Open Message.................................. 36 Keys ........................................................ 126 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside..................................................... 137
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside.................................................. 129
Lockout Prevention System ...................... 136 DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 531 Driver Information Interface ................... 108
Accessing Content................................... 110 Warning and Information Messages .......... 96
Driving....................................................... 375 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ................ 446 Automatic Transmission........................... 402 Braking.................................................... 476 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ............... 392 Shifting Gear ........................................... 403
Starting the Engine.................................. 394 Driving Position Memory System ............ 176 Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 541
E Eco Assist System ...................................... 12 ECON Button ............................................ 417 Econ Mode
Indicator.................................................... 88 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator............................................ 85, 569 Electronic Stability Control (ESC)............. 420 Emergency ................................................ 577 Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes)....... 587 Engine
Coolant................................................... 515 If the Battery Is Dead ............................... 562 Number................................................... 584 Oil........................................................... 510 Remote Engine Start................................ 396 Starting ................................................... 394
Engine Compartment Cover .................... 509 Engine Coolant......................................... 515
Adding to the Radiator............................ 516 Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 515 Overheating ............................................ 565 Temperature Gauge ................................ 107
Engine Oil ................................................. 510 Adding.................................................... 512 Checking................................................. 511
597
598
In d
ex
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 598
Displaying Maintenance Minder Information............................................ 502
Engine Oil Low Warning .......................... 567 Recommended Engine Oil........................ 510
Engine Oil Low Warning .......................... 567 ENGINE START/STOP Button .................... 158 EPS (Electric Power Steering) System....... 569 Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) .. 77 Exterior Care (Cleaning) ........................... 544 Exterior Mirrors......................................... 180
F Features..................................................... 221 File Manager ............................................. 248 Filters
Dust and Pollen ....................................... 541 Oil ........................................................... 513
Flat Tire ..................................................... 551 Floor Mats ................................................. 543 Fluids
Automatic Transmission........................... 517 Brake....................................................... 518 Engine Coolant........................................ 515 Windshield Washer.................................. 518
FM/AM Radio ............................................ 260 Fog Light Indicator ..................................... 87 Fog Lights.................................................. 165 Folding Down the Rear Seat .................... 186 Foot Brake................................................. 477 Front Airbags (SRS) ..................................... 50
Front Seats ................................................ 181 Adjusting ................................................ 181
Front Sensor Camera................................ 473 Fuel...................................................... 24, 493
Economy ................................................. 496 Gauge..................................................... 107 Instant Fuel Economy .............................. 113 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 83 Range ..................................................... 113 Recommendation .................................... 493 Refueling................................................. 493
Fuel Economy ........................................... 496 Fuel Fill Cap .............................................. 495 Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 24, 494
Unable to Unlock .................................... 578 Fuses .......................................................... 572
Inspecting and Changing......................... 576 Locations......................... 572, 573, 574, 575
G Gasoline (Fuel)
Economy ................................................. 496 Gauge..................................................... 107 Information ............................................. 493 Instant Fuel Economy .............................. 113 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 83 Refueling................................................. 493
Gauges ...................................................... 107 Gear Position Indicator ...................... 81, 405
Gear Shift Positions Automatic Transmission .......................... 403
Glass (care) ............................................... 545 Glove Box ................................................. 195
H Handling the Unexpected ....................... 549 HandsFreeLink (HFL) .............................. 349
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History..................................... 358
Automatic Transferring ........................... 357 Displaying Messages ............................... 368 Favorite Contacts .................................... 359 HFL Buttons ............................................ 349 HFL Menus.............................................. 352 HFL Status Display................................... 351 In Case of Emergency ............................. 372 Limitations for Manual Operation............ 351 Making a Call ......................................... 361 Options During a Call.............................. 364 Phone Setup ........................................... 354 Receiving a Call....................................... 364 Receiving a Text Message........................ 366 Ringtone................................................. 357 Selecting a Phone ................................... 367 To Set Up a Text Message Options .......... 365
Hazard Warning Button .............................. 6 HD RadioTM ............................................... 262 Head Restraints ................................ 188, 189
In d
ex
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 599
Headlights ................................................ 162 Auto High-Beam ..................................... 167 Automatic Operation .............................. 163 Dimming......................................... 162, 166 Operating ............................................... 162
Heated Steering Wheel ........................... 210 Heated Windshield Button...................... 174 Heater (Steering Wheel).......................... 210 Heaters (Seat) ........................... 207, 208, 209 HFL (HandsFreeLink) .............................. 349 High Beam Indicator .................................. 86 Hill Start Assist System ............................. 400 HomeLink Universal Transceiver ........... 346 Honda App License Agreement .............. 307 Honda Sensing ........................................ 25 HondaLink ............................................ 287
I Identification Numbers............................ 584
Engine and Transmission......................... 584 Vehicle Identification............................... 584
If the Transmission Indicator Blinks along with the Warning Message ................... 571
Illumination Control ................................ 175 Button .................................................... 175
Immobilizer System.................................. 151 Indicator ................................................... 87
Indicators .................................................... 80 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Amber) .... 93 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Green) ..... 93
All-wheel drive (AWD) ............................... 91 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 83 Auto High-Beam........................................ 84 Auto Idle Stop (Green) ............................... 89 Auto Idle Stop OFF Indicator ...................... 89 Auto Idle Stop Suspend ............................. 89 Auto Idle Stop System (Amber) .................. 89 Blind spot information ....................... 95, 424 Brake System (Amber) ............................... 80 Brake System (Red) ............................ 80, 569 Charging System ............................... 81, 568 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ........................................... 93, 94
Econ Mode................................................ 88 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System .. 85, 569 Engine Oil Low Warning .......................... 567 Fog Light ................................................... 87 Gear Position............................................. 81 Hazard Warning ........................................ 86 High Beam ................................................ 86 Immobilizer System.................................... 87 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (Amber) ................................................... 91
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (Green) ............................................ 91, 461
Lights On................................................... 86 Low Fuel.................................................... 83 Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ..................... 86, 570 Malfunction Indicator Lamp............... 81, 568 Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber)... 80
Parking Brake and Brake System (Red) ............................................... 80, 569
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) ............. 92 Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 39, 83 Security System Alarm............................... 87 Supplemental Restraint System............ 58, 84 System Message........................................ 88 Turn Signal................................................ 86 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) OFF .. 85, 421 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA) System ............................................ 84, 420
Information .............................................. 581 Instant Fuel Economy............................... 113 Instrument Panel ........................................ 79
Brightness Control................................... 175 Integrated Sunshades .............................. 206 Intelligent Traction Management System ..................................................... 418
Intelligent VTM4 (i-VTM4TM).................... 426 Interior Lights ........................................... 192 Interior Rearview Mirror.......................... 179 iPad ........................................................... 306 iPhone ....................................................... 306 iPod ................................................... 273, 306
J Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) ........................ 555 Jump Starting ........................................... 562
599
600
In d
ex
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 600
K Key Number Tag ....................................... 127 Keyless Lockout Prevention ..................... 136 Keys ........................................................... 126
Lockout Prevention .................................. 136 Number Tag ............................................ 127 Rear Door Wont Open............................ 139 Remote Transmitter ................................. 134 Types and Functions ................................ 126
Kickdown (Automatic Transmission) ....... 402
L Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ......... 459 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Amber) ..................................... 91
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Green)....................................... 91
LATCH (Child Seats) .............................. 67, 73 Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/ Android Auto .......................................... 319
License Information.................................. 322 Lights ................................................. 162, 519
Auto High-Beam...................................... 167 Automatic ............................................... 163 Bulb Replacement.................................... 519 Daytime Running Lights ........................... 166 High Beam Indicator .................................. 86 Interior .................................................... 192 Light Switches ......................................... 162 Lights On Indicator .................................... 86
Turn Signals ............................................ 161 Load Limits................................................ 379 Locking/Unlocking.................................... 126
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking.................. 140 Childproof Door Locks............................. 139 From Inside ............................................. 137 From Outside .......................................... 129 Keys ........................................................ 126 Using a Key ............................................. 135
Lockout Prevention System ..................... 136 Low Battery Charge ................................. 568 Low Fuel Indicator...................................... 83 Lower Anchors...................................... 67, 73 Lubricant Specifications Chart ................. 583 Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 379 Lumbar Support ....................................... 182 Lumbar Support Adjustment Switch ....... 182
M Maintenance..................................... 115, 497
Battery .................................................... 537 Brake Fluid .............................................. 518 Cleaning ................................................. 542 Coolant................................................... 515 Maintenance MinderTM ............................ 501 Oil........................................................... 511 Precautions ............................................. 498 Radiator .................................................. 516 Remote Transmitter................................. 539 Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 519
Safety ..................................................... 499 Service Items........................................... 504 Tires........................................................ 528 Transmission Fluid................................... 517 Under the Hood...................................... 507
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............. 81, 568 Map Lights................................................ 193 Maximum Load Limit ............................... 379 Meters, Gauges ........................................ 107 Mirrors ...................................................... 179
Adjusting ................................................ 179 Door ....................................................... 180 Exterior ................................................... 180 Interior Rearview..................................... 179
Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 547 Moonroof ................................................. 157 MP3 ................................................... 276, 279 MP3/WMA/AAC ................................ 276, 279 Multi-View Rear Camera ......................... 491 My Honda Music ...................................... 279
N Navigation ................................................ 114 Now Playing ............................................. 117 Numbers (Identification) ......................... 584
O Odometer ................................................. 109 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ............. 392
In d
ex
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 601
Oil (Engine) .............................................. 510 Adding ................................................... 512 Checking ................................................ 511 Displaying Maintenance Minder Information........................................... 502
Engine Oil Low Warning ......................... 567 Oil Life .................................................... 115 Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 510 Viscosity.................................................. 510
Open Source Licenses .............................. 321 Opening/Closing
Hood ...................................................... 508 Moonroof ............................................... 157 Power Windows...................................... 154 Tailgate................................................... 141
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel....................................... 158
Outside Temperature .............................. 109 Overheating ............................................. 565
P Paddle Shifters (Sequential Mode) ... 23, 410 Panic Mode............................................... 153 Parking ..................................................... 480 Parking Brake ........................................... 476 Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator ................................................. 569
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber)..................................... 80
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red) .......................................... 80
Parking Sensor System ............................. 482 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 59 Passing Indicators ..................................... 162 Phone ........................................................ 116 Playing Bluetooth Audio ........................ 283 Power Tailgate.......................................... 143 Power Windows........................................ 154 Precautions While Driving ....................... 401
Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle .................................................. 401
Rain......................................................... 401 Pregnant Women ....................................... 45 Puncture (Tire) .......................................... 551
R Radiator .................................................... 516 Radio (FM/AM).......................................... 260 Radio (SiriusXM) ..................................... 263 Radio Data System (RDS).......................... 262 Range ........................................................ 113 RDS (Radio Data System).......................... 262 Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ....... 587 Rear Climate Control System
From the Rear Panel ................................ 218 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button ..................................................... 173
Rear Outer Seats Heaters ......................... 209 Rear Seat (Folding Down) ................ 186, 187
Rear Seats ................................................. 185 Rearview Mirror ....................................... 179 Refueling .................................................. 493
Fuel Gauge.............................................. 107 Gasoline.......................................... 493, 582 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 83
Regulations............................... 429, 531, 585 Remote Engine Start ................................ 396 Remote Transmitter ................................. 134 Replacement
Battery .................................................... 539 Bulbs....................................................... 519 Front Wiper Blade Rubber ....................... 524 Fuses............................... 572, 573, 574, 575 Rear Wiper Blade Rubber......................... 526 Tires ........................................................ 534
Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 586 Reverse Tilt Door Mirror .......................... 180 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) ......... 468
On and Off.............................................. 470 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Indicator.................................................... 92
S Safe Driving ................................................ 31 Safety Check ............................................... 36 Safety Labels............................................... 78 Safety Message............................................. 3 Seat Belts ............................................ 37, 118
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor.................. 43
601
602
In d
ex
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 602
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners.................. 41 Checking ................................................... 46 Detachable Anchor .................................... 44 Fastening................................................... 42 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/ Shoulder Seat Belt.................................... 70
Pregnant Women ...................................... 45 Reminder................................................... 39 Warning Indicator................................ 39, 83
Seat Heaters .............................. 207, 208, 209 Seat Ventilation ........................................ 208 Seats .......................................................... 181
Adjusting................................................. 181 Drivers Seat Lumbar Support................... 182 Folding Down the Rear Seat............. 186, 187 Front Seats .............................................. 181 Rear Seats................................................ 185 Seat Heaters ............................ 207, 208, 209 Seat Ventilation ....................................... 208
Security System ......................................... 151 Immobilizer System Indicator ..................... 87 Security System Alarm Indicator ................. 87
Select Button....................................... 22, 403 Operation .......................................... 22, 405
Selecting a Child Seat ................................. 66 Sequential Mode ...................................... 409 Sequential Mode Operation .................... 410 Setting the Clock ...................................... 124 Settings
Arrange Apps .......................................... 120 Show Tachometer.................................... 121
Shift Button ........................................ 22, 403 Shifting (Transmission)....................... 22, 403 Shoulder Anchor ........................................ 43 Show Tachometer .................................... 121 Show/Hide Apps ....................................... 119 Side Airbags................................................ 55 Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 57 Siri Eyes Free ............................................. 294 SiriusXM Radio........................................ 263 Snow Tires................................................. 536 Social Playlist ............................................ 285 Spare Tire.......................................... 551, 583 Spark Plugs ............................................... 582 Specifications............................................ 582 Specified Fuel ................................... 493, 582 Speedometer ............................................ 108 SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................. 50 Starting Assist Brake Function ................. 416 Starting the Engine .................................. 394
Does Not Start......................................... 559 If the Battery Is Dead ............................... 562 Remote Engine Start................................ 396
Steering Wheel ......................................... 178 Adjusting ................................................ 178 Heater..................................................... 210
Stopping ................................................... 480 Summer Tires ............................................ 536 Sunglasses Holder..................................... 205 Sunshades ................................................. 206 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)........ 50
Switches (Around the Steering Wheel) ............................................ 6, 7, 158
SYNC Mode .............................................. 216 System Message Indicator ......................... 88 System Updates ........................................ 242
T Tachometer .............................................. 108 Tailgate..................................................... 141
Unable to Open ...................................... 580 Temperature
Gauge .................................................... 107 Outside Temperature Display .................. 109
Temperature Gauge ................................ 107 Temperature Sensor ........................ 109, 219 Tie-down Anchors .................................... 211 Time (Setting)........................................... 124 Tire Fill Assist ............................................ 570 Tire Pressure ............................................. 115 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Indicator ................................................... 86 Tires .......................................................... 528
Air Pressure..................................... 529, 583 Checking and Maintaining ...................... 528 Inspection ............................................... 528 Labeling.................................................. 529 Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 551 Regulations............................................. 531 Rotation.................................................. 535 Spare Tire ....................................... 551, 583
In d
ex
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 603
Summer.................................................. 536 Tire Chains.............................................. 536 Wear Indicators....................................... 533 Winter .................................................... 536
Tools ......................................................... 550 Towing a Trailer ....................................... 382
Equipment and Accessories..................... 385 Load Limits ............................................. 382
Towing Your Vehicle ............................... 391 Emergency.............................................. 577
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Indicator ................................................... 86
TPMS with Tire Fill Assist ......................... 427 Indicator ................................................. 570 Tire Fill Assist .......................................... 570
Trailer Stability Assist............................... 389 Transmission....................................... 22, 403
Automatic......................................... 22, 403 Fluid ....................................................... 517 Gear Position Indicator...................... 81, 405 Number .................................................. 584 Sequential Mode..................................... 409
Trip Computer .......................................... 112 Trip Meter ................................................ 113 Troubleshooting ...................................... 549
Blown Fuse ..................... 572, 573, 574, 575 Brake Pedal Vibrates ................................. 28 Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door ......... 29 Emergency Towing ................................. 577 Engine Wont Start ................................. 559
Noise When Braking .................................. 29 Overheating ............................................ 565 Puncture/Flat Tire..................................... 551 Rear Door Wont Open...................... 28, 139 Warning Indicators .................................... 80
Turn Signals .............................................. 161 Indicators (Instrument Panel)...................... 86
U Under-floor Storage Area ........................ 212 Units .......................................................... 117 Unlocking the Doors ................................ 129 Unlocking the Front Doors from the Inside ....................................................... 137
USB Flash Drives................................ 276, 306 USB Port .................................................... 223
V Vanity Mirrors ............................................... 9 Vehicle Identification Number ................ 584 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA)............... 420
Off Button............................................... 421 System Indicator ................................ 84, 420 Ventilation............................................... 214
Viscosity (Oil) .................................... 510, 583 Voice Control Operation .......................... 257
Audio Commands ................................... 259 Phone Commands ................................... 259 Voice Portal Screen.................................. 258
Voice Recognition ................................... 257
W Wallpaper ................................................. 232 Warning and Information Messages......... 96 Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 567 Warning Labels........................................... 78 Warnings................................................... 114 Warranties (Warranty Manual provided separately) .............................................. 589
Watts......................................................... 582 Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 533 Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ........... 555 Wi-Fi Connection...................................... 292 Window Washers ..................................... 170
Adding/Refilling Fluid .............................. 518 Switch..................................................... 170
Windows (Opening and Closing) ............ 154 Windshield................................................ 170
Cleaning ......................................... 542, 545 Defrosting/Defogging.............................. 214 Washer Fluid ........................................... 518 Wiper Blades ........................................... 524 Wipers and Washers................................ 170
Winter Tires .............................................. 536 Snow Tires .............................................. 536 Tire Chains .............................................. 536
Wipers and Washers................................. 170 Automatic Intermittent Wipers ................ 171 Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 524
603
604
In d
ex
22 PASSPORT-31TGS6300.book 604
Front ....................................................... 170 Rear......................................................... 172
Wireless Charger....................................... 201 WMA ................................................. 276, 279 Worn Tires................................................. 528
Related manuals for Honda Passport 2022 Owner'sManual
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the Passport Honda works, you can view and download the Honda Passport 2022 Owner'sManual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Honda Passport as well as other Honda manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Honda Passport. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Honda Passport 2022 Owner'sManual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Honda Passport 2022 Owner'sManual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Honda Passport 2022 Owner'sManual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Honda Passport 2022 Owner'sManual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Honda Passport 2022 Owner'sManual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.